ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

B.E.(PART TIME) PROGRAMMES OFFERED IN THE AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS

CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI FOR I - VII SEMESTERS

REGULATIONS – 2009

S.NO

NAME OF THE PROGRAMME

FACULTY OF CIVIL ENGINEERING

1. B.E. Civil Engineering

FACULTY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2. B.E. Mechanical Engineering

3. B.E. Manufacturing Engineering

4. B.E. Production Engineering

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

5. B.E. Electrical and Electronics Engineering

6. B.E. Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

FACULTY OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

7. B.E. Computer Science and Engineering

8. B.E. Electronics Communication and Engineering

1

ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI

AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS

R – 2009 B.E. PRODUCTION ENGINEERING (PART – TIME)

I – VII SEMESTERS CURRICULA AND SYLLABI

SEMESTER I

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. PTMA2111 Applied Mathematics 3 1 0 4

2. PTPH2111 Applied Physics 3 0 0 3

3. PTCY2111 Applied Chemistry 3 0 0 3

4. PTGE2112 Fundamental of Computing and Programming 3 0 0 3

5. PTGE2151 Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering 4 0 0 4

TOTAL CREDITS 16 1 0 17

SEMESTER II

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. PTMA2266 Statistics and Numerical Methods 3 1 0 4

2. PTME2151 Engineering Mechanics 3 0 0 3

3. PTPR2203 Engineering Metallurgy 3 0 0 3

4. PTPR2305 Foundry and Welding Technology 3 0 0 3

PRACTICALS

5. PTPR2254 Metallurgy Lab 0 0 3 2

TOTAL CREDITS 12 1 3 15

2

SEMESTER III

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. PTPR2252 Theory of Machines 3 1 0 4

2. PTPR2202 Basics of Thermodynamics and Thermal Engineering 3 1 0 4

3. PTME2254 Strength of Materials 3 0 0 3

4. PTPR2253 Fluid Power Drives and Controls 3 0 0 3

PRACTICALS

5. PTME2208 Fluid Machines and Machinery Lab 0 0 3 2

TOTAL PERIODS 12 2 3 16

SEMESTER IV

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. PTPR2304 Machine Elements Design 3 1 0 4

2. PTME2027 Process Planning and Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3

3. PTPR2302 Metal Forming Technology 3 0 0 3

4. PTME2304 Engineering Metrology and Measurements 3 1 0 4

PRACTICALS

5. PTPR2356 Metrology and Inspection Lab 0 0 3 2

TOTAL PERIODS 12 2 3 16

3

SEMESTER V

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. PTPR2251 Advance Machining Process 3 1 0 4

2. PTMG2451 Engineering Economics and Cost Analysis 3 0 0 3

3. PTPR2354 Design of Jigs, Fixture Press Tools & Drawings 3 0 0 3

4. PTPR2303 Engineering Statistic and Quality Control 3 1 0 4

PRACTICALS

5. PTPR2306 CNC Machine Lab 0 0 3 2

TOTAL PERIODS 12 2 3 20

SEMESTER VI

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. PTPR2353 Automated Production and Computer Integrated Manufacturing 3 1 0 4

2. PTME2028 Robotics 3 0 0 3

3. PTPR2351 Finite Element Analysis in Manufacturing Engineering 3 0 0 3

4. E1* Elective - I 3 0 0 3

5. PTME2404 Computer Aided Simulation and Analysis Laboratory 0 0 3 2

TOTAL PERIODS 12 1 3 18

4

SEMESTER VII

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. PTPR2352 Computer Aided and Product Design 3 1 0 4

2. PTME2401 Mechatronics 3 0 0 3

3. E2** Elective -II 3 0 0 3

4. E3*** Elective - III 3 0 0 3

5. PTPR2452 Project work 0 0 12 6

TOTAL PERIODS 12 1 12 19

5

ELECTIVES

SL.NO. CODE NO. COURSE TITLE L T P C 1. PTME 2026 Unconventional Machining Processes 3 0 0 3 2. PTPR 2021 Precision Engineering 3 0 0 3 3. PTPR 2024 Surface Engineering 3 0 0 3 4. PTMG 2021 Marketing Management 3 0 0 3 5. PTME 2021 Quality Control & Reliability Engineering 3 0 0 3 6. PTPR 2022 Fuzzy Logic and ANN 3 0 0 3 7. PTPR 2023 Instrumentation and Control 3 0 0 3 8. PTPR 2025 Design of Machine Tool Structure 3 0 0 3 9. PTPR 2030 Composite Materials 3 0 0 3

10. PTPR 2028 Processing of Polymer and Composites 3 0 0 3 11. PTPR 2031 Non Destructive Testing Methods 3 0 0 3 12. PTPR 2032 Simulation of Manufacturing Systems 3 0 0 3 13. PTPR 2026 Production Management 3 0 0 3 14. PTPR 2027 Ergonomics 3 0 0 3 15. PTPR 2029 Engineering Economics and Financial

Management 3 0 0 3

16. PTPR 2030 Purchasing and Material Management 3 0 0 3 17. PTME 2038 Operations Research 3 0 0 3 18. PTPR 2033 Reliability Engineering 3 0 0 3 19. PTPR 2034 Machine Tool Control and Condition Monitoring 3 0 0 3 20. PTPR 2035 Mini Project 0 0 6 3 21. PTGE 2025 Professional Ethics in Engineering 3 0 0 3 22. PTME 2035 Entrepreneurship Development 3 0 0 3 23 PTPR 2036 Machine Vision 3 0 0 3 24. PTPR 2037 Advances in Operation Research 3 0 0 3 25. PTGE 2023 Fundamentals of Nanoscience 3 0 0 3 26. PTME 2036 Production Planning & Control 3 0 0 3 27. PTME 2037 Maintenance Engineering 3 0 0 3

6

PTMA2111 APPLIED MATHEMATICS L T P C 3 1 0 4 UNIT I MATRICES 12 Characteristic equation – Eigen values and eigen vectors of a real matrix – Properties – Cayley-Hamilton theorem (excluding proof) – Orthogonal transformation of a symmetric matrix to diagonal form – Quadratic form – Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation.

UNIT II THREE DIMENSIONAL ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY 12 Equation of a sphere – Plane section of a sphere – Tangent Plane – Equation of a cone – Right circular cone – Equation of a cylinder – Right circular cylinder.

UNIT III DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12 Curvature in Cartesian co-ordinates – Centre and radius of curvature – Circle of curvature – Evolutes – Envelopes – Evolute as envelope of normals.

UNIT IV FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12 Partial derivatives – Euler’s theorem for homogenous functions – Total derivatives – Differentiation of implicit functions – Jacobians – Taylor’s expansion – Maxima and Minima – Method of Lagrangian multipliers.

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12 Double integration – Cartesian and polar coordinates – Change of order of integration – Change of variables between Cartesian and polar coordinates – Triple integration in Cartesian co-ordinates – Area as double integral – Volume as triple integral

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “Text book of Engineering Mathematics”, Third edition,

Laxmi Publications(p) Ltd.,(2008). 2. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 40

th Edition, Khanna Publications,

Delhi, (2007)

REFERENCES:

1. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, (2007).

2. Glyn James, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 7th Edition, Pearson Education,

(2007). 3. Jain R.K and Iyengar S.R.K,” Advanced Engineering Mathematics”,

3rd

Edition, Narosa Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., (2007).

7

PTPH2111 APPLIED PHYSICS L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I ULTRASONICS 9 Introduction – Production – magnetostriction effect - magnetostriction generator- piezoelectric effect - piezoelectric generator- Detection of ultrasonic waves properties – Cavitations - Velocity measurement – acoustic grating - Industrial applications – drilling, welding, soldering and cleaning – SONAR - Non Destructive Testing – pulse echo system through transmission and reflection modes - A,B and C –scan displays, Medical applications - Sonograms

UNIT II LASERS 9 Introduction – Principle of Spontaneous emission and stimulated emission. Population inversion, pumping. Einsteins A and B coeffcients - derivation. Types of lasers – He-Ne, CO

2 , Nd-YAG, Semiconductor lasers (homojunction & heterojunction) Qualitative

Industrial Applications - Lasers in welding, heat treatment, cutting – Medical applications - Holography (construction & reconstruction).

UNIT III FIBER OPTICS & APPLICATIONS 9 Principle and propagation of light in optical fibres – Numerical aperture and Acceptance angle - Types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – Double crucible technique of fibre drawing - Splicing, Loss in optical fibre – attenuation, dispersion, bending - Fibre optical communication system (Block diagram) - Light sources - Detectors - Fibre optic sensors – temperature & displacement - Endoscope.

UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9 Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien’s displacement law and Rayleigh – Jeans’ Law from Planck’s theory – Compton effect. Theory and experimental verification – Matter waves – Schrödinger’s wave equation – Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical significance of wave function – Particle in a one dimensional box - Electron microscope - Scanning electron microscope - Transmission electron microscope.

UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9 Lattice – Unit cell – Bravais lattice – Lattice planes – Miller indices – d spacing in cubic lattice – Calculation of number of atoms per unit cell – Atomic radius – Coordination number – Packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures – NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite structures – Polymorphism and allotropy - Crystal defects – point, line and surface defects- Burger vector.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. R. K. Gaur and S.C. Gupta, ‘Engineering Physics’ Dhanpat Rai Publications, New

Delhi(2003) 2. M.N. Avadhanulu and PG Kshirsagar, ‘A Text book of Engineering Physics’,

S.Chand and company, Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.

REFERENCES: 1. Serway and Jewett, ‘Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics’, 6

th

8

Edition, Thomson Brooks/Cole, Indian reprint (2007) 2. Rajendran, V and Marikani A, ‘Engineering Physics’ Tata McGraw Hill Publications

Ltd, III Edition, New Delhi, (2004). 3. Palanisamy, P.K., ‘Engineering Physics’ Scitech publications, Chennai, (2007). 4. Jayakumar. S, ‘Engineering Physics’, R.K. Publishers, Coimbatore, (2003). 5. Chitra Shadrach and Sivakumar Vadivelu, ‘Engineering Physics’, Pearson Education,

New Delhi, (2007). PTCY2111 APPLIED CHEMISTRY L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM

To impart a sound knowledge on the principles of chemistry involving the different application oriented topics required for all engineering branches.

OBJECTIVES • The student should be conversant with the principles water characterization and treatment of potable and industrial purposes. • Principles of polymer chemistry and engineering applications of polymers • Industrial applications of surface chemistry • Conventional and non-conventional energy sources and energy storage devices and Chemistry of engineering materials UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9 Characteristics – alkalinity – types of alkalinity and determination – hardness – types and estimation by EDTA method (problems); Domestic water treatment – disinfection methods (Chlorination, ozonation. UV treatment) – Boiler feed water – requirements – disadvantages of using hard water in boilers – internal conditioning (phosphate, calgon and carbonate conditioning methods) – external conditioning – demineralization process – desalination and reverse osmosis. UNIT II POLYMERS AND COMPOSITES 9 Polymers-definition – polymerization – types – addition and condensation polymerization – free radical polymerization mechanism – Plastics, classification – preparation, properties and uses of PVC, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyurethane, nylon-6,6, PET- Rubber -vulcanization of rubber, synthetic rubbers – buty1 rubber, SBR, Composites – definition, types polymer matrix composites – FRP only.

UNIT III SURFACE CHEMISTRY 9 Adsorption – types – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption isotherms – Frendlich and Langmuir isotherms – adsorption of solutes from solution – role of adsorbents in catalysis, ion-exchange adsorption and pollution abatement.

UNIT IV NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9 Nuclear energy – fission and fusion reactions and light water nuclear reactor for power generation (block diagram only) – breeder reactor – solar energy conversion – solar cells

9

– wind energy – fuel cells – hydrogen – oxygen fuel cell – batteries – alkaline batteries – lead–acid, nickel–cadmium and lithium batteries.

UNIT V ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9 Refractories – classification – acidic, basic and neutral refractories – properties (refractoriness, refractoriness under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) – manufacture of alumina, magnesite and zirconia bricks, Abrasives – natural and synthetic abrasives – quartz, corundum, emery, garnet, diamond, silicon carbide and boron carbide. Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants, - properties – viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud and pour points, oilyness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum sulphide. Nanomaterials – introduction to nanochemistry – carbon nanotubes and their applications

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:

1. P.C.Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Pub, Co., New Delhi (2002).

2. S.S. Dara “A text book of engineering chemistry” S.Chand & Co.Ltd., New Delhi (2006).

REFERENCES:

1. B.K.Sharma “Engineering chemistry” Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut (2001).

2. B. Sivasankar “Engineering Chemistry” Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.Co.Ltd, New Delhi (2008).

PTGE2112 FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTING AND L T P C PROGRAMMING 3 0 0 3

AIM : To provide an awareness to Computing and Programming

OBJECTIVES : • To enable the student to learn the major components of a computer system

• To know the correct and efficient ways of solving problems • To learn to use office automation tools • To learn to program in C

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS 9 Introduction – Characteristics of Computers – Evolution of Computers - Computer Generations – Classification of Computers – Basic Computer organization – Number Systems

10

UNIT II COMPUTER SOFTWARE 9 Computer Software –Types of Software – Software Development Steps – Internet Evolution - Basic Internet Terminology – Getting connected to Internet Applications.

UNIT III PROBLEM SOLVING AND OFFICE APPLICATION SOFTWARE 9 Planning the Computer Program – Purpose – Algorithm – Flow Charts – Pseudocode -Application Software Packages- Introduction to Office Packages (not detailed commands for examination). UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO C 9 Overview of C – Constants, Variables and Data Types – Operators and Expressions – Managing Input and Output operators – Decision Making - Branching and Looping. UNIT V FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 9 Handling of Character Strings – User-defined Functions – Definitions – Declarations - Call by reference – Call by value – Structures and Unions – Pointers – Arrays – The Preprocessor – Developing a C Program : Some Guidelines

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Ashok.N.Kamthane,“ Computer Programming”, Pearson Education (India) (2008). 2. Behrouz A.Forouzan and Richard.F.Gilberg, “A Structured Programming Approach

Using C”, II Edition, Brooks-Cole Thomson Learning Publications, (2007).

REFERENCES: 1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghoush, “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press. (2007). 2. Byron Gottfried, “Programming with C”, 2

nd Edition, (Indian Adapted Edition), TMH

publications, (2006). 3. Stephen G.Kochan, “Programming in C”, Third Edition, Pearson Education India,

(2005). 4. Brian W.Kernighan and Dennis M.Ritchie, “The C Programming Language”, Pearson

Education Inc., (2005). 5. E.Balagurusamy, “Computing fundamentals and C Programming”, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Limited, (2008). 6. S.Thamarai Selvi and R.Murugan, “C for All”, Anuradha Publishers, (2008). PTGE2151 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C

(Common to branches under Civil, Mechanical and Technology faculty) 4 0 0 4

UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASURMENTS 12 Ohm’s Law – Kirchoff’s Laws – Steady State Solution of DC Circuits – Introduction to AC Circuits – Waveforms and RMS Value – Power and Power factor – Single Phase and Three Phase Balanced Circuits.

11

Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron Instruments (Ammeters and Voltmeters), Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy meters. UNIT II ELECTRICAL MECHANICS 12 Construction, Principle of Operation, Basic Equations and Applications of DC Generators, DC Motors, Single Phase Transformer, single phase induction Motor. UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 12 Characteristics of PN Junction Diode – Zener Effect – Zener Diode and its Characteristics – Half wave and Full wave Rectifiers – Voltage Regulation.

Bipolar Junction Transistor – CB, CE, CC Configurations and Characteristics – Elementary Treatment of Small Signal Amplifier.

UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 12 Binary Number System – Logic Gates – Boolean Algebra – Half and Full Adders – Flip-Flops – Registers and Counters – A/D and D/A Conversion (single concepts)

UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 12 Types of Signals: Analog and Digital Signals – Modulation and Demodulation: Principles of Amplitude and Frequency Modulations.

Communication Systems: Radio, TV, Fax, Microwave, Satellite and Optical Fibre (Block Diagram Approach only).

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. V.N. Mittle “Basic Electrical Engineering”,Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 1990. 2. R.S. Sedha, “Applied Electronics” S. Chand & Co., 2006.

REFERENCES: 1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraleedharan K A, “Basic Electrical,

Electronics and Computer Engineering”,Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, (2006). 2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford press

(2005). 3. Mehta V K, “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, (1994). 4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline

Series, McGraw Hill, (2002). 5. Premkumar N, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Anuradha Publishers, (2003). PTMA 2266 STATISTICS AND NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C (Common to Mechanical, Automobile & Production) 3 1 0 4

UNIT I TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9 + 3 Sampling distributions - Tests for single mean, Proportion, Difference of means (large and small samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – chi-square test for goodness of fit – Independence of attributes.

12

UNIT II DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9 + 3 Completely randomized design – Randomized block design – Latin square design - 22 - factorial design. UNIT III SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS 9 +3 Newton-Raphson method- Gauss Elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss-Jordan methods – Iterative methods of Gauss-Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel - Matrix Inversion by Gauss-Jordan method - Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power method . UNIT IV INTERPOLATION, NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND NUMERICAL

INTEGRATION 9 + 3 Lagrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolation –Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation - Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials - Numerical integration using Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules. UNIT V NUMERICAL SOLUTION OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3 Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth order Runge-Kutta method for solving first and second order equations - Milne’s predictor-corrector methods for solving first order equations - Finite difference methods for solving second order equation.

L = 45 T = 15 TOTAL :60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS:

1. R.A. Johnson and C.B. Gupta, “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, Asia, 7th edition, 2007 (For units 3, 4 and 5).

2. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., “ Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, 6th Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCES: 1. R.E. Walpole, R.H. Myers, S.L. Myers, and K Ye, “Probability and Statistics for

Engineers and Scientists”, Pearson Education, Asia , 8th edition, 2007. 2. M.R. Spiegel, J. Schiller and R.A. Srinivasan, “Schaum’s Outlines Probability and

Statistics”, Tata McGraw Hill edition, 2004. 3. Chapra, S. C and Canale, R. P. “Numerical Methods for Engineers”, 5th Edition, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2007. 4. Gerald, C. F. and Wheatley, P. O., “Applied Numerical Analysis”, 6th Edition, Pearson

Education Asia, New Delhi, 2006. PTME2151 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C 3 1 0 4 OBJECTIVE At the end of this course the student should be able to understand the vectorial and scalar representation of forces and moments, static equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies both in two dimensions and also in three dimensions. Further, he should understand the principle of work and energy. He should be able to comprehend the

13

effect of friction on equilibrium. He should be able to understand the laws of motion, the kinematics of motion and the interrelationship. He should also be able to write the dynamic equilibrium equation. All these should be achieved both conceptually and through solved examples. UNIT I BASICS & STATICS OF PARTICLES 12 Introduction – Units and Dimensions – Laws of Mechanics – Lame’s theorem, Parallelogram and triangular Law of forces – Vectors – Vectorial representation of forces and moments – Vector operations: additions, subtraction, dot product, cross product – Coplanar Forces – Resolution and Composition of forces – Equilibrium of a particle – Forces in space – Equilibrium of a particle in space – Equivalent systems of forces – Principle of transmissibility – Single equivalent force. UNIT II EQUILIBRIUM OF RIGID BODIES 12 Free body diagram – Types of supports and their reactions – requirements of stable equilibrium – Moments and Couples – Moment of a force about a point and about an axis – Vectorial representation of moments and couples – Scalar components of a moment – Varignon’s theorem – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in two dimensions – Equilibrium of Rigid bodies in three dimensions – Examples \ UNIT III PROPERTIES OF SURFACES AND SOLIDS 12 Determination of Areas and Volumes – First moment of area and the Centroid of sections – Rectangle, circle, triangle from integration – T section, I section, - Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula – second and product moments of plane area – Rectangle, triangle, circle from integration – T section, I section, Angle section, Hollow section by using standard formula – Parallel axis theorem and perpendicular axis theorem – Polar moment of inertia – Principal moments of inertia of plane areas – Principal axes of inertia – Mass moment of inertia – Derivation of mass moment of inertia for rectangular section, prism, sphere from first principle – Relation to area moments of inertia. UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 12 Displacements, Velocity and acceleration, their relationship – Relative motion – Curvilinear motion – Newton’s law – Work Energy Equation of particles – Impulse and Momentum – Impact of elastic bodies. UNIT V FRICTION AND ELEMENTS OF RIGID BODY DYNAMICS 12 Frictional force – Laws of Coloumb friction – simple contact friction – Rolling resistance – Belt friction. Translation and Rotation of Rigid Bodies – Velocity and acceleration – General Plane motion.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK: 1. Beer, F.P and Johnson Jr. E.R. “Vector Mechanics for Engineers”, Vol. 1 Statics and

Vol. 2 Dynamics, McGraw-Hill International Edition, (1997). REFERENCES: 1. Rajasekaran, S, Sankarasubramanian, G., “Fundamentals of Engineering

Mechanics”, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., (2000).

14

2. Hibbeller, R.C., “Engineering Mechanics”, Vol. 1 Statics, Vol. 2 Dynamics, Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., (2000).

3. Palanichamy, M.S., Nagam, S., “Engineering Mechanics – Statics & Dynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, (2001).

4. Irving H. Shames, “Engineering Mechanics – Statics and Dynamics”, IV Edition – Pearson Education Asia Pvt. Ltd., (2003).

5. Ashok Gupta, “Interactive Engineering Mechanics – Statics – A Virtual Tutor (CDROM)”, Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., (2002).

PTPR 2203 ENGINEERING METALLURGY L T P C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVE: To introduce the various concepts of metallurgy, metallurgical structures and mechanical properties, testing of metals To impart the knowledge on metallurgy with respect to foundry and welding processes

UNIT I CONSTITUTION OF ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS 10 Crystal structure – BCC, FCC and HCP structure – unit cell – crystallographic planes and directions, miller indices – crystal imperfection, point, line, planner and volume defects – Grain size, ASTM grain size number. Constitution of alloys – Solid solutions, substitutional and interstitial – phase diagrams, isomorphous, eutectic, peritectic, eutectoid and peritectoid reactions, Iron – Iron carbide and Iron – Charbide & Iron Graphite equilibrium diagram. Classification of steel and cast iron - microstructures of Steels & Cast irons - properties and application.

UNIT II HEAT TREATMENT 10 Defintion – Full annealing, stress relief, recrystallisation and spheroidizing – normalizing, hardening and tempering of steel, Isothermal transformation diagrams – cooling curves superimposed on I.T. diagram CCR – Hardenability, Jominy end quench test – Austempering martempering – case hardening, carburizing, nitriding cyaniding, carbonitriding – Flame, Induction Laser and Electron beam and plasma phase hardening – Special and Duplex surface hardening processes.

UNIT III FERROUS AND NON FERROUS METALS 9 Effect of alloying additions on steel (Mn, Si, Cr, Mo, V Ti & W) – stainless and tool steels – HSLA – maraging steels – Gray, white, malleable spheroidal, graphite, alloy cast irons Copper and Copper alloys, Brass, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and AI-Cu – precipitation strengthening treatment – Bearing alloys, Alloys of Ti, Zn Mg and Ni – Intermetallics, Ni, Ti Aluminides – Shape memory alloys. UNIT IV MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTING 8 Mechanism of plastic deformation, slip and twinning – Types of fracture – Testing of materials under tension, compression and shear loads – hardness tests (Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell) micro and nano hardness test impact test, Izod and charpy, fatigue and creep mechanisms – types of wear – preventions.

15

UNIT V WELDING AND FOUNDRY METALLURGY 8 Weld thermal cycle – Microstructure of HAZ in Steel and Aluminium alloys – weldability of steel, cast iron and non-ferrous alloys – Pre and Post weld heat treatment – Residual stress and distortion – casting solidification – Formation of dendrite, columnar and equiaxed grains – castability of steel, cast iron, Stainless Steel Al and Cu alloys.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Donald R.Askeland – The Science and Engineering of materials – 4th Edition –

Thomson Engineering – 2002 2. Keneth G.Budinski and Michael K.Budinski “Engineering Materials” Prentice Hall of

India Private Limited, 7th Edition Indian Reprint 2004”.

REFERENCES: 1. Sydney H.Avner “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy” McGraw Hill Book Co., 2001 2. Raghavan V. Materials Science & Engg” Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd., 2004 3. William D Callister “Material Science & Engg – John Wiley & Sons, 2002 4. L.H.Van Vlack, “Materials Engg. Concepts and Applications, 2001.

PTPR 2305 FOUNDRY AND WELDING TECHNOLOGY L T P C 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVE: To understand the principle, procedure and applications of Foundry and Welding Processes UNIT I CASTING PROCESS 10 Introduction to casting – pattern – materials allowances – coding – types – moulds – mould making, sand – properties, types and testing of sands – core making – type of cores – single box, two box and 3 box moulding processes, runner, riser and gate. UNIT II WELDING PROCESSES 9 Introduction to soldering, brazing and welding types of joining – plane of welding – edge preparation – filler material – flux – shielding gases – fusion welding – gas welding – gas flame types – Manual arc welding – arc theory – power supply – braze welding – Thermit welding – Resistance welding – spot, seam, projection, percussion & flash. UNIT III SPECIAL CASTING PROCESSES 8 Pressure die casting – Centrifugal – continuous – investment – shell moulding – squeeze – electro slag casting – CO2 moulding – Plaster mould castings – Antioch process – Slush casting. UNIT IV SPECIAL WELDING PROCESSES 9 Atomic H2 arc welding – Shielded gas arc welding GMAW & GTAW – Submerged arc welding – Electro slag welding – friction welding – explosive welding – Underwater

16

welding – Diffusion bonding – EBW – LBW – PAW – Stud welding – welding of dissimilar materials – Friction stir welding. UNIT V TESTING OF CASTINGS & WELDMENTS 9 Causes and remedies for casting defects – welding defects – Destructive testing – NDT – Dye penetrant – magnetic particle – X-ray, ultrasonic cell – studies in testing of joints & castings.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Welding Engineering & Technology R.S.Parmer – Khanna Publishers – 2002. 2. Principle of metal casting – Heime, Looper and Rosenthal – Tata McGraw Hill – 2001 REFERENCES 1. Principle of Foundry Technology – P.L.John Tata McGraw Hill – 2003 2. Modern Welding Technology – B.Curry – Prentice Hall – 2002 3. Welding Principle & applications – Larry Jeff in Delmar – 1997 4. Foundry Engineering – Taylor HF Fleming, M.C. & Wiley Eastern Ltd., 93

PTPR 2254 METALLURGY LABORATORY L T P C 0 0 3 2

OBJECTIVES: To train the students in observation and interpretation of Microstructure of

Engineering materials. To train students in Heat treatment, hardenability and surface treatment of Engineering Materials To train the students in testing of Foundry sand LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Specimen preparation for macro – examination. 2. Specimen preparation for micro examination and study of Micro structure of – a) Carbon steel s(High, Medium, and Low) b) Cast Iron (Gray, White, Nodular, Malleable)

c) Brass (70/30), Bronze (tin bronze), Al-Si alloy, cupro-nickel, Ti alloy. 3. Quantitative metallography – Estimation of volume fraction, particle size, size

distribution, and shape. 4. Cooling curves a) Pure Metal (Pb or Sn) b) Alloy (Pb-Sn or Pb-Sb) 5. Heat treatments (carry out the following heat treatment and study the micro structure

before and after heat treatments) a) Annealing b) Normalising c) Quench Hardening d) Tempering 6. Jominy End Quench Test 7. Foundry Sand testing

17

a) Sieve analysis b) Strength of moulding sand c) Permeability of moulding sand d) Clay content of moulding sand e) Moisture content of moulding sand 8. Electro-chemical Test a) Electro deposition b) Electro-chemical etching tes

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS PTPR 2252 THEORY OF MACHINES L T P C 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVE: To understand the basic concepts of mechanisms and machinery UNIT I MECHANISMS 14 Definition – Machine and Structure – Kinematic link, pair and chain – classification of Kinematic pairs – Constraint & motion – Degrees of freedom - Slider crank – single and double – Crank rocker mechanisms – Inversions, applications – Introduction to Kinematic analysis and synthesis of simple mechanisms – Determination of velocity and acceleration of simple mechanisms. UNIT II FRICTION 12 Types of friction – friction in screw and nut – screw jack – pivot, collar and thrust bearings – plate and cone clutch – belt (flat & vee) and rope drives – creep in belts – open and crossed belt drives – Ratio of tensions – Effect of centrifugal and initial tensions – condition for maximum power transmission. UNIT III GEARING AND CAMS 12 Gear – Types and profile – nomenclature of spur & helical gears – laws of gearing – interference – requirement of minimum number of teeth in gears – gear trains – simple, compound and reverted gear trains – determination of speed and torque in epicyclic gear trains – cams different types of followers – Cam – Types of cams and followers – Cam design for different follower motions. UNIT IV BALANCING 11 Static and dynamic balancing – single and several masses in different planes – primary and secondary balancing of reciprocating masses – Balancing of single and multi cylinder engines – Governors and Gyroscopic effects. UNIT V VIBRATION 11 Free, forced and damped vibrations of single degree of freedom systems – force transmitted to supports – vibration Isolation – vibration absorption – torsional vibration of shafts – single and multirotor systems – geared shafts – critical speed of shafts.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

18

TEXT BOOKS 1. Bansal Dr.R.K. “ Theory of Machines” Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., New Delhi 2001 2. Rattan S.S.”Theory of machines” Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co., New Delhi, 2002.

REFERENCES 1. Rao J.S.and Dukkipati R.V. “Mechanism and Machine Theory” Second Edition, Wiley

Eastern Limited, 1992. 2. Malhotra D.R. and Gupta H.C “The Theory of machines” Satya Prakasam, Tech.

India Publications, 1989 3. Gosh A and Mallick A.K. “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms” affiliated east west

press, 1989 4. Shigley J.E. and Uicker J.J. Theory of Machines and Mechanisms” McGraw Hill,

1986. PTPR2202 BASICS OF THERMODYNAMICS AND THERMAL L T P C ENGINEERING 3 1 0 4 OBJECTIVE To introduce fundamental concepts in thermodynamics, heat tramsfer, propulsion and refrigeration and air conditioning. UNIT I BASIC THERMODYNAMICS 16 Systems, Zeroth low, First law. Steady flow energy equation. Heat and work transfer in flow and non-flow processes. Second law, Kelvin-Planck statement - Clausius statement - Concept of Entropy, Clausius inequality, Entropy change in non-flow processes. Properties of gases and vapours. UNIT II AIR CYCLE AND COMPRESSORS 12 Otto, Diesel, Dual combustion and Brayton cycles. Air standard efficiency . Mean effective pressure, Reciprocating compressors. UNIT III STEAM AND JET PROPULSION 12 Properties of steam – Rankine cycle – Steam Nozzles – Simple jet propulsion system – Thrust rocket motor – Specific impulse. UNIT IV REFRIGERATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING 10 Principles of Psychrometry and refrigeration - Vapour compression - Vapour absorption types - Co-efficient of performance, Properties of refrigerants – Basic Principle and types Air conditioning. UNIT V HEAT TRANSFER 10 Conduction in parallel, radial and composite wall – Basics of Convective heat transfer - Fundamentals of Radiative heat transfer – Flow through heat exchangers.

L = 45, T = 15, TOTAL : 60 PERIODS (Use of standard thermodynamic tables, Mollier diagram and Refrigerant property tables are permitted)

19

TEXT BOOKS 1. Nag.P.K., “Engineering Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2007. 2. Rathakrishnan E., “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics”, Prentice-Hall

India, 2005.

REFERENCES 1. Ramalingam K.K. “Thermodynamics”, Sci-Tech Publications, 2006 2. Holman.J.P., “Thermodynamics”, 3rd Ed. McGraw-Hill, 2007. 3. Venwylen and Sontag, “Classical Thermodynamics”, Wiley Eastern, 1987 4. Arora C.P, “ Thermodynamics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003. 5. Merala C, Pother, Craig W, Somerton, “ Thermodynamics for Engineers”, Schaum

Outline Series, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2004. PTME 2254 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS L T P C (Common to Mechanical, Automobile & Production) 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES To gain knowledge of simple stresses, strains and deformation in components due to

external loads. To assess stresses and deformations through mathematical models of beams,

twisting bars or combinations of both. Effect of component dimensions and shape on stresses and deformations are to be

understood. The study would provide knowledge for use in the design courses

UNIT I STRESS STRAIN DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 9 Rigid and Deformable bodies – Strength, Stiffness and Stability – Stresses; Tensile, Compressive and Shear – Deformation of simple and compound bars under axial load – Thermal stress – Elastic constants – Strain energy and unit strain energy – Strain energy in uniaxial loads.

UNITII BEAMS - LOADS AND STRESSES 9 Types of beams: Supports and Loads – Shear force and Bending Moment in beams – Cantilever, Simply supported and Overhanging beams – Stresses in beams – Theory of simple bending – Stress variation along the length and in the beam section – Effect of shape of beam section on stress induced – Shear stresses in beams – Shear flow

UNIT III TORSION 9 Analysis of torsion of circular bars – Shear stress distribution – Bars of Solid and hollow circular section – Stepped shaft – Twist and torsion stiffness – Compound shafts – Fixed and simply supported shafts – Application to close-coiled helical springs – Maximum shear stress in spring section including Wahl Factor – Deflection of helical coil springs under axial loads – Design of helical coil springs – stresses in helical coil springs under torsion loads

20

UNIT IV BEAMDEFLECTION 9 Elastic curve of Neutral axis of the beam under normal loads – Evaluation of beam deflection and slope: Double integration method, Macaulay Method, and Moment-area Method –Columns – End conditions – Equivalent length of a column – Euler equation – Slenderness ratio – Rankine formula for columns

UNIT V ANALYSIS OF STRESSES IN TWO DIMENSIONS 9 Biaxial state of stresses – Thin cylindrical and spherical shells – Deformation in thin cylindrical and spherical shells – Biaxial stresses at a point – Stresses on inclined plane – Principal planes and stresses – Mohr’s circle for biaxial stresses – Maximum shear stress - Strain energy in bending and torsion.

TUTORIALS 15 TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Popov E.P, “Engineering Mechanics of Solids”, Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi,

1997 2. Beer F. P. and Johnston R,” Mechanics of Materials”, McGraw-Hill Book Co, Third

Edition, 2002. REFERENCES: 1. Nash W.A, “Theory and problems in Strength of Materials”, Schaum Outline Series, McGraw-Hill Book Co, New York, 1995 2. Kazimi S.M.A, “Solid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1981. 3. Ryder G.H, “Strength of Materials, Macmillan India Ltd”., Third Edition, 2002 4. Ray Hulse, Keith Sherwin & Jack Cain, “Solid Mechanics”, Palgrave ANE Books, 2004. 5. Singh D.K “Mechanics of Solids” Pearson Education 2002. 6. Timoshenko S.P, “Elements of Strength of Materials”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1997.

PTPR 2253 FLUID POWER DRIVES AND CONTROL L T P C 3 1 0 4 OBJECTIVES:

To understand the working principle of hydraulic and pneumatic components and its selection To design hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for different applications

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FLUID POWER & HYDRAULICS PRINCIPLE 12 Introduction to fluid power controls – Hydraulics and pneumatics – Selection criteria, Application of Fluid power, Application of Pascal’s Law, equation, Transmission and multiplication of force – Pressure Losses – Fluids, selection & properties – ISO symbols. UNIT II FLUID POWER DRIVES 12 Fluid Power drives – Pumps – working principle and construction details of Gear, vane and piston pumps, Hydraulic motors, Hydrostatic transmission drives and characteristics,

21

Hydraulic supply components Pneumatic power supply – compressors, air distribution, air motors. UNIT III FLUID POWER ELEMENTS 12 Control valves – pressure, flow, direction - working principle and construction – Special type - valves – Cartridge, modular, proportional, and servo – Selection and actuation methods. Actuators – Selection and specification, cylinders, mounting, cushioning, pipe fittings – Fluid conditioning elements – Accumulators. UNIT IV HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC CIRCUITS DESIGN 12 Design of Hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for automation, selection and specification of circuit components, sequencing circuits, cascade, and karnaugh – Veitch map method – Regenerative, speed control, synchronizing circuits.

UNIT V ELECTRO PNEUMATICS AND PLC CIRCUITS 12 Use of electrical timers, switches, solenoid, relays, proximity sensors etc. electro pneumatic sequencing Ladder diagram – PLC – elements, functions and selection – PLC programming – Ladder and different programming methods - Sequencing circuits.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Anthony Esposito “Fluid power with applications”, 5th editor, Pearson education 2003. 2. Majumdar, “Oil hydraulics: Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004 3. Majumdar, “Pneumatic system: Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw Hill,

2004 REFERENCES: 1. William W.Reaves, Technology of Fluid Power, Delmer Publishers, 1997. 2. Petor Rohner, Fluid Power Logic circuit, Design Macmillon Press Ltd., 1990. 3. Andrew Parr “Hydraulics & Pneumatics, Jaico Publishing House, 2004 PTME2208 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY LAB L T P C (Common to Mechanical & Production) 0 0 3 2

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter. 2. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi meter. 3. Calculation of the rate of flow using Rota meter. 4. Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipes. 5. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal pump /

submergible pump 6. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating

pump. 7. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump. 8. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel.

22

9. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine. 10. Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT (for a batch of 30 students)

1. Orifice meter setup 2. Venturi meter setup 3. Rotameter setup 4. Pipe Flow analysis setup 5. Centrifugal pump/submergible pump setup 6. Reciprocating pump setup 7. Gear pump setup 8. Pelton wheel setup 9. Francis turbine setup 10. Kaplan turbine setup Quantity: one each.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS PTPR2304 MACHINE ELEMENTS DESIGN L T P C 3 1 0 4 OBJECTIVE: To introduce students to the design and theory of common machine elements and to give students experience in solving design problems involving machine elements.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12 Fundamentals of Machine Design-Engineering Design, Phases of Design, Design Consideration - Standards and Codes - Selection of Materials –Design against Static and Dynamic Load –Modes of Failure, Factor of Safety, Principal Stresses, Theories of Failure-Stress Concentration, Stress Concentration Factors, Variable Stress, Fatigue Failure, Endurance Limit, Design for Finite and Infinite Life, Soderberg and Goodman Criteria.

UNIT II DETACHABLE AND PERMANENT JOINTS 12 Design of Bolts under Static Load, Design of Bolt with Tightening/Initial Stress, Design of Bolts subjected to Fatigue – Keys -Types, Selection of Square and Flat Keys-Design of Riveted Joints and Welded Joints

UNIT III SHAFTS, COUPLING AND BRAKES 12 Design of Shaft –For Static and Varying Loads, For Strength and Rigidity-Design of Coupling-Types, Flange, Muff and Flexible Rubber Bushed Coupling-Design of Brakes-Block and Band Brakes UNIT IV GEARS AND BELT DRIVES 12 Design of Spur, Helical, Bevel and Worm Gear drives-Design of Belt drives-Flat and V Belts

23

UNIT V SPRINGS AND BEARINGS 12 Design of Helical Spring-Types, Materials, Static and Variable Loads-Design of Leaf Spring-Design of Journal Bearing -Antifriction Bearing-Types, Life of Bearing, Reliability Consideration, Selection of Ball and Roller Bearings

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS: 1. Joseph Edward Shigley, Charles R. Mischke “ Mechanical Engineering Design”,

McGraw Hill, International Edition, 1992 2. C.S.Sharma and Kamlesh Purohit, “ Design of Machine Elements”, Prentice Hall of

India Private Limited, 2003 REFERENCES: 1. V.B.Bhandari, “Design of Machine Elements”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company

Limited, 2003. 2. Robert L.Norton, “Machin Design – An Integrated Approach”, Prentice Hall

International Edition, 2000. PTME 2027 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T P C (Common to Production and Mechanical) 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVE To introduce the process planning concepts To make cost estimation for various products after process planning UNIT I WORK STUDY AND ERGONOMICS 10 Method study – Definition – Objectives-Motion economy- Principles – Tools and Techniques-Applications – Work measurements- purpose – use – procedure – tools and techniques- Standard time –Ergonomics – principles – applications. UNIT II PROCESS PLANNING 10 Definition – Objective – Scope – approaches to process planning- Process planning activities – Finished part requirements - operating sequences - machine selection – material selection parameters- Set of documents for process planning - Developing manufacturing logic and knowledge- production time calculation – selection of cost optimal processes. UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 7 Objective of cost estimation- costing – cost accounting- classification of cost- Elements of cost. UNIT IV COST ESTIMATION 8 Types of estimates – methods of estimates – data requirements and sources- collection of cost- allowances in estimation.

24

UNIT V PRODUCTION COST ESTIMATION 10 Estimation of material cost, labour cost and over heads, allocation of overheads – Estimation for different types of jobs. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK: 1. Banga and Shama, Cost estimation, Sinha.B.P., “Mechanical Estimating and

Costing”, Tata McGraw-Hill, Publishing Co., 1995 REFERENCES 1. Phillip.F Ostwalal and Jairo Munez, “Manufacturing Processes and systems”, John

Wiley, 9th Edition, 1998 2. Russell.R.S and Tailor, B.W, “Operations Management”, PHI, 4th Edition, 2003. 3. Chitale.A.V. and Gupta.R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, PHI , 2nd Edition,

2002. PTPR2302 METAL FORMING TECHNOLOGY L T P C 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES: To understand the principle, procedure and applications of Bulk Metal Forming and Sheet Metal Forming UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF METAL FORMING 15 State of stress – Components of stress, symmetry of stress tensor, principal stresses –Stress deviator – von-mises, Tresca yield criteria – Octahedral shear stress and shear strain theory – Flow stress determination – Temperature in metal forming – Hot, cold and warm working – strain rate effects –metallurgical structures – residual stresses – Spring back. UNIT II FORGING AND ROLLING 10 Principle – classification – equipment – tooling – processes parameters and calculation of forces during forging and rolling processes – Ring compression test - Post forming heat treatment – defects (causes and remedies) – applications – Roll forming. UNIT III EXTRUSION AND DRAWING PROCESSES 15 Classification of extrusion processes – tool, equipment and principle of these processes – influence of friction – extrusion force calculation – defects (causes and remedies) – Rod/Wire drawing – tool, equipment and principle of processes – defects – Tube drawing and sinking processes – mannessmann process of seamless pipe manufacturing – Tube bending. UNIT IV SHEET METAL FORMING PROCESSES 10 Classification – conventional and HERF processes – presses – types and selection of presses – formability studies – FLD, Limiting Draw ratio - processes: Deep drawing, spinning, stretch forming, plate bending, Rubber pad forming, bulging and press brake forming – Explosion forming, electro hydraulic forming, Magnetic pulse forming.

25

UNIT V RECENT ADVANCES 10 Super plastic forming – Electro forming – fine blanking – Hydro forming – Peen forming – Laser Forming – Micro forming - P/M forging – Isothermal forging – high speed hot forging – near net shape forming high velocity extrusion – CAD and CAM in forming TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Dieter G.E., “Mechanical Metallurgy”, McGraw Hill, Co., S.I. Edition, 2001 2. Nagpal G.R. “Metal forming processes”, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 2004 REFERENCES: 1. Serope Kalpakjian, Steven R Schmid, “Manufacturing Process for Engineering Materials” – Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2003. 2. Rao, P.N. “Manufacturing Technology”, TMH Ltd., 2003 3. Edward M.Mielink, “Metal working science Engineering, McGraw Hill, Inc, 2000. 4. Metal Hank book Vol.14, “Forming and Forging”, Metal Park, Ohio,USA, 1990 PTME 2304 ENGINEERING METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS L T P C (Common to Mechanical, Production and Automobile) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVE To understand the basic principles of measurements To learn the various linear and angular measuring equipments, their principle of

operation and applications To learn about various methods of measuring Mechanical parameters UNIT I CONCEPT OF MEASUREMENT 10 General concept – Generalised measurement system-Units and standards-measuring instruments: sensitivity, stability, range, accuracy and precision-static and dynamic response-repeatability-systematic and random errors-correction, calibration - Introduction to Dimensional and Geometric Toleranceing - interchangeability, UNIT II LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENT 12 Definition of metrology-Linear measuring instruments: Vernier, micrometer, Slip gauges and classification, - Tool Makers Microscope - interferometery, optical flats, - Comparators: limit gauges Mechanical, pneumatic and electrical comparators, applications. Angular measurements: -Sine bar, Sine center, bevel protractor and angle Decker.. UNIT III FORM MEASUREMENT 12 Measurement of screw threads: Thread gauges, floating carriage micrometer-measurement of gear tooth thickness: constant chord and base tangent method-Gleason gear testing machine – radius measurements-surface finish: equipment and parameters, straightness, flatness and roundness measurements.

26

UNIT IV LASER AND ADVANCES IN METROLOGY 12 Precision instruments based on laser-Principles- laser interferometer-application in measurements and machine tool metrology- Coordinate measuring machine (CMM): need, construction, types, applications.- computer aided inspection. UNIT V MEASUREMENT OF MECHANICAL PARAMETERS 14 Force, torque, power:-mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic and electrical type-Pressure measurement - Flow: Venturi, orifice, rotameter, pitot tube –Temperature: bimetallic strip, thermocouples, pyrometer, electrical resistance thermistor .

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Jain R.K., “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, 2005 2. Alan S. Morris, “The Essence of Measurement”, Prentice Hall of India, 1997

REFERENCES: 1. Gupta S.C, “Engineering Metrology”, Dhanpat rai Publications, 2005 2. Jayal A.K, “Instrumentation and Mechanical Measurements”, Galgotia Publications

2000 3. Beckwith, Marangoni, Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Pearson Education,

2006. 4. Donald Deckman, “Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern, 1985. PTPR2356 METROLOGY AND INSPECTION LAB L T P C 0 0 3 2

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 1. Measurements of angle using Sine bar / bevel protractor 2. Measurement of External and internal Taper angle 3. Measurement of Bore Diameter 4. Calibration of Dial gauge 5. Measurement of Roundness 6. Measurements of Screw Thread Parameters using three-wire method 7. Measurements of Surface Roughness 8. Measurements using toolmaker Microscope 9. Measurements using Profile Projector 10. Measurements using Vision Measuring System 11. Measurements using CMM

TOTAL : 45PERIODS

27

PTPR 2251 ADVANCED MACHINING PROCESS L T P C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES: To understand the theory of metal cutting To understand the concepts of gear manufacture To understand CNC machines constructional features, working and programming UNIT I MECHANICS OF METAL CUTTING 10 Cutting tool angles – tool signature – orthogonal & oblique cutting – cutting forces, Merchant circle diagram – force & velocity relation. UNIT II TOOL MATERIAL, TOOL WEAR AND TOOL LIFE 9 Requirement of tool materials – types of tool materials – Tool wear – Types, mechanism – Tool life - Machinability - types of chips – cutting fluids. UNIT III GEAR MANUFACTURE 8 Different methods of gear manufacture – Gear hobbling and gear shaping machines specifications – gear generation – different methods – gear finishing and shaving – grinding and lapping of hobs and shaping cutters – gear honing – gear broaching. UNIT IV CNC MACHINES 9 NC, CNC & DNC – types of CNC – constructional features – drives and control systems – feed back devices – Interchangeable tooling system – preset & qualified tools – ISO specification – Machining center – Turning center – CNC wire cut EDM. UNIT V CNC PROGRAMMING 9 Manual part programming – steps involved – sample program in lathe & milling. - Computer aided part programming – APT program - CAM package – canned cycles - Programming.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Hazlehurst M, “Manufacturing Technology”, - El.BS, 1978 2. Jonathan Lin.S.C., Computer Numerical Control from Programming to Networking,

Delmar Publishers, 1994 REFERENCES: 1. Groover.M.P., Automatic production systems and computer integrated

manufacturing, Prentice Hall , 1990. 2. GE Thyer, Computer Numerical Control of Machine Tools, BH.Newners, 1991 3. Hajra Choudhury C.J., “Elements of Workshop Technology”, Vol.I and Vol.II, Asia

Publishing House, 1992. 4. Nagpal G.R., Machine Tool Engineering, Khanna Publishers, 2002

28

PTMG2451 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND COST ANALYSIS L T P C (Common to Mechanical, Production, Automobile) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES: To learn about the basics of economics and cost analysis related to engineering so as to take economically sound decisions. UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 8 Introduction to Economics- Flow in an economy, Law of supply and demand, Concept of Engineering Economics – Engineering efficiency, Economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics- Element of costs, Marginal cost, Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Opportunity cost, Break-even analysis- V ratio, Elementary economic Analysis – Material selection for product Design selection for a product, Process planning. UNIT II VALUE ENGINEERING 10 Make or buy decision, Value engineering – Function, aims, Value engineering procedure. Interest formulae and their applications –Time value of money, Single payment compound amount factor, Single payment present worth factor, Equal payment series sinking fund factor, Equal payment series payment Present worth factor- equal payment series capital recovery factor-Uniform gradient series annual equivalent factor, Effective interest rate, Examples in all the methods. UNIT III CASH FLOW 9 Methods of comparison of alternatives – present worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram), Future worth method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), Annual equivalent method (Revenue dominated cash flow diagram, cost dominated cash flow diagram), rate of return method, Examples in all the methods. UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9 Replacement and Maintenance analysis – Types of maintenance, types of replacement problem, determination of economic life of an asset, Replacement of an asset with a new asset – capital recovery with return and concept of challenger and defender, Simple probabilistic model for items which fail completely. UNIT V DEPRECIATION 9 Depreciation- Introduction, Straight line method of depreciation, declining balance method of depreciation-Sum of the years digits method of depreciation, sinking fund method of depreciation/ Annuity method of depreciation, service output method of depreciation-Evaluation of public alternatives- introduction, Examples, Inflation adjusted decisions – procedure to adjust inflation, Examples on comparison of alternatives and determination of economic life of asset. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi, 2001. 2. Suma Damodaran, “ Managerial economics”, Oxford university press 2006.

REFERENCES: 1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of

29

India, 2002. 2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis” Engg. Press, Texas, 2002 3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan, New York, 1984 4. Grant.E.L., Ireson.W.G., and Leavenworth, R.S, “Principles of Engineering Economy”, Ronald Press, New York,1976. 5. Smith, G.W., “Engineering Economy”, Lowa State Press, Iowa, 1973. 6. Truett & Truett, “ Managerial economics- Analysis, problems & cases “ Wiley India

8th edition 2004. 7. Luke M Froeb / Brian T Mccann, “ Managerial Economics – A problem solving

approach” Thomson learning 2007. PTPR2354 DESIGN OF JIGS, FIXTURE AND PRESS L T P C TOOLS & DRAWING 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVE: To introduce the concepts of various types of jigs, fixtures and dies To design and draw jig / fixture/ die for a given component UNIT I LOCATION AND CLAMPING DEVICES IN JIGS AND FIXUTRES 9+3 Principles of Jigs and Fixture – Design concepts – Different types of locating devices – different types of clamps – Drill bushes – types – Elements of fixtures. UNIT II DESIGN OF ELEMENTS OF JIGS AND FIXTURE 9+3 Design concepts of Template Jig, Plate Jig, Sandwich Jig, Vice Jaw Jig, Latch Jig, Turnover jig, Box jig – Fixtures for Milling, Grinding, Turning, Welding, and Assembly – Modular fixtures.

UNIT III PRESS WORKING OPERATION AND FORMING DIES 9+3 Blanking, Piercing, lancing, notching, bending design features of dies for drawing, extrusion, wire drawing and forging. UNIT IV ELEMENTS OF DIE 9+3 Design concepts of the following elements of progressive, compound and

Combination dies – Die block – Die shoe – Bolster plate – punch – punch plate – punch holder – guide pins and guide bushes – strippers – knockouts – stops - pilots – selection of standard die sets – strip layout and development. UNIT V DESIGN AND DRAWING DIES, JIGS AND FIXTURES 9+3 Progressive die – compound die – Bending and drawing dies – Drill Jigs – Milling fixtures, turning fixtures. TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Donaldson, B.H. Lecain, Goold V.V., Tool Design, TMH Edition, 1978.

30

2. Kempster M.H.A., Introduction to Jigs and Fixtures, ELBS Edition, 1976 REFERENCES: 1. Handbook of metal forming, Kurt Lunge, McGraw Hill, Pub.Co. 1985. 2. Paquin, Die Design Fundamentals, Industrial Press Inc, New York, 1979 3. ASTME, Fundamentals of Tool design, Prentice Hall 1974 PTPR2303 ENGINEERING STATISTICS AND QUALITY CONTRO L T P C 3 1 0 4 OBJECTIVES: To provide an introduction to fundamental concepts of statistical Process control Enhance the student understanding of the complexities of Statistical Analysis and control chart interpretation To understand the concept of reliability and it’s improving techniques and design of experiments

UNIT I SAMPLING THEORY AND TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 11 Population, sample – influence of sample size – Estimation of population parameter from sample – mean and variance, difference of means, variances and ratios of variances – Tests of hypothesis – large and small samples – Chi-square distribution – F distribution.

UNIT II STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL 15

Variation in process – Factors – control charts – variables X R and ,X , - Attributes P, C and U-Chart Establishing and interpreting control charts process capability – Quality rating – Short run SPC. UNIT III ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING 15 Lot by lot sampling types – probability of acceptance in single, double, multiple sampling plans – OC curves – Producer’s risk and consumer’s risk. AQL, LTPD, AOQL, Concepts Design of single sampling plan – standard sampling plans for AQL end LTPD – use of standard sampling plans – Sequential sampling plan. UNIT IV RELIABILITY AND QUALITY 10 Life testing – failure characteristics – meantime to failure – maintainability and availability – reliability – system reliability – OC curves – reliability improvement techniques – Reliability testing techniques - Pareto analysis.

UNIT V EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN AND TAGUCHI METHOD 9 Fundamentals – factorial experiments – random design, Latin square design – Taguchi method – Loss function – experiments – S/N ratio and performance measure – Orthogonal array. TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Amcta Mitra “Fundamentals of Quality Control and improvement” Pearson Education, 2002.

31

REFERENCES: 1. Bester field D.H., “Quality Control” Prentice Hall, 7th edition 2003 2. Manohar Mahajan, “Statistical Quality Control”, Dhanpal Rai & Sons, 2001. 3. Sharma S.C., “Inspection Quality Control and Reliability”, Khanna Publications, 2004. PTPR 2306 CNC MACHINE LAB L T P C 0 0 3 2 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 1. Study of different control systems and NC codes. 2. Program for Turning, Facing operation. 3. Program for circular interpolation, Taper turning operation 4. Program for thread cutting operation 5. Program using Do-Loop and Sub-routine. 6. Program for profile milling operation, circular interpolation 7. Program for Circular, rectangular pocket milling 8. Program for drilling cycle 9. Program for tool compensation and Program offset 10. NC code generation using CAD software packages 11. Study of cam packages 12. Study of CNC Wire cut EDM

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

(Requirement for a batch of 30 Students)

S. No. Description of Equipment Quantity

required Quantity available

Deficiency %

. CNC Trainer Lathe 2 No.

. CNC Trainer milling machine 2 No.

.

Any standard CAM software (Examples : PRO-E, Master CAM, SMART CAM, etc.,)

10 users

. CNC wire cut EDM 1

.

Computers (Pentium 4, 128 RAM, 20 GB HDD, 17” Color Monitor)

5

32

PTPR 2353 AUTOMATED PRODUCTION & COMPUTER INTEGRATED L T P C MANUFACTURING 3 1 0 4 AIM To impart the knowledge of computer technology in all of the operational and information processing activities related to manufacturing. OBJECTIVES: To understand the various automated manufacturing activities To study the application of computer Technology in the Manufacturing activities To know the smooth transition from conventional manufacturing to automated production and computer integrated manufacturing PRE-REQUISITES: Students must have sound knowledge on various Manufacturing types, – system and operations UNIT I INTRODUCTION 12 Product design & CAD, CAM, CAD/CAM and CIM – CIM Hardware and software – three step process for implementation CIM – production concepts and mathematical models covering production rate, manufacturing lead time, capacity utilisation, availability & WIP – Automation – Reason for Automation and Automation strategies – The future automated factory. UNIT II AUTOMATED PRODUCTION SYSTEMS AND MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE SYSTEM 12 Basic elements of an automated system – Advanced automated functions – Levels of Automation - Fundamentals of Automated Production Lines – Work part Transfer Mechanisms – Storage Buffers – Control of the Production Line – Application to Machining System.

Factors influencing material handling system – 10 principles of Material handling – Material transport system – Industrial Trucks, Mono-rails and other rail-guided vehicles, conveyors, cranes & Hoists – Automated guided vehicle system – Types. Guidance technology, vehicle management, despatch rules and safety. Storage systems – Performance, storage location strategies, conventional methods – Automated Storage and Retrieval systems – carousel storage systems. UNIT III GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND CELLULAR MANUFACTURING 12 Part families – visual – parts classification and coding – case studies in coding – Production flow analysis – benefits of G.T. – Application of G.T.

Cellular Manufacturing – Composite part concept – Machine cell design – Key machine concept - quantitative analysis in cellular manufacturing – Rank order clustering technique – Arranging machines in G.T. Cell – Hollier method 1 and 2.

33

UNIT IV FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM 12 What is an FMS? – Types of FMS – FMS components – Workstations, Material Handling and storage system – FMS Layout type, computer control system, Human resource – Flow chart showing various operations in FMS – Dead lock in FMS – FMS application and benefits – FMS planning and implementation issues. Quantitative analysis of FMS – various bottle neck model – Sizing the FMS – Illustrative examples. UNIT V AUTOMATED ASSEMBLY, COMPUTER PROCESS CONTROL AND SHOP FLOOR CONTROL 12 Automated assembly – Fundamental – system configuration, part delivery at work station – Design for automated assembly

Computer process control – continuous, discrete process, control requirement, capabilities, Level of process control – Computer process control – Computer process interface, computer process monitoring, Direct Digital control, Supervisory control – Distributed control system and personal computer.

Short floor control – Three phases – Factory data collection – manual method – Automated and semiautomated data collection (ADC) – Bar code technologies and other ADC Technologies.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Mikell P.Groover, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer-integrated

Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 2003 2. Radhakrishnan.P, Subramanyan.S and Raju.V, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, New Age\

International Publishers, 2000

REFERENCES: 1. James A.Retrg and Henry W. Kraebher, “Computer Integrated Manufacturing”,

Pearson Education, Asia, 2001 2. Viswamathan.N and Narahari.Y, “Performance modelling of automated

manufacturing system”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, 1994. PTME2028 ROBOTICS L T P C (Common to Production and VII Semester Elective for Mechanica 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVES To introduce the basic concepts, parts of robots and types of robots To make the student familiar with the various drive systems for robot, sensors and

their applications in robots, programming of robots To discuss about the various applications of robots, justification, implementation and

safety of robot

34

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 7 Robot – Definition – Robot Anatomy – Co-ordinate Systems, Work Envelope, types and classification – Specifications – Pitch, Yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load – Robot Parts and Their Functions – Need for Robots – Different Applications UNIT II ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 10 Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives – Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives – D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of All these Drives End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Grippers, Magnetic Grippers, Vacuum Grippers; Two Fingered and Three Fingered Grippers; Internal Grippers and External Grippers; Selection and Design Considerations UNIT III SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 10 Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Applications of the following types of sensors – Position of sensors (Piezo Electric Sensor, LVDT, Resolvers, Optical Encoders, Pneumatic Position Sensors), Range Sensors (Triangulation Principle, Structured, Lighting Approach, Time of Flight Range Finders, Laser Range Meters), Proximity Sensors (Inductive, Hall Effect, Capacitive, Ultrasonic and Optical Proximity Sensors), Touch Sensors, (Binary Sensors, Analog Sensors), Wrist Sensors, Compliance Sensors, Slip Sensors Camera, Frame Grabber, Sensing and Digitizing Image Data – Signal Conversion, Image Storage, Lighting Techniques. Image Processing and Analysis – Data Reduction, Edge detection, Segmentation Feature Extraction, Object Recognition, Other Algorithms. Applications – Inspection, Identification, Visual Serving and Navigation. UNIT IV ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING 10 Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Differences; Forward Kinematics and Reverse Kinematics of Manipulators with Two, Three Degrees of Freedom (In 2 Dimensional), Four Degrees of Freedom (In 3 Dimensional) – Deviations and Problems Teach Pendant Programming, Lead through programming, Robot programming Languages – VAL Programming – Motion Commands, Sensor Commands, End effecter commands, and Simple programs. UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION AND ROBOT ECONOMICS 8 RGV, AGV; Implementation of Robots in Industries – Various Steps; Safety Considerations for Robot Operations; Economic Analysis of Robots – Pay back Method, EUAC Method, Rate of Return Method.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. M.P.Groover, “Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and Applications”,

McGraw-Hill, 2001 2. Yoram Koren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1992

35

REFERENCES: 1. Fu.K.S. Gonzalz.R.C., and Lee C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and

Intelligence”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1987 2. Janakiraman.P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1995 PTPR 2351 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS IN MANUFACTURING L T P C ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES: To introduce the concept of FEM and to apply in the field of Manufacturing Engineering UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 General field problems in engineering-Discrete and continuous models-Characteristics-the relevance and place of finite element method-variational calculus-Variational formulation of boundary value problems-The method of weighted residuals-Rayleigh-Ritz and Galerkin methods-Solution of large system of equations-Choleski Decomposition-Gaussian elimination procedures.

UNIT II GENERAL PROCEDURE OF FET 9 Discretization of Domain selection of interpolation polynomials-Convergence requirements-Formulation of element characteristics matrices and load vectors – Assembly of element characteristics matrices-Solution of finite element equations-Post processing of results. UNIT III FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF ONE DIMENSIONAL AND TWO DIMENSIONAL PROBLEMS 10 One dimensional finite element analysis-Linear bar element-Quadratic bar element-Beam element-Frame elements-One dimensional heat transfer-Two dimensional finite element analysis approximation of geometry and field variables-Three nodded triangular element-Four nodded rectangular element-Six nodded triangular element-Natural coordinates and coordinate transformation – Numerical integration-Incorporation of boundary conditions

UNIT IV ISO-PARAMETRIC ELEMENTS 9 Iso-parametric elements-Dynamic analysis-Equations of motion using Lagrange’s approach-Consistent and Lumped mass matrices-Formulation of FE equations for vibration problems-Solutionof Eigen value problems-Transient vibration analysis-Thermal transients.

UNIT V APPLICATION OF FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS 8 Finite element analysis of Machine elements - Axi-symmetric FEA of a pressure vessel-Application of FEM in various metal forming processes – Solid formulation and flow formulation – FEA simulation of Metal cutting, Solidification of castings and Weldments. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

36

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Chandraputla T.R., and Belegundu A.D., “Introduction of Finite Element in

Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India, 1997. 2. Reddy.J.N., “An Introduction to Finite Element Method” McGraw Hill, International

Student Edition, 1993.

REFERENCES: 1. Rao.S.S., “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, Pergamon Press, 1993. 2. Segarland. L.J., “Applied Finite Element Analysis”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 3. Seshu.P., “Text Book of Finite Element Analysis”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003 4. Rajasekaran.S., “Numerical Methods for Initial and Boundary Value Problems”,

Wheeler and Co., Pvt. Ltd., 1987 5. Lewis R.W., Morgan K., Thomas H.R. and Seetharamu K.N., The Finite Element

Method in Heat Transfer Analysis, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 1996. PTME2404 COMPUTER AIDED SIMULATION AND ANALYSIS L T P C LABORATORY 0 0 3 2 LIST OF EXPERIMENTS A. Simulation 8 Simulation of Air conditioning system with condenser temperature and evaporator temperatures as input to get COP using C /MAT Lab. Simulation of Hydraulic / Pneumatic cylinder using C / MAT Lab. Simulation of cam and follower mechanism using C / MAT Lab. B. Analysis (Simple Treatment only) 37 Stress analysis of a plate with a circular hole. Stress analysis of rectangular L bracket Stress analysis of an axi-symmetric component Stress analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, Fixed ends) Mode frequency analysis of a 2 D component Mode frequency analysis of beams (Cantilever, Simply supported, Fixed ends) Harmonic analysis of a 2D component Thermal stress analysis of a 2D component Conductive heat transfer analysis of a 2D component Convective heat transfer analysis of a 2D component

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

37

PTPR2352 COMPUTER AIDED PRODUCT DESIGN L T P C 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVE: To introduce the concepts and applications of CAD To introduce the various concepts and techniques used for Product design and to develop product design skills. UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN 12 Introduction to Engineering Design – Various phases of systematic design – sequential engineering and concurrent engineering – Computer hardware & Peripherals – software packages for design and drafting. UNIT II COMPUTER GRAPHICS FUNDAMENTALS 12 Computer graphics – applications – principals of interactive computer graphics – 2D 3D transformations – projections – curves – Bezier, B-Spline and NURBS – Concepts. UNIT III GEOMETRIC MODELING 12 Geometric Modeling – types – Wire frame surface and solid modeling – Boundary Representation, constructive solid geometry – Graphics standards – assembly modeling – use of software packages UNIT IV PRODUCT DESIGN CONCEPTS 12 Product modeling – types of product models; product development process tools – TRIZ – Altshuller’s inventive principles – Modeling of product metrics – Design for reliability – design for manufacturability – machining, casting, and metal forming – design for assembly and disassembly - Design for environment; Bench marking – FMEA – QFD – DOE – Taguchi method of DOE – Quality loss functions – Design for product life cycle. UNIT V PRODUCT DATA MANAGEMENT 12 Product Data Management – concepts – Collaborative product design and commerce – Information Acquisition – Sourcing factor – manufacturing planning factor – Customization factor – Product life cycle management. TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Kevin Otto, Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson Education, 2000 2. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD/CAM theory and Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1991. REFERENCES: 1. Biren Prasad, “Concurrent Engineering Fundamentals Vol.11”, Prentice Hall, 1997. 2. James G.Bralla, “Handbook of Product Design for Manufacturing”, McGraw Hill, 1994 3. David F.Rogers.J, Alan Adams, “Mathematical Elements for Computer Graphics”,

McGraw Hill, 1990

38

PTME2401 MECHATRONICS L T P C (Common to Mechanical and Production) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVE To understand the interdisciplinary applications of Electronics, Electrical, Mechanical and Computer Systems for the Control of Mechanical and Electronic Systems. UNIT I MECHATRONICS, SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 9 Introduction to Mechatronics Systems – Measurement Systems – Control Systems – Microprocessor based Controllers. Sensors and Transducers – Performance Terminology – Sensors for Displacement, Position and Proximity; Velocity, Motion, Force, Fluid Pressure, Liquid Flow, Liquid Level, Temperature,Light Sensors – Selection of Sensors UNIT II ACTUATION SYSTEMS 9 Pneumatic and Hydraulic Systems – Directional Control Valves – Rotary Actuators. Mechanical Actuation Systems – Cams – Gear Trains – Ratchet and pawl – Belt and Chain Drives – Bearings. Electrical Actuation Systems – Mechanical Switches – Solid State Switches – Solenoids – Construction and working principle of DC and AC Motors – speed control of AC and DC drives, Stepper Motors-switching circuitries for stepper motor – AC & DC Servo motors UNIT III SYSTEM MODELS AND CONTROLLERS 9 Building blocks of Mechanical, Electrical, Fluid and Thermal Systems, Rotational – Transnational Systems, Electromechanical Systems – Hydraulic – Mechanical Systems. Continuous and discrete process Controllers – Control Mode – Two – Step mode – Proportional Mode – Derivative Mode – Integral Mode – PID Controllers – Digital Controllers – Velocity Control – Adaptive Control – Digital Logic Control – Micro Processors Control. UNIT IV PROGRAMMING LOGIC CONTROLLERS 9 Programmable Logic Controllers – Basic Structure – Input / Output Processing – Programming – Mnemonics – Timers, Internal relays and counters – Shift Registers – Master and Jump Controls – Data Handling – Analogs Input / Output – Selection of a PLC.

UNIT V DESIGN OF MECHATRONICS SYSTEM 9 Stages in designing Mechatronics Systems – Traditional and Mechatronic Design - Possible Design Solutions. Case studies of Mechatronics systems- Pick and place Robot- Autonomous mobile robot-Wireless suriviellance balloon- Engine Management system- Automatic car park barrier.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Bolton,W, “Mechatronics” , Pearson education, second edition, fifth Indian Reprint, 2003 2. Smaili.A and Mrad.F , "Mechatronics integrated technologies for intelligent machines", Oxford university press, 2008

REFERENCES: 1. Rajput. R.K, A textbook of mechatronics, S. Chand & Co, 2007

39

2. Michael B. Histand and David G. Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics and Measurement Systems”, McGraw-Hill International Editions, 2000. 3. Bradley D. A., Dawson D., Buru N.C. and. Loader A.J, “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall, 1993. 4. Dan Necsulesu, “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education Asia, 2002 (Indian Reprint).

Lawrence J. Kamm, “Understanding Electro – Mechanical Engineering”, An Introduction to Mechatronics, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt., Ltd., 2000.

5. Nitaigour Premchand Mahadik, “Mechatronics”, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing Company Ltd, 2003 PTPR2452 PROJECT WORK L T P C 0 0 12 6

OBJECTIVE The objective of the project work is to enable the students in convenient groups of not more than 4 members on a project involving theoretical and experimental studies related to the branch of study. Every project work shall have a guide who is the member of the faculty of the institution. Six periods per week shall be allotted in the time table and this time shall be utilized by the students to receive the directions from the guide, on library reading, laboratory work, computer analysis or field work as assigned by the guide and also to present in periodical seminars on the progress made in the project. The aim of the project work is to deepen comprehension of principles by applying them to a new problem which may be the design and manufacture of a device, a research investigation, a computer or management project or a design problem. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the Department. Each student shall finally produce a comprehensive report covering background information, literature survey, problem statement, project work details and conclusion. This final report shall be typewritten form as specified in the guidelines. The continuous assessment shall be made as prescribed in the regulations (vide clause 10.3 of Regulations 2004 for B.E., B.Tech. programmes) PTME2026 UNCONVENTIONAL MACHINING PROCESSES L T P C (Common to Mechanical and Production) 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVE: To learn about various unconventional machining processes, the various process parameters and their influence on performance and their applications

40

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5 Unconventional machining Process – Need – classification – Brief overview . UNIT II MECHANICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10 Abrasive Jet Machining – Water Jet Machining – Abrasive Water Jet Machining -Ultrasonic Machining. (AJM, WJM, AWJM and USM). Working Principles – equipment used – Process parameters – MRR-Variation in techniques used – Applications. UNIT III ELECTRICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 8 Electric Discharge Machining (EDM)- working Principle-equipments-Process Parameters-Surface Finish and MRR- electrode / Tool – Power and control Circuits-Tool Wear – Dielectric – Flushing – Wire cut EDM – Applications. UNIT IV CHEMICAL AND ELECTRO-CHEMICAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 12 Chemical machining and Electro-Chemical machining (CHM and ECM)-Etchants-maskant-techniques of applying maskants-Process Parameters – Surface finish and MRR-Applications. Principles of ECM-equipments-Surface Roughness and MRR-Electrical circuit-Process Parameters-ECG and ECH - Applications. UNIT V THERMAL ENERGY BASED PROCESSES 10 Laser Beam machining and drilling (LBM), plasma Arc machining (PAM) and Electron Beam Machining (EBM). Principles – Equipment –Types - Beam control techniques – Applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Vijay.K. Jain “Advanced Machining Processes” Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2007 2. Pandey P.C. and Shan H.S. “Modern Machining Processes” Tata McGraw-Hill, New

Delhi (2007).

REFERENCES: 1. Benedict. G.F. “Nontraditional Manufacturing Processes” Marcel Dekker Inc., New

York (1987). 2. Mc Geough, “Advanced Methods of Machining” Chapman and Hall, London (1998). 3. Paul De Garmo, J.T.Black, and Ronald.A.Kohser, “Material and Processes in

Manufacturing” Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi ,8th Edition,2001. PTPR2021 PRECISION ENGINEERING L T P C 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVES : To impart knowledge in the increasing quality concepts of parts, accuracy requirement of machine tools and also to introduce latest topics in Manufacturing like micro machining and smart materials so as to equip them to join core electronic manufacturing industries.

41

UNIT I CONCEPTS OF ACCURACY AND MACHINE TOOLS 9 Part Accuracy – errors, accuracy of machine tools – spindle accuracy – displacement accuracy – errors due to numerical interpolation – definition of accuracy of N.C system – errors in the NC machines – feed stiffness – zero stability. UNIT II STIFFNESS, THERMAL EFFECTS AND FINISH MACHINING 12 Overall stiffness of Lathe – compliance of work piece – errors caused by cutting forces –deformation in turning – boring – milling – heat sources – thermal effects – Finish Turning, boring, grinding – Surface roughness. UNIT III DIMENSIONING 6 Definition of terms – Key dimension – Superfluous dimension – dimensional stepped shaft – assigning tolerances in the constituent dimensions – dimensional chains. UNIT IV MICRO-MACHINING MICRO FABRICATION 9 Micro Machining – Photo resist process – Lithography – LIGA Process – Optical, processing of materials – electron beam machining – beam machining – micro forming, diamond turning – micro positioning devices – etching – physical vapour deposition – Chemical vapour deposition UNIT V SMART STRUCTURES, MATERIALS AND MICRO ACTUATORS 9 Smart structures – Smart materials types and applications - smart sensors – micro valves – MEMS – Micro motors – Micro pumps – micro dynamometer – micro machines – micro optics – micro nozzles. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Murthy R.L. “Precision Engineering in Manufacturing”, New Age Internaional Pvt.

Limited. (19 2. Juliar W.Gardner. Vijay K. Varadan, ‘Micro sensors, MEMS and Smart Devices, John

wiley and sons, 2001. REFERENCES: 1. Stephen A.Campbell, “The Science and Engineering of Micro electronic Fabrication”,

Oxford University Press, 1996. 2. Raady Frank, “Understanding smart sensors”, Artech. House, Boston, 1996. 3. MEMS Hand Book, CRC Press, 2001 PTPR2024 SURFACE ENGINEERING L T P C 3 0 0 3

UNIT I METAL CLEANING AND PREVIEW ON SURFACE ENGINEERING 8 Need and relevance of surface engineering – pre-treatment of coating, General cleaning process for ferrous and non-ferrous metals and alloys – selection of cleaning process – alkaline cleaning – emulsion cleaning- ultrasonic cleaning – acid and pickling salt bath descaling – abrasive bath cleaning – polishing and short peening – classification of surface engineering processes.

42

UNIT II THERMAL SPRAYING PROCESSES AND ELECTRODEPOSITED COATINGS 10 Thermal spraying – flame, arc, plasma and HVOF processes – PLV process – design for thermally sprayed coatings – coating production – spray consumables principles of electroplating – Technology and control electroplating systems – properties and Faraday’s Law – factors affecting throwing power – Applications of electrodeposites – non-aqueous and electroless deposition. UNIT III HOT DIP COATING AND DIFFUSION COATINGS 10 Principles – surface preparation batch coating and continuous coating process – coating properties and applications, Principles of cementation – cladding – Diffusion coating of C.N. Al, Si, Cr and B – structure, properties and application of diffusion coatings – chemical vapour deposition – physical vapour deposition. UNIT IV NON-METALLIC COATING OXIDE AND COVENSION COATINGS 9 Plating coating – laequers – rubbers and elastomers – vitreous enamels – anodizing phosphating and chromating – application to aluminium, magnesium, tin, zinc, cadmium copper and silver – phosphating primers. UNIT V QUALITY ASSURANCE, TESTING AND SELECTION OF COATINGS 8 The quality plan – design – testing and inspection of thickness adhesion, corrosion, resistance and porosity measurement – selection of coatings – industrial applications of engineering coatings. Basic mechanisms of wear – abrasive, adhesive wear, contact fatigue – fretting corrosion – testing wear resistance practical diagnosis of wear.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. STAND GRAINGER engineering coatings – design and application jaico publishing

House, 1994 REFERENCES: 1. N.V.Parthasarathy, Electroplating Handbooks, Prentice Hall, 1992 2. Metals Hand Book vol.2 8th edition,American society of metals 1994 3. D.R. Gabe, Principles of Metal surface treatment and protection, Pergamon, 1990 4. Niku-Lavi, advances in surface treatments, Pergamon,1990

PTMG 2021 MARKETING MANAGEMENT L T P C 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVES:

To understand the various processes involved in Marketing and its Philosophy. To learn the Psychology of consumers. To formulate strategies for advertising, pricing and selling

43

UNIT I MARKETING PROCESS 9 Definition, Marketing process, dynamics, needs, wants and demands, marketing concepts, environment, mix, types. Philosophies, selling versus marketing, organizations, industrial versus consumer marketing, consumer goods, industrial goods, product hierarchy UNIT II BUYING BEHAVIOUR AND MARKET SEGMENTATION 9 Cultural, demographic factors, motives, types, buying decisions, segmentation factors - demographic -Psycho graphic and geographic segmentation, process, patterns.

UNIT III PRODUCT PRICING AND MARKETING RESEARCH 9 Objectives, pricing, decisions and pricing methods, pricing management. Introduction, uses, process of marketing research.

UNIT IV MARKETING PLANNING AND STRATEGY FORMULATION 9 Components of marketing plan-strategy formulations and the marketing process, implementations, portfolio analysis, BCG, GEC grids. UNIT V ADVERTISING, SALES PROMOTION AND DISTRIBUTION 9 Characteristics, impact, goals, types, and sales promotions- point of purchase- unique selling proposition. Characteristics, wholesaling, retailing, channel design, logistics, and modern trends in retailing. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Govindarajan. M, “Marketing management – concepts, cases, challenges and

trends”, Prentice hall of India, second edition 2007. 2. Philip Kolter,Koshy Jha “Marketing Management”, Pearson Education ,Indian

adapted edition.2007 REFERENCES: 1. Ramasamy and Nama kumari, “Marketing Environment: Planning, implementation

and control the Indian context”, 1990. 2. Czinkota&Kotabe, “Marketing management”, Thomson learning, Indian edition 2007 3. Adrain palmer, “ Introduction to marketing theory and practice”, Oxford university

press IE 2004. 4. Donald S. Tull and Hawkins, “Marketing Reasearch”, Prentice Hall of Inida-1997. 5. Philip Kotler and Gary Armstrong “Principles of Marketing” Prentice Hall of India,

2000. 6. Steven J.Skinner, “Marketing”, All India Publishers and Distributes Ltd. 1998. 7. Graeme Drummond and John Ensor, Introduction to marketing concepts, Elsevier,

Indian Reprint, 2007

44

PTME2021 QUALITY CONTROL AND RELIABILITY ENGINEERING L T P C (Common to Mechanical, Automobile and Production) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVE: To introduce the concept of SQC To understand process control and acceptance sampling procedure and their

application. To learn the concept of reliability.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR VARIABLES 10 Introduction, definition of quality, basic concept of quality, definition of SQC, benefits and limitation of SQC, Quality assurance,Quality control: Quality cost-Variation in process-causesof variation –Theory of control chart- uses of control chart – Control chart for variables – X chart, R chart and chart -process capability – process capability studies and simple problems.Six sigma concepts.

UNIT II PROCESS CONTROL FOR ATTRIBUTES 8 Control chart for attributes –control chart for non conformings– p chart and np chart – control chart for nonconformities– C and U charts, State of control and process out of control identification in charts, pattern study.

UNIT III ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING 9 Lot by lot sampling – types – probability of acceptance in single, double, multiple sampling techniques – O.C. curves – producer’s Risk and consumer’s Risk. AQL, LTPD, AOQL concepts-standard sampling plans for AQL and LTPD- uses of standard sampling plans.

UNIT IV LIFE TESTING - RELIABILITY 9 Life testing – Objective – failure data analysis, Mean failure rate, mean time to failure, mean time between failure, hazard rate – Weibull model, system reliability, series, parallel and mixed configuration – simple problems. Maintainability and availability – simple problems. Acceptance sampling based on reliability test – O.C Curves.

UNIT V QUALITY AND RELIABLITY 9 Reliability improvements – techniques- use of Pareto analysis – design for reliability – redundancy unit and standby redundancy – Optimization in reliability – Product design – Product analysis – Product development – Product life cycles. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Note: Use of approved statistical table permitted in the examination.

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Douglas.C.Montgomery, “ Introduction to Statistical quality control” John wiley 4th

edition2001. 2. L.S.Srinath, “Reliability Engineering”, Affiliated East west press, 1991.

REFERENCES: 1. John.S. Oakland. Statistical process control”, Elsevier, 5th edition, 2005

45

2. Connor, P.D.T.O., “ Practical Reliability Engineering”, John Wiley, 1993 3. Grant, Eugene .L “Statistical Quality Control”, McGraw-Hill, 1996 4. Monohar Mahajan, “Statistical Quality Control”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 2001. 5. R.C.Gupta, “Statistical Quality control”, Khanna Publishers, 1997. 6. Besterfield D.H., “Quality Control”, Prentice Hall, 1993. 7. Sharma S.C., “Inspection Quality Control and Reliability”, Khanna Publishers, 1998. 8. Danny Samson, “Manufacturing & Operations Strategy”, Prentice Hall, 1991

PTPR2022 FUZZY LOGIC AND ANN L T P C 3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FUZZY LOGIC PRINCIPLES 9 Basic concepts of fuzzy set theory – operations of fuzzy sets – properties of fuzzy sets – Crisp relations – Fuzzy relational equations – operations on fuzzy relations – fuzzy systems – propositional logic – Inference – Predicate Logic – Inference in predicate logic – fuzzy logic principles – fuzzy quantifiers – fuzzy inference – fuzzy rule based systems – fuzzification and defuzzification – types. UNIT II ADVANCED FUZZY LOGIC APPLICATIONS 9 Fuzzy logic controllers – principles – review of control systems theory – various industrial applications of FLC adaptive fuzzy systems – fuzzy decision making – Multiobjective decision making – fuzzy classification – means clustering – fuzzy pattern recognition – image processing applications – systactic recognition – fuzzy optimization – various

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9 Fundamentals of neural networks – model of an artificial neuron – neural network architectures – Learning methods – Taxonomy of Neural network architectures – Standard back propagation algorithms – selection of various parameters – variations

Applications of back propagation algorithms. UNIT IV OTHER ANN ARCHITECTURES 9 Associative memory – exponential BAM – Associative memory for real coded pattern pairs – Applications adaptive reasonance theory – introduction – ART 1 – ART2 – Applications – neural networks based on competition – kohenen self organizing maps – learning vector quantization – counter propagation networks – industrial applications. UNIT V RECENT ADVANCES 9 Fundamentals of genetic algorithms – genetic modeling – hybrid systems – integration of fuzzy logic, neural networks and genetic algorithms – non traditional optimization techniques like ant colony optimization – Particle swarm optimization and artificial immune systems – applications in design and manufacturing.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. S.Rajasekaran.G.A.Vijayalakshmi Pai “Neural Networks, fuzzy logic and genetic

algorithms”, prentice hall of India private limited, 2003 2. Timothy J.Ross, “Fuzzy logic with engineering applications”, McGraw Hill, 1995

46

3. Zurada J.M. “Introduction to artificial neural systems”, Jaico publishing house, 1994 REFERENCES: 1. Klir.G, Yuan B.B. “Fuzzy sets and fuzzy logic prentice Hall of India private limited,

1997. 2. Laurance Fausett, “Fundamentals of neural networks”, Prentice hall, 1992 3. Gen, M. and R. Cheng “Genetic algorithm and engineering design”, john wiley 1997

PTPR2023 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL L T P C 3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 Static and dynamic characteristics of measurement systems, standards and calibration, error and uncertainty analysis, statistical analysis of data, and curve fitting.

UNIT II MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS AND INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION 10 Measurement of displacement, velocity (linear and rotational), acceleration, shock, vibration, force torque power, strain, stress, pressure temperature. UNIT III DATA DISPLAY AND RECORDING DEVICES 8 Data display-CRO,LED, LCD, magnetic tape recorders, x-y recorders, UV recorders, Oscilloscope recorders, digital printers and data loggers. UNIT IV CONTROL 9 Introduction to control systems, mathematical model of physical systems in transfer function and state space forms, response of dynamic systems, concept of pole and zero of a system, realization of transfer functions. UNIT V STABILITY ANALYSIS 9 Stability criteria bode plots, routh and Nyquist criteria. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. B.C.Nakra, K.K.choudry, “Instrumentation, Measurement and analysis”, Tata

McGraw Hill 2002 2. J.J.Nagrath and Gopal, “control system engineering”, New age international (p) ltd.,

2000 REFERENCES: 1. C.S.Rangan, G.R.Sarma, VSV Mani, Instrumentation devices and systems”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2000 2. A.K. Sowhney, “electricaland electronic measurement and instrumentation, “Dhanpat

rai & Cu, 2003. 3. Benjamin C.Kuo, “Automatic control system”, prentice hall of India pvt ltd.,2002

47

4. Ernest O.Doeblin, “measurement systems applications and design”, McGraw Hill International editions, 1990

5. S.Renganathan, “transducer engineering”, Allied publishers, 1990. PTPR2025 DESIGN OF MACHINE TOOL STRUCTURE L T P C 3 0 0 3

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10 Classification of machining processes, machine tools – machine tool construction – factors – performance criteria – trends in modern machine tool – kinematic arrangement of different types of machine tools – work holding and tool holding devices – calculation of cutting forces and power requirements for turning, milling, boring and grinding – force distribution on different parts of drilling, milling and grinding machine tools. UNIT II STRENGTH AND RIGIDITY OF MACHINE TOOL STRUCTURES 10 Basic principles of design – comparison of materials used in machine tool construction – dependence of process capability on rigidity – static compliance – design of lathe beds – materials – typical construction – torsional modulus of regangular and box sections – methods of increasing rigidities. UNIT III SLIDEWAYS 9 Slide ways – types – materials – constructions – clearance adjustments – Hydrostatically lubricated slide ways – slide way design – pressure distribution – antifriction ways – design – construction. UNIT IV SPINDLES AND SPINDLE SUPPORTS 8 Spindle units – materials – spindle design – spindle bearings – types of materials – constructions. UNIT V MACHINE TOOL DYNAMICS 9 Dynamic system – elastic system – working processes – vibration in machine tools – self excited vibration and dynamic stability – basic principles of chatter – effects of vibration – vibration elimination – damping – isolation of vibration – dynamic absorber with damping.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. G.C. Sen and A.Battacharya, “Principles of machine tools”, New central book

agency, 1999 2. N.K.Metha, “Machine Tool Design and Numerical control”, Tata McGraw Hill

publishing company, 1996

48

REFERENCES: 1. Manfred week, “Hand Book of machine tools – vol1, vol 2, vol.3 John Wiley & Sons,

1984. 2. Acherkan.N, “Machine Tool Design”, vol 3, MIR publishers, 1978 PTME2030 COMPOSITE MATERIALS L T P C 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVES: To understand the fundamentals of composite material strength and its mechanical

behavior Understanding the analysis of fiber reinforced Laminate design for different combinations of plies with different orientations of the fiber. Thermo-mechanical behavior and study of residual stresses in Laminates during

processing. Implementation of Classical Laminate Theory (CLT) to study and analysis for residual stresses in an isotropic layered structure such as electronic chips.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION, LAMINA CONSTITUTIVE EQUATIONS & MANUFACTURING 12 Definition –Need – General Characteristics, Applications. Fibers – Glass, Carbon, Ceramic and Aramid fibers. Matrices – Polymer, Graphite, Ceramic and Metal Matrices – Characteristics of fibers and matrices. Lamina Constitutive Equations: Lamina Assumptions – Macroscopic Viewpoint. Generalized Hooke’s Law. Reduction to Homogeneous Orthotropic Lamina – Isotropic limit case, Orthotropic Stiffness matrix (Qij), Typical Commercial material properties, Rule of Mixtures. Generally Orthotropic Lamina –Transformation Matrix, Transformed Stiffness. Manufacturing: Bag Moulding – Compression Moulding – Pultrusion – Filament Winding – Other Manufacturing Processes

UNIT II FLAT PLATE LAMINATE CONSTITUTE EQUATIONS 10 Definition of stress and Moment Resultants. Strain Displacement relations. Basic Assumptions of Laminated anisotropic plates. Laminate Constitutive Equations – Coupling Interactions, Balanced Laminates, Symmetric Laminates, Angle Ply Laminates, Cross Ply Laminates. Laminate Structural Moduli. Evaluation of Lamina Properties from Laminate Tests. Quasi-Isotropic Laminates. Determination of Lamina stresses within Laminates. UNIT III LAMINA STRENGTH ANALYSIS 5 Introduction - Maximum Stress and Strain Criteria. Von-Misses Yield criterion for Isotropic Materials. Generalized Hill’s Criterion for Anisotropic materials. Tsai-Hill’s Failure Criterion for Composites. Tensor Polynomial (Tsai-Wu) Failure criterion. Prediction of laminate Failure UNIT IV THERMAL ANALYSIS 8 Assumption of Constant C.T.E’s. Modification of Hooke’s Law. Modification of Laminate Constitutive Equations. Orthotropic Lamina C.T.E’s. C.T.E’s for special Laminate

49

Configurations – Unidirectional, Off-axis, Symmetric Balanced Laminates, Zero C.T.E laminates, Thermally Quasi-Isotropic Laminates UNIT V ANALYSIS OF LAMINATED FLAT PLATES 10 Equilibrium Equations of Motion. Energy Formulations. Static Bending Analysis. Buckling Analysis. Free Vibrations – Natural Frequencies TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Gibson, R.F., Principles of Composite Material Mechanics, McGraw-Hill, 1994,

Second Edition - CRC press in progress. 2. Hyer, M.W., “Stress Analysis of Fiber – Reinforced Composite Materials”, McGraw-

Hill, 1998 REFERENCES: 1. Issac M. Daniel and Ori Ishai, “Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials”,

Oxford University Press-2006, First Indian Edition - 2007 2. Mallick, P.K., Fiber –”Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and

Design”, Maneel Dekker Inc, 1993. 3. Halpin, J.C., “Primer on Composite Materials, Analysis”, Techomic Publishing Co.,

1984. 4. Agarwal, B.D., and Broutman L.J., “Analysis and Performance of Fiber

Composites”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1990. 5. Mallick, P.K. and Newman, S., (edition), “Composite Materials Technology:

Processes and Properties”, Hansen Publisher, Munish, 1990. PTPR2028 PROCESSING OF POLYMER AND COMPOSITES L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8 Classification of polymers – properties and applications of selective engineering polymers – fundamentals of composites – need for composites – enhancement of properties – classification of composites – matrix polymer matrix composites (PMC), metal matrix composites (MMC), Ceramic matrix composites (CMC) reinforcement – particle reinforced composites, fibre reinforced composites, applications of various types of composites.

UNIT II POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES 12 Polymer matrix resins – thermosetting resins, thermoplastic resins – reinforcement fibres – rovings – woven fabrics – non woven random mats – various types of fibres, PMC processes – hand lay up processes – spray lay up processes – compression moulding – reinforced reaction injection moulding – resin transfer moulding – poltrusion – filament winding – injection moulding fibre reinforced plastics (FRP) (Glass fibre reinforced plastics (GRP).

50

UNIT III METAL MATRIX COMPOSITES 9 Characteristics of MMC, various types of metal matrix composites alloy vs. MMC, advantages of MMC limitations of MMC – Metal matrix – reinforcements – particles – fibres. Effect of reinforcement – volume fraction – Rule of mixtures, processing of MMC – Powder metallurgy process diffusion bonding – stir casting squeeze casting. UNIT IV CERAMICS MATRIX COMPOSITES 9 Engineering ceramic materials – properties – advantages – limitations – Monolithic ceramics – Need for CMC – Ceramic matrix – various types of ceramic matrix composites – oxide ceramics – non oxide ceramics – aluminium oxide – silicon nitride – reinforcements – particles – fibres – whiskers. Sintering- Hot pressing – Cold isostatic pressing (CIPing) – Hot isostatic pressing (HIPing). UNIT V ADVANCES IN POLYMERS & COMPOSITES 7 Carbon/carbon composites – advantages of carbon matrix – limitations of carbon matrix carbon fibre – chemical vapour deposition of carbon on carbon fibre perform. Solgel technique. Composites for aerospace industrial applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Mathews F.L. and Rawings R.D., “Composite materials, Engineering and Science”,

Chapman. 2. Chawla K.K. “Composite Materails”, Springer Verlag, 1987 3. Kenneth G.Budinski & Michael K. Budinski, “Engineering Materials”, Prentice Hall of

India pvt ltd., 4th Indian reprint, 2002 REFERENCES: 1. T.W.Clync and P.J. Withers, “Introduction to Metal Matrix Composites”. Cambridge

University Press, 1993. 2. B.Strong, “Fundamentals of composite manufacturing, SME, 1989 3. S.C.Sharma, “Composite materials”, Narosa publications, 2000 4. “Short term course on advances in composite materials”, “composite technology

centre, department of metallurgy, iit – madras, December 2001. 5. Brydson, Hand book of plastic processing 6. Weatherhead R.G. “FRP technology” (Fibre Reinforced Resin System), Applied

Science Publishers Limited, London, 1990.

PTPR2031 NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING METHODS L T P C 3 0 0 3

AIM: To impart knowledge on Non Destructive Testing procedures. OBJECTIVES : To understand principle behind various NDT techniques. To study about NDT equipments and accessories.

51

To learn working procedures of various NDT techniques. PRE-REQUISITES: Basic knowledge on various process defects UNIT I NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING: AN INTRODUCTION 6 Introduction to various non-destructive methods- Comparison of Destructive and Non destructive Tests, Visual Inspection, Optical aids used for visual inspection, Applications. UNIT II LIQUID PENETRANT TESTING AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE TESTING 10 Physical principles, procedure for penetrant testing, Penetrant testing materials, Penetrant testing methods – Applications Principle of MPT, Magnetising technical and procedure used for testing a component , Equipment used for MPT , Applications

UNIT III EDDY CURRENT TESTING AND ACOUSTIC EMISSION TESTING 10 Principles, Instrumentation for ECT, Various Techniques – High sensitivity Techniques, Single, Multi and high frequency ECT, Applications Principle of AET,AE signal parameters, Applications. UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING 10 Principle, Ultrasonic transducers, Inspection Methods – Normal Incident Pulse-echo Inspection, Through - transmission Testing, angle Beam Pulse-echo testing, Techniques for Normal Beam Inspection, Ultrasonic Flaw detection Equipment, Modes of display – A- scan, B-Scan & C- Scan- Applications

UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY, COMPARISON AND SELECTION OF NDT METHODS 9 Basic principle, Effect of radiation on Film, Radiographic imaging – Inspection Techniques – Single wall single image, Double wall Penetration & Multiwall Penetration technique – Comparison and selection of various NDT techniques

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Baldev raj, T Jeyakumar, M. Thavasimuthu “Practical Non Destructive Testing”

Narosa publishing house, New Delhi, 2002 REFERENCES: 1. Krautkramer. J., “Ultra Sonic Testing of Materials”, 1st Edition, Springer – Verlag

Publication, New York, 1996. 2. Peter J. Shull “Non Destructive Evaluation: Theory, Techniques and Application”

Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 2002 3. www.ndt.net 4. Baldev Raj and B.Venkataraman, “Practical Radiology”, Narosa Publishing House,

2004 5. Birchan.B, “Non-Destructive Testing”, Oxford, London, 1975

52

PTPR2032 SIMULATION OF MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS L T P C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVE: To introduce the concepts of simulation and to apply them for manufacturing system UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8 Basic concept of system – elements of manufacturing system - concept of simulation – simulation as a decision making tool – types of simulation – system modeling – types of modeling. UNIT II RANDOM NUMBERS 10 Probability and statistical concepts of simulation – Pseudo random numbers – methods of generating random numbers – discrete and continuous distribution – testing of random numbers – sampling - simple, random and simulated.

UNIT III DESIGN OF SIMULATION EXPERIMENTS 10 Problem formulation – data collection and reduction – time flow mechanical – key variables - logic flow chart starting condition – run size – experimental design consideration – output analysis, interpretation and validation – application of simulation in engineering industry. UNIT IV SIMULATION LANGUAGE 9 Study of GPSS (Basic blocks only) Generate, Queue, Depart, Size, Release, Advance, Terminate, Transfer, Enter and Leave. UNIT V CASE STUDIES 10 Development of simulation models using GPSS for queuing, production, inventory, maintenance and replacement systems, (Students may be asked to prepare and present the case studies)

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK: 1. Jerry Banks and John S.Carson, “Discrete event system simulation”, Prentice Hall

1991

REFERENCES: 1. John H.Mize and J.Grady Cox, “Essential of simulation” – Prentice hall 1989. 2. Geoffrey Gordon “System simulation” – Prentice Hall of India, 1992 3. Jeffrey L.Written, Lonnie D, Bentley and V.M. Barice, “System analysis and Design

Methods”, Galgotia publication, 1995 4. Averill M.Law and W.David Kelton, “Simulation Modelling and analysis”, McGraw Hill

International Editions, 1991 5. Shannon R.E., “System simulation”, Prentice Hall 1993.

53

PTPR2026 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT AND PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 7 General principles of management – management functions – organization – types – comparison – functions of personnel management – recruitment training leadership/motivation – communication – Conflict industrial relations – trade union. UNIT II INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 11 Purpose of Inventory – Cost related to inventors – Basic EOQ model – variations in EOQ model – Finite Production quality discounts – ABC Analysis – MRP Analysis. UNIT III OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 10 Plant Location – Layout – Materials Handling – Method Study – Time Study – Ergonomics – Aggregate Planning – Value Analysis

UNIT IV FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 10 Capital – Types – sources – break even analysis – financial statements – income statement – balance – balance sheet – capital budgeting – working capital management – inventory pricing. UNIT V MARKETING MANAGEMENT 7 Functions of marketing – Sales promotion methods – advertising – product packaging – marketing variables – distribution channels – organization – market research market research techniques.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. R. Kesavan, C.Elanchezhian and T.Sundar Selwyn – Engineering management –

Eswar Press, 2005 2. K. Panneerselvam – Production and Operations Management – Prentice Hall of

India, 2003 REFERENCES: 1. Koont and G’donnel-Essentials of Management, McGraw Hill 1992. 2. Philips Kotler – Principles of marketing, Prentice Hall of India, 1995 3. I.M. Pandey – Financial Management, Vikas Publishing house, 1995 4. K.K.Ahuja – Personal Management, Kalyane Publication 1992 5. Martand T. Telesand – Industrial and Business management – S.Chand & Co., 2001

54

PTPR2027 ERGONOMICS L T P C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES: To introduce the concepts of man machine systems and techniques of providing human comfort in man-making work systems. UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 Inter disciplinary nature of ergonomics modern ergonomics human performance – information processing – factors affecting human performance – physical workload and energy expenditure. UNIT II WORK SPACE DESIGN 9 Anthropometry – workspace design for standing and seatedworkers – Arrangements of components within a physical space – Interpersonal aspect of workplace design. UNIT III DESIGN OF EQUIPMENT 9 Programme factors to be considered, design of displays and controls – design for maintainability – heat stresses – manual lifting. UNIT IV DESIGN FOR ENVIRONMENT 9 Illumination – Climate – Noise – Vibration – Heat, cold – Lighting design considerations – Effect of noise on task performance. UNIT V RECENT ADVANCES AND TRENDS 9 Legislative trends – Trends in work system design – occupational diseases – Application of Ergonomcis in automobiles.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK: 1. Martin Helander, A guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing, TMH, 1996. REFERENCES: 1. Bridger, R.S. Introduction to Ergonomics, McGraw Hill, 1995. 2. Micormic, J. Human factors in Engineering and Design, McGraw Hill, 1992. 3. Wilson,J.R.Corlect EN, Evaluation of Human work, A. practical Ergonomcis 4. methodology, Taylor and Frances, 1990. 5. Shackel, B.Richardson S, Human Factors for Inforamtion usability, Cambridge University, Cambridge University Press, 1991. PTPR2029 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND FINANCIAL L T P C MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3 UNIT I FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 13 Accounting principles – basic records depreciation – depreciation methods – preparation and interpretation of profit and loss statement – balance sheet – fixed assets – current assets.

55

UNIT II PROFIT VALUE ANALYSIS 10 Cost valume profit relationship – relevant costs in decision making profit management analysis – break even analysis – margin of safety Angle of incident & multi product break even analysis – Effect of changes in volume selling price fixed cost and variable cost on profit.

UNIT III WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT 8 Current assets and liability decisions – estimation of working capital requirements – Management of accounts receivable – Inventory – cash – inventory valuation methods.

UNIT IV CAPITAL BUDGETING 7 Significance of capital budgeting – payback period – present value method – Accounting rate of return method.

UNIT V ENGINEERING ECONOMICS 7 Economics – Engineering economics – Demand analysis Laws of demand – Production and cost – Pricing methods TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. R. Kesavan, C.Elanchezhian and T.Sundar Selwyn – Engineering Economics and

Financial Accounting, Laxmi Publications 2005 2. S.N.Maheswaran, Management Accounting and Financial Control, Sultan Chand,

1992. REFERENCES: 1. C.James, Vanhorn, Fundamentals of Financial management PHI 1996 2. Charles T.Homgren, Cost Accounting, PHI 1985 PTPR2030 PURCHASING AND MATERIALS MANAGEMENT L T P C 3 0 0 3

UNIT I FUNCTIONS OF MATERIALS MANAGEMENT 6 Introduction to materials management – objectives – Organization – Functions – Operating Cycle – Value analysis – Make or buy decisions.

UNIT II PURCHASING MANAGEMENT 8 Purchasing policies and procedures – Selection of sources of supply – Vendor development – Vendor evaluation and rating – Methods of purchasing – Imports – Buyer – Seller relationship – Negotiations - Insurance and claims managements

UNIT III STORES MANAGEMENT 8 Store function – Location – Layout – Stock taking – Materials handling – codification – Inventory pricing – MIS for stores management

56

UNIT IV MATERIALS PLANNING 12 Forecasting - ABC analysis – Materials requirements planning - Inventory systems – Quantity – periodic – Deterministic models – Aggregate planning – JIT.

UNIT V INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 11 Basic EOQ Model – Discount Model - Finite Production – Lot size under constraints – Application of O.R. Techniques in Materials Management. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK: 1. Lamer Lee and Donald W.Dobler, Purchasing and Material Management, Text and

Cases, Tata McGraw Hill, 1996. REFERENCES: 1. Gopalakrishnan P.Handbook of Materials Management, Prentice Hall of India, 1996. 2. Guptha P.K. and Manmohan, Problems in Operations Research, Sultan Chand &

Sons, 1994 3. R. Kesavan, C.Elanchezhian and T.Sundar Selwyn, Engineering Management,

Eswar Press 2005 PTME2038 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C (Common to Mechanical, Automobile ) 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVES:

To create awareness about optimization in utilization of resources. To understand and apply operations research techniques to industrial operations.

UNIT I LINEAR MODEL 10 The phases of OR study – formation of an L.P model- graphical solution – simplex algorithm – artificial variables technique– Big M method, two phase method, Duality in LPP. Transportation problems- VAM – MODI technique, Assignment problems. UNIT II NETWORK MODELS 8 Shortest route – minimal spanning tree - maximum flow models – project network- CPM and PERT network-critical path scheduling. UNIT II INVENTORY MODEL 9 Types of Inventory- EOQ –ERL- Deterministic inventory problems – Price breaks - Stochastic inventory problems- selective inventory control techniques. UNIT II REPLACEMENT MODELS 9 Replacement of items that deteriorate with time – value of money changing with time –not charging with time – optimum replacement policy – individual and group

57

replacement. Sequencing problem: models with n jobs with 2 machines – problem with n jobs with m machines. UNIT III QUEUING THEORY 9 Queuing models – queuing systems and structures – notation –parameter – single server and multiserver models – Poisson input – exponential service – constant rate service – infinite population.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK: 1. Wayne.L.Winston, Operations research applications and algorithms, Thomson

learning,4th edition 2007. 2. Taha H.A, “Operation Research”, Pearson Education sixth edition, 2003 REFERENCES: 1. Frederick.S.Hiller and Gerald.J.Lieberman, “Operations research concepts and

cases”, TMH (SIE) 8th edition. 2. J.K.Sharma, “Operations research theory and applications”, Macmillan India .3rd

edition 2007, 3. Hira and Gupta “ Problems in Operations Research”, S.Chand and Co,2002. 4. Panneerselvam, “Operations Research” Prentice Hall of India, 2003. 5. G Srinivasan, “Operations research principles and applications”, PHI (EEE) 2007. 6. Wagner, “Operations Research”, Prentice Hall of India, 2000. PTPR2033 RELIABILITY ENGINEERING L T P C 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVES: To stress the importance of reliability in Engineering and products also the concept of maintability, failure modes and testing methods. UNIT I CONCEPTS OF RELIABILITY, SYSTEM AND MODELS 12 Definition of reliability – reliability Vs quality-reliability function-MTTF – hazard rate function- bathtub curve – derivation of the reliability function-constant failure rate model – time dependent failure models. Weibull distribution – normal distribution – the lognormal distribution. Serial configuration – parallel configuration – combined series parallel systems – system structure function, minimal cuts and minimal paths – Markov analysis – load sharing systems, standby system, degraded systems, three state devices – covariate models, static models, dynamic models, physics of failure models

UNIT II DESIGN FOR RELIABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY 12 Reliability design process – system effectiveness – economic analysis and life cycle cost – reliability allocation – optimal, Arinc, Agree, - Design methods – parts and material selection, derating, stress-strength analysis – failure analysis – identification of failure mode – determination of causes – assessment of effects – classification of seventy – computation of critically index – corrective action – system safety and FTA. Analysis of downtime – the repair time distribution – stochastic point processes – system repair time

58

– reliability under preventive maintenance – state dependent systems with repair – MTTR-mean system downtime – MTR – MH/OH – cost model – fault isolation and self diagnostics – repair Vs replacement – replacement model – proactive, preventive, predictive maintenance – maintenance and spares provisioning – maintainability prediction and demonstration – concepts and definition of availability.

UNIT III OPTIMIZATION OF SYSTEM RELIABILITY 7 Optimization techniques for system reliability with redundancy – heuristic methods applied to optimal system reliability- redundancy allocation by dynamic programming –reliability optimization by non linear programming.

UNIT IV THE ANALYSIS OF FAILURE DATA AND RELIABILITY TESTING 7 Data collection – empirical methods – ungrouped and grouped complete, censored data – static life estimation – test time calculation – burn in testing, acceptance, sequential, binomial testing – accelerated life testing – ther acceleration models – experimental design – reliability growth process – idealized growth curve – various growth models – identifying failure and repair distributions. UNIT V PACKAGING AND TRANSPORTATION FOR RELIABILITY 7 Objectives – preservation-packaging – transportation and subsequent storage – reliability and the customer - Purchase of equipment – installation – commissioning a new system – reliability prediction and control – reliability management – the people concerned with reliability, coordination, training TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Charles E. Ebling, “An introduction to Reliability and Maintainability Engg”, Tata

McGraw-Hill, 2000. REFERENCES: 1. Patrick D T o’connor, “Practical Reliability Engineringt”, John-Wiley and Sons inc,

2002. 2. David J Smith, “Reliability, Maintainability and Risk: Practical Methods for

Engineers”, Butterworth, 2002 3. Way kuo, Rajendra Prasad V, Frank A and Tillman, ching- lai Hwang “Optimal

Reliability Design and Applciations”, Cambridge University Press P ltd., 2001. 4. Srinath I.S, Engineering Design and Reliability, ISTE, 1999. 5. Oleg Vinogradov, “Introduction to Mechanical Reliability: A Designers Approach,

Hemisphere Publications, 1991.

59

PTPR2034 MACHINE TOOL CONTROL & CONDITION MONITORING L T P C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES: To understand the control system of machine tools and its applications To understand the objectives, aims and methodology of machine tool condition

onitoring and diagnostics. UNIT I OVERVIEW OF AUTOMATIC CONTROLS IN MACHINE TOOLS 6 Open loop – closed loop system – block diagram representation of machine tool control systems. UNIT II COMPUTER CONTROL SYSTEM 15 Process computer-peripherals – Data logger-Direct digital control-Supervisory computer control-Adaptive control-types-adaptive control for turning, milling, grinding and EDM-Programmable logic controller-Functions-applications in machine tools. UNIT III DRIVE SYSTEMS IN MACHINE TOOLS 8 Electrical, hydraulic and pneumatic types – servo motor-stepper motor-ball screw mechanism. Feed back devices-Syncro, resolver, diffraction gratings, potentiometer, and inductosyn-encoders-application in machine tools. UNIT IV CONDITION MONITORING 8 Condition monitoring techniques – Visual, temperature, vibration, lubricant, thickness, noise and sound. Condition monitoring of machine tools. UNIT V MACHINE TOOL DIAGNOSTICS 8 Objectives-aims-examples of monitoring and diagnosis-control structures for machine diagnosis-utilization of diagnostic results. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCES:

1. Manfred weck, “Hand book of machine tools – Vol.3, John Wiley & Sons, 1984. 2. Sushil Kumar Srivstava “ industrial maintenance management” S.Chand & company

ltd., New Delhi, 1998. 3. Mikell P.Groover, “Automation Production system and Computer Integrated

Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt.Ltd., 1995. PTPR 2035 MINI PROJECT L T P C 0 0 6 3 OBJECTIVES: 1. The students in batches (not exceeding three in a batch) have to take up a project in

the area of manufacturing engineering. 2. Each batch is guided by a faculty member. The students have to select a suitable

problems, design, prepare the drawings, produce the components, assemble and commission the project.

60

3. The students have to prepare and present a detailed project report at the end of the VIII semester.

4. The evaluation will ne made for the continuous internal assessment for the Project by a committee nominated by the Head of the Department.

PTGE2025 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I ENGINEERING ETHICS 9 Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Professions and Professionalism – Professional Ideals and Virtues – Uses of Ethical Theories UNIT II ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9 Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Research Ethics - Codes of Ethics – Industrial Standards - A Balanced Outlook on Law – The Challenger Case Study UNIT III ENGINEER’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY 9 Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis – Reducing Risk – The Government Regulator’s Approach to Risk - Chernobyl Case Studies and Bhopal UNIT IV RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9 Collegiality and Loyalty – Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) - Discrimination UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 9 Multinational Corporations – Business Ethics - Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics - Role in Technological Development – Weapons Development – Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors – Honesty – Moral Leadership – Sample Code of Conduct

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New York (2005). 2. Charles E Harris, Michael S Pritchard and Michael J Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts and Cases”, Thompson Learning, (2000). REFERENCES: 1. Charles D Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall, New Mexico, (1999). 2. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, (2003) 3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and

Engineers”, Oxford University Press, (2001)

61

4. Prof. (Col) P S Bajaj and Dr. Raj Agrawal, “Business Ethics – An Indian Perspective”, Biztantra, New Delhi, (2004)

5. David Ermann and Michele S Shauf, “Computers, Ethics and Society”, Oxford University Press, (2003)

PTME2035 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C

(Common to Mechanical, Production & Automobile) 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVE: Study of this subject provides an understanding of the scope of an entrepreneur, key

areas of development, financial assistance by the institutions, methods of taxation and tax benefits, etc.

UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9 Entrepreneur – Types of Entrepreneurs – Difference between Entrepreneur and Intrapreneur – Entrepreneurship in Economic Growth, Factors Affecting Entrepreneurical Growth. UNIT II MOTIVATION 9 Major Motives Influencing an Entrepreneur – Achievement Motivation Training, self Rating, Business Game, Thematic Apperception Test – Stress management, Entrepreneurship Development Programs – Need, Objectives. UNIT III BUSINESS 9 Small Enterprises – Definition, Classification – Characteristics, Ownership Structures – Project Formulation – Steps involved in setting up a Business – identifying, selecting a Good Business opportunity, Market Survey and Research, Techno Economic Feasibility Assessment – Preparation of Preliminary Project Reports – Project Appraisal – Sources of Information – Classification of Needs and Agencies. UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9 Need – Sources of Finance, Term Loans, Capital Structure, Financial Institution, management of working Capital, Costing, Break Even Analysis, Network Analysis Techniques of PERT/CPM – Taxation – Income Tax, Excise Duty – Sales Tax.

UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9 Sickness in small Business – Concept, Magnitude, causes and consequences, Corrective Measures – Government Policy for Small Scale Enterprises – Growth Strategies in small industry – Expansion, Diversification, Joint Venture, Merger and Sub Contracting.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. S.S.Khanka “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd. Ram Nagar New

Delhi, 1999.

62

2. Kuratko & Hodgetts, “Enterprenuership – Theory, process and practices”, Thomson learning 6th edition.

REFERENCES: 1. Hisrich R D and Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 5th Edition Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002. 2. Mathew J Manimala,” Enterprenuership theory at cross roads: paradigms and praxis”

Dream tech 2nd edition 2006. 3. Rabindra N. Kanungo “Entrepreneurship and innovation”, Sage Publications, New

Delhi, 1998. 4. EDII “ Faulty and External Experts – A Hand Book for New Entrepreneurs

Publishers: Entrepreneurship Development” Institute of India, Ahmadabad, 1986. PTPR2036 MACHINE VISION L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVE: To understand the principle, importance and application of machine vision system in Manufacturing and measurement UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE VISION 6 Machine Vision use of machine vision – tasks for a vision system – relation to other fields – place of vision in CIM. UNIT II IMAGE ACQUISITION AND CONVERSION 6 Colour systems – light sources – lighting techniques – image formation by lensing – image scanning – television cameras – sensors, charge coupled devices – camera and system interface – frame buffers and frame grabbers – digital and smart camers. UNIT III IMAGE PROCESSING DECISION MAKING 12 Processing of binary images – thresholding, geometrical properties, topological properties – processing of gray scale images statistical operations, spatial operations, segmentation edge detection, morphological operations – image analysis – factors extraction – decision making. UNIT IV PATTERN RECOGNITION 9 Fundamentals – parametric classifiers – nonparametric, classifiers nearest neighbor CART, neural networks, generic classifiers. UNIT V MACHINE VISION APPLICATIONS 12 Applications in user industries automotive, semiconductor, electronic manufacturing, printing industries etc. – generic applications founding manufacturing metrology, inspection assembly verification – application analysis and implementation. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS REFERENCES: 1. Milan sonka, Vaclav hlavac, roger boyie, image processing, analysis and machine

vision publisher, 1995

63

2. Richard O.Duda, Peter E. Hurt, Pattern Classification and Scene Analysis Publisher, 1973

3. Rafael C. Gonzaies, Richard E. Woods, Digital Image processing publisher, 1992 4. Nella zuech, ‘Understanding & applying machine vision Marceldekker Inc. 2000.

PTPR 2037 ADVANCES IN OPERATION RESEARCH L T P C 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVE : To introduce the advanced OR models and to apply them for Engineering problems UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5 Optimization – Historical Development – Engineering applications of optimization – Statement of an Optimization problem – classification of optimization problems.

UNIT II CLASSIC OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 10 Linear programming - Graphical method – simplex method – dual simplex method – revised simplex method – duality in LP – Parametric Linear programming. UNIT III NON-LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9 Introduction – Lagrangeon Method – Kuhn-Tucker conditions – Quadratic programming – Separable programming – Stochastic programming UNIT IV INTEGER PROGRAMMING 11 Cutting plane algorithm – Branch and bound technique - Zero-one implicit enumeration; Goal programming – geometric programming; Network Techniques – Shortest Path Model – Minimum Spanning Tree Problem – Maximal flow problem. UNIT V DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING 10 Formulation – Application to capital budgeting, reliability improvement, shortest path, solution of LP using DP. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. R. Panneerselvam, “Operations Research”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited,

New Delhi 1 – 2005 REFERENCES: 1. P.K. Guptha and Man-Mohan, Problems in Operations Research – Sultan chand &

Sons, 1994 2. Ravindran, Philips and Solberg, Operations Research Principles and Practice, John

Wiley & Sons, Singapore, 1992 3. J.K.Sharma, Operations Research – Theory and Applications – Macmillan India Ltd.,

1997 4. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research – An Introduction, Prentice Hall of India, 1997

64

PTGE2023 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10 Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-ultra-thinfilms-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties and motivation for study (qualitative only). UNIT II PREPARATION METHODS 10 Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Precipitation, Mechanical Milling, Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE. UNIT III PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY FOR NANOSCALE DEVICES 5 Introduction to optical/UV electron beam and X-ray Lithography systems and processes, Wet etching, dry (Plasma /reactive ion) etching, Etch resists-dip pen lithography UNIT IV PREPARATION ENVIRONMENTS 10 Clean rooms: specifications and design, air and water purity, requirements for particular processes, Vibration free environments: Services and facilities required. Working practices, sample cleaning, Chemical purification, chemical and biological contamination, Safety issues, flammable and toxic hazards, biohazards. UNIT V CHARECTERISATION TECHNIQUES 10 X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques, Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques- AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties

and Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996. 2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd Edition,

Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000 REFERENCES: 1. G Timp (Editor), “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999 2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia (Editor), “The Hand Book of Nano Technology, ”Nanometer

Structure”, Theory, Modeling and Simulations. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.

65

PTME2036 PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL L T P C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES: To understand the various components and functions of production planning and

control such as work study, product planning, process planning, production scheduling, Inventory Control.

To know the recent trends like manufacturing requirement Planning (MRP II) and Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 Objectives and benefits of planning and control-Functions of production control-Types of production-job- batch and continuous-Product development and design-Marketing aspect - Functional aspects-Operational aspect-Durability and dependability aspect-aesthetic aspect. Profit consideration-Standardization, Simplification & specialization-Break even analysis-Economics of a new design. UNIT II WORK STUDY 9 Method study, basic procedure-Selection-Recording of process - Critical analysis, Development - Implementation - Micro motion and memo motion study - work measurement - Techniques of work measurement - Time study - Production study - Work sampling - Synthesis from standard data - Predetermined motion time standards.

UNIT III PRODUCT PLANNING AND PROCESS PLANNING 9 Product planning-Extending the original product information-Value analysis-Problems in lack of product planning-Process planning and routing-Pre requisite information needed for process planning-Steps in process planning-Quantity determination in batch production-Machine capacity, balancing-Analysis of process capabilities in a multi product system.

UNIT IV PRODUCTION SCHEDULING 9 Production Control Systems-Loading and scheduling-Master Scheduling-Scheduling rules-Gantt charts-Perpetual loading-Basic scheduling problems - Line of balance - Flow production scheduling-Batch production scheduling-Product sequencing - Production Control systems-Periodic batch control-Material requirement planning kanban –Dispatching-Progress reporting and expediting-Manufacturing lead time-Techniques for aligning completion times and due dates.

UNIT V INVENTORY CONTROL AND RECENT TRENDS IN PPC 9 Inventory control-Purpose of holding stock-Effect of demand on inventories-Ordering procedures. Two bin system -Ordering cycle system-Determination of Economic order quantity and economic lot size-ABC analysis-Recorder procedure-Introduction to computer integrated production planning systems-elements of JUST IN TIME SYSTEMS-Fundamentals of MRP II and ERP.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK: 1. Martand Telsang, “Industrial Engineering and Production Management”, S. Chand and Company, First edition, 2000.

66

2. James.B.Dilworth,”Operations management – Design, Planning and Control for manufacturing and services” Mcgraw Hill International edition1992. REFERENCES: 1. Samson Eilon, “Elements of production planning and control”, Universal Book

Corpn.1984 2. Elwood S.Buffa, and Rakesh K.Sarin, “Modern Production / Operations

Management”, 8th Ed. John Wiley and Sons, 2000. 3. Kanishka Bedi, “ Production and Operations management”, Oxford university press,

2nd Edition 2007. 4. Melynk, Denzler, “ Operations management – A value driven approach” Irwin

Mcgrawhill. 5. Norman Gaither, G. Frazier, “ operations management” Thomson learning 9th edition

IE, 2007 6. K.C.Jain & L.N. Aggarwal, “Production Planning Control and Industrial Management”,

Khanna Publishers, 1990. 7. S.N.Chary, “Theory and Problems in Production & Operations Management”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 1995. 8. Upendra Kachru, “ Production and operations management – Text and cases” Excel

books 1st edition 2007. PTME 2037 MAINTENANCE ENGINEERING L T P C (Common to Mechanical and Production) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES: To enable the student to understand the principles, functions and practices

adapted in industry for the successful management of maintenance activities. To explain the different maintenance categories like Preventive maintenance,

condition monitoring and repair of machine elements. To illustrate some of the simple instruments used for condition monitoring in

industry. UNIT I PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE PLANNING 10 Basic Principles of maintenance planning – Objectives and principles of planned maintenance activity – Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliability and machine availability – MTBF, MTTR and MWT – Factors of availability – Maintenance organization – Maintenance economics. UNIT II MAINTENANCE POLICIES – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 9 Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance, maintenance schedules, repair cycle - Principles and methods of lubrication – TPM.

67

UNIT III CONDITION MONITORING 9 Condition Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without CM – On-load testing and off-load testing – Methods and instruments for CM – Temperature sensitive tapes – Pistol thermometers – wear-debris analysis UNIT IV REPAIR METHODS FOR BASIC MACHINE ELEMENTS 10 Repair methods for beds, slideways, spindles, gears, lead screws and bearings – Failure analysis – Failures and their development – Logical fault location methods – Sequential fault location. UNIT V REPAIR METHODS FOR MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT 7 Repair methods for Material handling equipment - Equipment records –Job order systems -Use of computers in maintenance.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. Srivastava S.K., “Industrial Maintenance Management”, - S. Chand and Co., 1981 2. Bhattacharya S.N., “Installation, Servicing and Maintenance”, S. Chand and Co.,

1995

REFERENCES: 1. White E.N., “Maintenance Planning”, I Documentation, Gower Press, 1979. 2. Garg M.R., “Industrial Maintenance”, S. Chand & Co., 1986. 3. Higgins L.R., “Maintenance Engineering Hand book”, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 1988. 4. Armstrong, “Condition Monitoring”, BSIRSA, 1988. 5. Davies, “Handbook of Condition Monitoring”, Chapman &Hall, 1996. 6. “Advances in Plant Engineering and Management”, Seminar Proceedings - IIPE,

1996.

1

ANNA UNIVERSITY, CHENNAI AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS

R - 2009 B.E. (PART TIME) ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

I - VII SEMESTERS CURRICULA AND SYLLABI

SEMESTER I

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY 1. PTMA2112 Applied Mathematics 3 1 0 4 2. PTPH2111 Applied Physics 3 0 0 3 3. PTCY2112 Applied Chemistry 3 1 0 4 4. PTEE2151 Electric Circuit Analysis 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL 5. PTGE2114 Computer Practice 0 0 3 2

TOTAL 16 2 0 18

SEMESTER II

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY

1. PTMA2211 Transforms and Partial Differential Equations 3 1 0 4

2. PTEI2203 Electronic Devices and Circuits 3 0 0 3 3. PTEI2253 Digital logic Circuits 3 1 0 4 4. PTEI2201 Electrical Machines 3 1 0 4 5. PTGE2021 Environmental Science and Engineering 3 0 0 3

TOTAL 15 3 0 18

SEMESTER III

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY 1. PTEI 2252 Transducer Engineering 3 0 0 3 2. PTEE 2254 Linear Integrated Circuits and

Applications 3 0 0 3

3. PTEC2315 Communication Engineering 3 0 0 3 4. PTCS2311 Object Oriented Programming 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL 1. PTEI 2257 Transducers and Measurements

Laboratory 0 0 3 2

TOTAL 12 0 3 14

1

ANNA UNIVERSITY,CHENNAI AFFILIATED INSTITUTIONS

R - 2009 B.E. MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING

PART TIME I TO VII SEMESTERS CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI

SEMESTER I

COURSE

CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

PTMA2111 Applied Mathematics 3 1 0 4 PTPH2111 Applied Physics 3 0 0 3 PTCY2111 Applied Chemistry 3 0 0 3 PTGE2112 Fundamentals of Computing and Programming 3 0 0 3 PTGE2151 Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering 4 0 0 4

TOTAL 16 1 0 17

SEMESTER –II CODE NO COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY PTMA3211 Probability and Statistics 3 1 0 4 PTCE3204 Strength of Materials 3 0 0 3 PTEE3203 Electrical Drives and Control 3 0 0 3 PTMF3206 Manufacturing Processes – I 3 0 0 3 TOTAL 12 1 0 13

SEMESTER – III CODE NO COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY PTME3205 Mechanics of Machines 3 1 0 4 PTME3215 Thermodynamics 4 0 0 4 PTME3202 Engineering Materials and Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 PTMF3212 Manufacturing Processes – II 3 0 0 3

TOTAL 13 1 0 14

SEMESTER IV CODE NO COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY PTMF3301 Casting and Welding Technology 3 0 0 3 PTMF3304 Computer Aided Design 3 0 0 3 PTME3214 Machine Design 3 1 0 4 PTME3305 Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL PTMF3309 CAD Laboratory 0 0 2 1

TOTAL 12 1 2 14

2

SEMESTER V CODE NO COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY PTMF3216 Engineering Metrology 3 0 0 3 PTMF3306 CNC Machining Technology 3 0 0 3 PTMF3303 Precision Engineering 3 0 0 3 PTMG3311 Industrial Management 3 0 0 3 PRACTICAL PTMF3307 CAM Laboratory 0 0 4 2 TOTAL 12 0 4 14

SEMESTER VI

CODE NO COURSE TITLE L T P C THEORY PTMF3302 Metal Forming Technology 3 0 0 3 PTMF3401 Operations Research 3 0 0 3 PTGE3403 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3 PTMF3404 Flexible Manufacturing systems 3 0 0 3

Elective – I 3 0 0 3 TOTAL 15 0 0 15

SEMESTER VII

CODE NO COURSE TITLE L T P C THEORY PTME3402 Mechatronics 3 0 0 3 PTMF3313 Computer Integrated Production Management

System 3 0 0 3

Elective – II 3 0 0 3 Elective – III 3 0 0 3 PRACTICAL PTMF3409 Project work 0 0 12 6 TOTAL 12 0 12 18

3

LIST OF ELECTIVES FOR B.E.MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING

CODE NO COURSE TITLE L T P C PTMF3001 Product Design and Development 3 0 0 3 PTMF3002 Non Destructive Testing 3 0 0 3 PTMF3003 Rapid Prototyping 3 0 0 3 PTMF3004 Computer Simulation 3 0 0 3 PTMF3005 Quality Control and Reliability Engineering 3 0 0 3 PTMF3006 Processes Planning and Cost Estimation 3 0 0 3 PTMF3007 Processing of Plastics and Composite Materials 3 0 0 3 PTMF3008 Nuclear Engineering 3 0 0 3 PTMF3009 Total Productive Maintenance 3 0 0 3 PTMF3010 Micromachining Processes 3 0 0 3 PTMF3011 Robotics 3 0 0 3 PTMF3012 Artificial Intelligence 3 0 0 3 PTMF3013 Mechanical Vibration and noise 3 0 0 3 PTMF3014 Value Engineering and Reengineering 3 0 0 3 PTMF3015 Electronics Manufacturing Technology 3 0 0 3 PTML3016 Powder Metallurgy 3 0 0 3 PTIE3017 Supply Chain Management 3 0 0 3

PTME3018 New and Renewable Sources of Energy 3 0 0 3 PTME3019 Design for Manufacturing 3 0 0 3 PTME3020 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 0 0 3 PTMA3021 Numerical Methods 3 1 0 4 PTGE3022 Professional Ethics in Engineering 3 0 0 3 PTGE3023 Fundamentals of Nanoscience 3 0 0 3 PTPT3024 Packaging Materials and Technology 3 0 0 3

4

PTMA2111 APPLIED MATHEMATICS L T P C 3 1 0 4 UNIT I MATRICES 12 Characteristic equation – Eigen values and eigen vectors of a real matrix – Properties – Cayley-Hamilton theorem (excluding proof) – Orthogonal transformation of a symmetric matrix to diagonal form – Quadratic form – Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation. UNIT II THREE DIMENSIONAL ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY 12 Equation of a sphere – Plane section of a sphere – Tangent Plane – Equation of a cone – Right circular cone – Equation of a cylinder – Right circular cylinder. UNIT III DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12 Curvature in Cartesian co-ordinates – Centre and radius of curvature – Circle of curvature – Evolutes – Envelopes – Evolute as envelope of normals. UNIT IV FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12 Partial derivatives – Euler’s theorem for homogenous functions – Total derivatives – Differentiation of implicit functions – Jacobians – Taylor’s expansion – Maxima and Minima – Method of Lagrangian multipliers. UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12 Double integration – Cartesian and polar coordinates – Change of order of integration – Change of variables between Cartesian and polar coordinates – Triple integration in Cartesian co-ordinates – Area as double integral – Volume as triple integral

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK: 1. Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “Text book of Engineering Mathematics”, Third edition,

Laxmi Publications(p) Ltd.,(2008). 2. Grewal. B.S, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, 40

th Edition, Khanna Publications,

Delhi, (2007).

REFERENCES: 1. Ramana B.V, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company, New Delhi, (2007). 2. Glyn James, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 7

th Edition, Pearson Education,

(2007). 3. Jain R.K and Iyengar S.R.K,” Advanced Engineering Mathematics”,

3rd

Edition, Narosa Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., (2007).

5

PTPH2111 APPLIED PHYSICS L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I ULTRASONICS 9 Introduction – Production – magnetostriction effect - magnetostriction generator- piezoelectric effect - piezoelectric generator- Detection of ultrasonic waves properties – Cavitations - Velocity measurement – acoustic grating - Industrial applications – drilling, welding, soldering and cleaning – SONAR - Non Destructive Testing – pulse echo system through transmission and reflection modes - A,B and C –scan displays, Medical applications - Sonograms UNIT II LASERS 9 Introduction – Principle of Spontaneous emission and stimulated emission. Population inversion, pumping. Einsteins A and B coeffcients - derivation. Types of lasers – He-Ne, CO

2 , Nd-YAG, Semiconductor lasers (homojunction & heterojunction) Qualitative

Industrial Applications - Lasers in welding, heat treatment, cutting – Medical applications - Holography (construction & reconstruction). UNIT III FIBER OPTICS & APPLICATIONS 9 Principle and propagation of light in optical fibres – Numerical aperture and Acceptance angle - Types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – Double crucible technique of fibre drawing - Splicing, Loss in optical fibre – attenuation, dispersion, bending - Fibre optical communication system (Block diagram) - Light sources - Detectors - Fibre optic sensors – temperature & displacement - Endoscope. UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9 Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien’s displacement law and Rayleigh – Jeans’ Law from Planck’s theory – Compton effect. Theory and experimental verification – Matter waves – Schrödinger’s wave equation – Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical significance of wave function – Particle in a one dimensional box - Electron microscope - Scanning electron microscope - Transmission electron microscope. UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9 Lattice – Unit cell – Bravais lattice – Lattice planes – Miller indices – d spacing in cubic lattice – Calculation of number of atoms per unit cell – Atomic radius – Coordination number – Packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures – NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite structures – Polymorphism and allotropy - Crystal defects – point, line and surface defects- Burger vector.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. R. K. Gaur and S.C. Gupta, ‘Engineering Physics’ Dhanpat Rai Publications, New

Delhi(2003) 2. M.N. Avadhanulu and PG Kshirsagar, ‘A Text book of Engineering Physics’,

S.Chand and company, Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.

REFERENCES: 1. Serway and Jewett, ‘Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics’, 6

th

Edition, Thomson Brooks/Cole, Indian reprint (2007) 2. Rajendran, V and Marikani A, ‘Engineering Physics’ Tata McGraw Hill Publications

Ltd, III Edition, New Delhi, (2004).

6

3. Palanisamy, P.K., ‘Engineering Physics’ Scitech publications, Chennai, (2007). 4. Jayakumar. S, ‘Engineering Physics’, R.K. Publishers, Coimbatore, (2003). 5. Chitra Shadrach and Sivakumar Vadivelu, ‘Engineering Physics’, Pearson Education,

New Delhi, (2007). PTCY2111 APPLIED CHEMISTRY L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To impart a sound knowledge on the principles of chemistry involving the different application oriented topics required for all engineering branches. OBJECTIVES • The student should be conversant with the principles water characterization and treatment of potable and industrial purposes. • Principles of polymer chemistry and engineering applications of polymers • Industrial applications of surface chemistry • Conventional and non-conventional energy sources and energy storage devices and

Chemistry of engineering materials UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9 Characteristics – alkalinity – types of alkalinity and determination – hardness – types and estimation by EDTA method (problems); Domestic water treatment – disinfection methods (Chlorination, ozonation. UV treatment) – Boiler feed water – requirements – disadvantages of using hard water in boilers – internal conditioning (phosphate, calgon and carbonate conditioning methods) – external conditioning – demineralization process – desalination and reverse osmosis. UNIT II POLYMERS AND COMPOSITES 9 Polymers-definition – polymerization – types – addition and condensation polymerization – free radical polymerization mechanism – Plastics, classification – preparation, properties and uses of PVC, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyurethane, nylon-6,6, PET- Rubber -vulcanization of rubber, synthetic rubbers – buty1 rubber, SBR, Composites – definition, types polymer matrix composites – FRP only. UNIT III SURFACE CHEMISTRY 9 Adsorption – types – adsorption of gases on solids – adsorption isotherms – Frendlich and Langmuir isotherms – adsorption of solutes from solution – role of adsorbents in catalysis, ion-exchange adsorption and pollution abatement. UNIT IV NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9 Nuclear energy – fission and fusion reactions and light water nuclear reactor for power generation (block diagram only) – breeder reactor – solar energy conversion – solar cells – wind energy – fuel cells – hydrogen – oxygen fuel cell – batteries – alkaline batteries – lead–acid, nickel–cadmium and lithium batteries. UNIT V ENGINEERING MATERIALS 9 Refractories – classification – acidic, basic and neutral refractories – properties (refractoriness, refractoriness under load, dimensional stability, porosity, thermal spalling) – manufacture of alumina, magnesite and zirconia bricks, Abrasives – natural and synthetic abrasives – quartz, corundum, emery, garnet, diamond, silicon carbide and boron carbide. Lubricants – mechanism of lubrication, liquid lubricants, - properties

7

– viscosity index, flash and fire points, cloud and pour points, oilyness) – solid lubricants – graphite and molybdenum sulphide. Nanomaterials – introduction to nanochemistry – carbon nanotubes and their applications

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS: 1. P.C.Jain and Monica Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” Dhanpat Rai Pub, Co., New

Delhi (2002). 2. S.S. Dara “A text book of engineering chemistry” S.Chand & Co.Ltd., New Delhi

(2006).

REFERENCES: 1. B.K.Sharma “Engineering chemistry” Krishna Prakasan Media (P) Ltd., Meerut

(2001). 2. B. Sivasankar “Engineering Chemistry” Tata McGraw-Hill Pub.Co.Ltd, New Delhi

(2008). PTGE2112 FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTING AND PROGRAMMING L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM : To provide an awareness to Computing and Programming OBJECTIVES : • To enable the student to learn the major components of a computer system

• To know the correct and efficient ways of solving problems • To learn to use office automation tools • To learn to program in C

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS 9 Introduction – Characteristics of Computers – Evolution of Computers - Computer Generations – Classification of Computers – Basic Computer organization – Number Systems UNIT II COMPUTER SOFTWARE 9 Computer Software –Types of Software – Software Development Steps – Internet Evolution - Basic Internet Terminology – Getting connected to Internet Applications. UNIT III PROBLEM SOLVING AND OFFICE APPLICATION SOFTWARE 9 Planning the Computer Program – Purpose – Algorithm – Flow Charts – Pseudocode -Application Software Packages- Introduction to Office Packages (not detailed commands for examination). UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO C 9 Overview of C – Constants, Variables and Data Types – Operators and Expressions – Managing Input and Output operators – Decision Making - Branching and Looping. UNIT V FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 9 Handling of Character Strings – User-defined Functions – Definitions – Declarations - Call by reference – Call by value – Structures and Unions – Pointers – Arrays – The Preprocessor – Developing a C Program : Some Guidelines

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

8

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Ashok.N.Kamthane,“ Computer Programming”, Pearson Education (India) (2008). 2. Behrouz A.Forouzan and Richard.F.Gilberg, “A Structured Programming Approach

Using C”, II Edition, Brooks-Cole Thomson Learning Publications, (2007). REFERENCES: 1. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghoush, “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press. (2007). 2. Byron Gottfried, “Programming with C”, 2

nd Edition, (Indian Adapted Edition), TMH

publications, (2006). 3. Stephen G.Kochan, “Programming in C”, Third Edition, Pearson Education India,

(2005). 4. Brian W.Kernighan and Dennis M.Ritchie, “The C Programming Language”, Pearson

Education Inc., (2005). 5. E.Balagurusamy, “Computing fundamentals and C Programming”, Tata McGraw-Hill

Publishing Company Limited, (2008). 6. S.Thamarai Selvi and R.Murugan, “C for All”, Anuradha Publishers, (2008). PTGE2151 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C

(Common to branches under Civil, Mechanical and Technology faculty) 4 0 0 4

UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASURMENTS 12 Ohm’s Law – Kirchoff’s Laws – Steady State Solution of DC Circuits – Introduction to AC Circuits – Waveforms and RMS Value – Power and Power factor – Single Phase and Three Phase Balanced Circuits.

Operating Principles of Moving Coil and Moving Iron Instruments (Ammeters and Voltmeters), Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy meters. UNIT II ELECTRICAL MECHANICS 12 Construction, Principle of Operation, Basic Equations and Applications of DC Generators, DC Motors, Single Phase Transformer, single phase induction Motor. UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 12 Characteristics of PN Junction Diode – Zener Effect – Zener Diode and its Characteristics – Half wave and Full wave Rectifiers – Voltage Regulation. Bipolar Junction Transistor – CB, CE, CC Configurations and Characteristics – Elementary Treatment of Small Signal Amplifier. UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 12 Binary Number System – Logic Gates – Boolean Algebra – Half and Full Adders – Flip-Flops – Registers and Counters – A/D and D/A Conversion (single concepts) UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 12 Types of Signals: Analog and Digital Signals – Modulation and Demodulation: Principles of Amplitude and Frequency Modulations. Communication Systems: Radio, TV, Fax, Microwave, Satellite and Optical Fibre (Block Diagram Approach only).

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS: 1. V.N. Mittle “Basic Electrical Engineering”,Tata McGraw Hill Edition, New Delhi, 1990. 2. R.S. Sedha, “Applied Electronics” S. Chand & Co., 2006.

9

REFERENCES: 1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraleedharan K A, “Basic Electrical,

Electronics and Computer Engineering”,Tata McGraw Hill, Second Edition, (2006). 2. Nagsarkar T K and Sukhija M S, “Basics of Electrical Engineering”, Oxford press

(2005). 3. Mehta V K, “Principles of Electronics”, S.Chand & Company Ltd, (1994). 4. Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum’ Outline

Series, McGraw Hill, (2002). 5. Premkumar N, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Anuradha Publishers, (2003). PTMA 3211 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS LT P C

3 1 0 4 AIM: This course aims at providing the required skill to apply the statistical tools in engineering problems. OBJECTIVES: The students will have a fundamental knowledge of the concepts of probability. Have knowledge of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomenon. Have the notion of sampling distributions and statistical techniques used in

management problems. UNIT I RANDOM VARIABLES 9 + 3 Discrete and Continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions – Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma, Weibull and Normal distributions - Functions of a random variable. UNIT II TWO-DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 9 + 3 Joint distributions – Marginal and Conditional distributions – Covariance – Correlation and Linear regression – Transformation of random variables – Central limit theorem (for independent and identically distributed random variables). UNIT III TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 9 + 3 Sampling distributions - Tests for single mean, proportion, Difference of means (large and small samples) – Tests for single variance and equality of variances – χ2-test for goodness of fit – Independence of attributes – Non-parametric tests: Test for Randomness and Rank-sum test (Wilcoxon test). UNIT IV DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 9 + 3 Completely randomized design – Randomized block design – Latin square design - 22 - factorial design. UNIT V STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 9 + 3 Control charts for measurements (X and R charts) – Control charts for attributes (p, c and np charts) – Tolerance limits - Acceptance sampling.

T : 45 + 15 ,TOTAL : 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Milton, J. S. and Arnold, J.C., “Introduction to Probability and Statistics”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 4th edition, (2007).

10

2. Johnson, R.A. and Gupta, C.B., “Miller and Freund’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers”, Pearson Education, Asia, 7th edition, (2007).

REFERENCES 1. Devore, J.L., “Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences”, Thomson

Brooks/Cole, International Student Edition, 7th edition, (2008). 2. Walpole, R.E., Myers, R.H., Myers, S.L. and Ye, K., “Probability and Statistics for

Engineers and Scientists”, Pearson Education, Asia , 8th edition, (2007). 3. Ross, S.M., “Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists,

3rd edition, Elsevier, (2004). 4. Spiegel, M.R., Schiller, J. and Srinivasan, R.A., “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and

Problems of Probability and Statistics”, Tata McGraw Hill edition, (2004).

PTCE3204 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I STRESS, STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS 8 Rigid bodies and deformable solids – Tension, Compression and Shear Stresses – Deformation of simple and compound bars – Thermal stresses – Elastic Constants – Volumetric strains – Stresses on inclined planes – Principal stresses and principal planes – Mohr’s circle of stress. UNIT II TRANSEVERSE LOADING ON BEAMS AND STRESSES IN BEAMS 13 Beams – types transverse loading on beams – Shear force and bending moment in beams – Cantilevers – Simply supported beams and over – hanging beams. Theory of simple bending - bending formula – bending stress distribution – Load carrying capacity – Proportioning of sections – Flitched beams – Shear stress distribution. UNIT II I TORSION 6 Stresses and deformation in circular and hollows shafts – Stepped shafts – Shafts fixed at the both ends – Stresses in helical springs – Deflection of helical springs. UNIT IV DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 10 Double Integration method – Macaulay’s method – Area moment theorems for computation of slopes and deflections in beams – Conjugate beam and energy method – Maxwell’s reciprocal theorems. UNIT V THIN CYLINDERS, SPHERES AND THICK CYLINDERS 9 Stresses in thin cylindrical shell due to internal pressure circumferential and longitudinal stresses – deformation in thin cylinders –spherical shells subjected to internal pressure –deformations in spherical shells - Lame’s theory – application of theories of failure

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Rajput.R.K. “Strength of Materials” S.Chand & co Ltd. New Delhi 1996 2. Jindal U.C. “Strength of Materials” Asian Books Pvt Ltd, New Delhi 2007 REFERENCES 1. Egor.P.Popov “Engineering Mechanics of Solids” Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi

1997 2. Subramanian R. “Strength of Materials” Oxford University Press,Oxford Higher

Education series ,2007 Hibbeler , R.C, Mechanics of materials”, Pearson Education, Low price Edition,2007

11

PTEE3203 ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND CONTROL L T P C 3 0 0 3

AIM: To provide knowledge in the area of electrical dives and their control techniques PREREQUISTE: Basic Electrical Engineering

OBJECTIVE: To impart knowledge on Basics of electric drives Different speed control methods Various motor starters and controllers Applications

UNIT I INTROUDCTION 9 Fundamentals of electric drives – advances of electric drive-characteristics of loads – different types of mechanical loads – choice of an electric drive – control circuit components: Fuses, switches, circuit breakers, contactors. Relay – control transformers. UNIT II SPEED CONTROL OF DC MACHINES 9 DC shunt motors – Speed Torque characteristics - Ward Leonard method, DC series motor – series parallel control – solid state DC drives – Thyristor bridge rectifier circuits- chopper circuits. UNIT III SPEED CONTROL OF AC MACHINES 9 Induction motor – Speed torque Characteristics – pole changing, stator frequency variation - slip-ring induction motor – stator voltage variation - Rotor resistance variation, slip power recovery – basic inverter circuits- variable voltage frequency control. UNIT IV MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLLERS 9 DC motor starters : using voltage sensing relays, current sensing relays and time delay relays - wound rotor induction motor starters – starters using frequency sensing relays - DOI -starter and auto transformers starter. UNIT V HEATING AND POWER RATING OF DRIVE MOTORS 9 Load diagram, over load capacity, insulating materials, heating and cooling of motors, service condition of electric drive – continuous, intermittent and short time – industrial application.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. N.K De and P.K Sen ‘Electric Drives’ Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd,2002. 2. Vedam Subramaniam ‘Electric Drives’ Tata McGraw Hill ,New Delhi,2007 3. V.K Mehta and Rohit Mehta ‘ Principle of Electrical Engineering’ S Chand &

Company,2008 REFERENCES 1. S.K Bhattacharya Brinjinder Singh ‘Control of Electrical Machines’ New Age

International Publishers,2002. 2. John Bird ‘Electrical Circuit theory and technology’ Elsevier, First Indian Edition,

2006.

12

PTMF3206 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES - I LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To provide the coverage of the breadth and depth of the field of manufacturing. So that students can become familiar with some of the basic metal cutting, and related machining process. OBJECTIVES: At the end of this course the student should be able to understand Methods to solve problems on cutting forces, tool life and analytical methods of

estimating cutting temperature. Constructional features of lathe, drilling, shaper, planer, boring, broaching, and

grinding machines, accessories and common operations performed on these machines.

Machine tool structures, erection and testing of machine tools Concept of automation of machine tools. UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF METAL CUTTING 9 Tool geometry- Mechanics of orthogonal and oblique cutting - mechanism of chip formation- Types of chips produced in cutting -Cutting forces - Merchant's circle diagram – simple problems -Cutting temperature-causes, effects, measurement, estimation and control-Tool failure modes-wear mechanisms – tool life - simple problems- Machinability -Surface finish and integrity of machined surfaces- Machining economics- cutting tool materials- Cutting tool reconditioning-Cutting fluids. UNIT II BASIC MACHINING PROCESSES 12 Lathe: Kinematic arrangement -Specification - Types - Mechanisms - work holding devices- Operations - Drilling: Specification - Types - Mechanism - Operations - Drill tool nomenclature –-Boring: Specification - Types - Operations - Boring tool - Jig Boring machine – Reamer and tap Milling: Specification – Types - Cutter nomenclature – Types of cutter - mounting of cutters Operations - Indexing - Cam and thread milling- Shaper: Specification - Types – Mechanism- Planer: Specification - Types - Mechanism - Broaching: Specification - Types - Tool nomenclature - Broaching process. UNIT III GRINDING AND FINISHING OPERATIONS 8 Grinding: Types of grinding machine - Designation and selection of grinding wheel -Abrasives- Bonds -bonded abrasives - Reconditioning of grinding wheel – grinding operations and machines wheel grinding -Design Considerations for grinding - economics of grinding- finishing operation. - deburring - lapping, honing, burnishing - super finishing operations. UNIT IV GEAR CUTTING 8 Gear cutting methods-Kinematics of gear shaping and gear hobbing – template gear cutting methods-Gear generation principles specifications - Bevel gear generator – Gear finishing methods-gear grinding –lapping UNIT V MACHINE TOOL STRUCTURE AND AUTOMATION 8 Classification Machine tool structures-Vibration and chatters in machining-erecting and testing of machine tools-Automation: Cam controlled automats, single spindle and multi spindle automats - Swiss type, automatic screw mechanism - Feeding mechanism Transfer mechanism, Tracer controller mechanism.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Geoffrey Boothroyd, Winston A. Knight, “Fundamentals of metal machining

andmachine tools ”, CRC , 2nd edition, 1988. 2. P.C.PANDY,C.K.SINGH,”Production Engineering and Science”, Standard Publishers

distributors, New Delgi, 2003.

13

REFERENCES 1. S.K. HAJRA CHOUDRY, S.K.BOSE, A.K. HAJRA CHOUDRY " Elements of

Workshop Technology Vol II: Machine tools", Media promoters and Publishers Pvt Ltd, 2002

2. P.C.SHARMA, A Text book of Production Technology, S.Chand and Co., Ltd., 1999. 3. KRAR, OSWARD, Technology of Machine Tools, McGraw Hill International

Editions,1991. 4. ROY A LINDBERG, Fourth Edition, Process and Materials of Manufacture, Prentice-

Hall of India, 1994. 5. E.PAUL DeGARMA, J.T.BLACK and RONALD A.KOSHER, Eighth Edition, Materials

and Processes in Manufacturing Prentice-Hall of India, 1997. PTME3205 MECHANICS OF MACHINES LT P C 3 1 0 4 OBJECTIVES: To understand the principles in the formation of mechanisms and their kinematics. To understand the effect of friction in different machine elements. To analyse the forces and toques acting on simple mechanical systems To understand the importance of balancing and vibration. UNIT I KINEMATIC OF MECHANICS 10 Mechanisms – Terminology and definitions – kinematics inversions of 4 bar and slide crank chain – kinematics analysis in simple mechanisms – velocity and acceleration polygons – Analytical methods – computer approach – cams – classifications – displacement diagrams - layout of plate cam profiles – derivatives of followers motion – circular arc and tangent cams. UNIT II GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9 Spur gear – law of toothed gearing – involute gearing – Interchangeable gears – Gear tooth action interference and undercutting – nonstandard teeth – gear trains – parallel axis gears trains – epicyclic gear trains – automotive transmission gear trains. UNIT III FRICTION 8 Sliding and Rolling Friction angle – friction in threads – Friction Drives – Friction clutches – Belt and rope drives – brakes – Tractive resistance. UNIT IV FORCE ANALYSIS 9 Applied and Constrained Forces – Free body diagrams – static Equilibrium conditions – Two, Three and four members – Static Force analysis in simple machine members – Dynamic Force Analysis – Inertia Forces and Inertia Torque – D’Alembert’s principle – superposition principle – dynamic Force Analysis in simple machine members. UNIT V BALANCING AND VIBRATION 9 Static and Dynamic balancing – Balancing of revolving and reciprocating masses – Balancing machines – free vibrations – Equations of motion – natural Frequency – Damped Vibration – bending critical speed of simple shaft – Torsional vibration – Forced vibration – harmonic Forcing – Vibration solation.

L : 45, T : 15, TOTAL : 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Ambekar A.G., “Mechanism and Machine Theory” Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,

2007

14

2. Shigley J.E., Pennock G.R and Uicker J.J., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”, Oxford University Press, 2003

REFERENCES 1. Thomas Bevan, “Theory of Machines”, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 1984. 2. Ghosh.A, and A.K.Mallick, “Theory and Machine”, Affiliated East-West Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 1988. 3. Rao.J.S. and Dukkipatti R.V. “Mechanisms and Machines”, Wiley-Eastern Ltd., New

Delhi, 1992. 4. V.Ramamurthi, Mechanisms of Machine, Narosa Publishing House, 2002. 5. Robert L.Norton, Design of Machinery, McGraw-Hill, 2004. STANDARDS 1. IS 2458:2001, Vocabulary of Gear Terms – Definitions related to Geometry. 2. IS 3756 : 2002, Method of Gear Correction – Addendum modification for External

cylindrical gears with parallel axes. 3. IS 5267 : 2002 Vocabulary of Gear Terms – Definitions Related to Worm Gear

Geometry. 4. IS 12328 : Part 1 : 1988 Bevel Gear Systems Part -1 Straight Bevel Gears. 5. IS12328 : 1988 Bevel Systems Part – 2 Spiral Bevel Gears. PTME3215 THERMODYNAMICS L T P C

4 0 0 4 AIM: To impart the importance of thermal science aspects in the field of manufacturing engineering. OBJECTIVES: To understand the basic laws of thermodynamics and heat transfer. To understand the principle of operation of thermal equipments like IC engine,

boilers, turbine and refrigerator etc. UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS OF THERMODYNAMICS 9 Thermodynamics and Energy – Systems – Types and properties - State and Equilibrium - Processes and Cycles – Forms of Energy – Temperature and Zeroth law of Thermodynamics – Pure substances – Phase change processes of pure substances –Property diagrams – Internal energy – Enthalpy – Energy transfer by Heat, Work and Mass – Applications. UNIT II FIRST AND SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9 First law of thermodynamics – Energy balance for closed systems and steady flow systems – Applications of First law of Thermodynamics – Energy balance for Unsteady flow processes – Second law of Thermodynamics – Entropy – Carnot principles –Change in Entropy – Entropy and irreversibility -Applications. UNIT III HEAT ENGINES 14 Internal Combustion Engines – C.I and S.I Engines – Four Stroke and Two Stroke Engines – Gas Turbines - Boilers – Fire Tube Boiler & Water Tube Boilers , Boiler Accessories and Components. Turbines – Impulse Turbine and Reaction Turbine , Turbine Components - Refrigeration Cycle – Vapour Compression & Vapour Absorption System ,Gas Refrigeration System – Environmental friendly Refrigerants – Air Conditioning.

15

UNIT IV GASES AND VAPOUR MIXTURES 9 Ideal and Real gases – Vander waals equations – Reduced property – Compressibility chart -Properties of mixture of gases – Dalton’s law and Gibbs – Dalton law – Internal energy, Enthalpy and specific heats of gas mixtures. UNIT V HEAT TRANSFER 9 Conduction – Plane Wall, Cylinder system, Composite Walls – Critical insulation thickness – Simple, fins convection – Free convection and forced convection – Flow over Flat plates and Flow through Pipes – Radiation – Black Body, Grey Body Radiation.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. “Thermodynamics an Engineering Approach” Yunus A. Cenegal and Michael

A.Boles, Tata McGraw hill, Fourth edition, 2004. 2. “Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics” Michael J.Moran, Howard

N.Shapiro, John wiley &Sons, Fourth editon,2000. REFERENCES 1. “A Text book of Engineering Thermodynamics” R.K.Rajput , Laxmi puplication(P) Ltd.

,Third Edition, 2007. 2. “Engineering Thermodynamics” P.K.Nag, Tata McGraw hill, Third edition, 2005 3. “A course in Thermal engineering” S.Domkundwar, C.P.Kothandaraman, Dhanpat rai

& co (p) Ltd, Fifth edition, 2000. PTME3202 ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND METALLURGY L T P C 3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVE: To impart knowledge on the structure, properties, treatment, testing and applications of metals and non-metallic materials so as to identify and select suitable materials for various engineering applications. UNIT I CONSTITUTION OF ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS 9 Constitution of alloys – Solid solutions, substitutional and interstitials – Phase diagrams and microstructure development: Isomorphous, eutectic, peritectic, eutectoid and peritectroid alloy systems. Iron-Iron carbide equilibrium diagram, Development of microstructures in Iron- carbon alloys. UNIT II HEAT TREATMENT 9 Full annealing-stress relief, Recrystalisation- Spheroidizing, Normalising, Hardening and tempering of steel. Isothermal transformation diagrams- TTT– CCT cooling curves - Hardenability, Jominy end quench test – Austempering, martempering – case hardening, carburizing, nitriding, cyaniding, carbonotriding –flame and induction hardening – vacuum and plasma hardening – current trends- thermo-mechanical treatments- elementary ideas on sintering. UNIT III FERROUS AND NON FERROUS METALS 9 Effect of alloying additions on steel (Mn, Si, Cr, Mo, V, Ti & W)- classification of steels ( tool steel, stainless)– cast irons – alloy cast irons- Copper and Copper alloys –Aluminum and its alloys- Magnesium and its alloys– Titanium and its alloys- Nickel and Cobalt alloys, properties and applications of these materials.

16

UNIT IV NON-METALLIC MATERIALS 9 Types, properties and applications: Polymers, Ceramics and Composites– Super conductors- nanomaterials and their properties. UNIT V MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AND TESTING 9 Crystal imperfections- Dislocations- Strengthening mechanisms- Elastic, anelastic and viscoelastic behaviour – modulus of elasticity- plastic deformation- Mechanical tests- tension, compression, impact, hardness- effect of temperature, grain size , solutes and precipitates on dislocation dynamics – Mechancism of Fracture - mechanism of creep-creep resistant materials- creep tests- fracture toughness- ductile-brittle transition –deformation mechanism maps- fatigue fracture-fatigue test.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Raghavan. V. Materials Science and Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd, 5th

edition, 2007. 2. Williams D Callister, “Material Science and Engineering” Wiley India Pvt Ltd, Revised

Indian edition 2007. REFERENCES 1. George E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw Hill, 2007. 2. Syndney H Avner, “Introduction to Physical Metallurgy”, 2/E Tata McGraw Hill Book

Company, 2007. 3. Kenneth G. Budinski and Michael K. Budinski “Engineering Materials”, PHI / Pearson

Educations, 8th Edition, 2007. 4. G.S. Upadhay and Anish Upadhay, “Materials Science and Engineering”, Viva Books

Pvt. Ltd, 2006. 5. James F. Shackelford and Madanpalli K. Muralidhara, Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers, Pearson Education, 6th edition, 2007.

PTMF3212 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES – II LT P C 3 0 0 3

AIM: To give the insight, principles of basic forming, casting and joining processes to the student. So that they will be able to analyze the merits and limitations of each processes while making process selection. OBJECTIVE: At the end of this course the student should be able to understand The tools, equipment and principle of operation of primary and secondary

manufacturing processes. Defects, causes and their remedies of welding, casting and metal forming

operations. Processing of plastics and fabrication of various types composite material. Equipment, principle of operation of non traditional machining and forming

processes. UNIT I CASTING PROCESSES 9 Casting Terminology – Pattern – Types of Patterns – Pattern allowances – Moulds Moulding Tools – Machines and Materials – Core – Core Making – Sand Moulding methods – Melting furnaces – fluxing – Inoculation – Die-casting processes-Cleaning, Inspection and repairing of castings.

17

UNIT II METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9 Hot working & Cold working of metals – Forging Machines - Forging operations– Rolling Types of Rolling mills – Rolling operations – Extrusion – Extrusion processes– Rod, wire and tube drawing - Bending – Principle & types- Deep drawing – Principle & Types Sheet metal forming operations such as squeezing, spinning, peen ,stretch forming and super plastic forming. UNIT III FABRICATIOIN PROCESSES 9 Welding – Classification of welding – Electric Arc Welding- Equipment – Consumables –processes – Gas Welding – Equipment – Processes – Resistance welding – Types of Resistance welding – Soldering & Brazing – Adhesive bonding – Welding Inspection –Defects, Causes & Remedies. UNIT IV PROCESSING OF PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 9 Types of plastics – Processing of thermo plastics – Extrusion, Inspection blow, Rotatromal moulding processes – Calendaring, Film blowing, Thermo forming Processing of thermosets - Compression, Transfer, Jet Moulding processes – Bonding of thermoplastics- Laminated plastic –– Composites- types- Fabrication Methods advantages ,limitations and applications. UNIT V UNCONVENTIONAL METHODS OF MANUFACTURING 9 Introduction – Need –classification -Electro-Discharge Machining – Electro-Chemical Machining – Laser Beam Machining – Abrasive Jet Machining –Water jet Cutting Ultrasonic Machining –– High Velocity Forming of Metals – Explosive Fabrication – Hydro forming – Electro-hydraulic Forming – Magnetic pulse Forming – Electron Beam Machining.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. S.Gowri, P.Hariharan, A.Suresh Babu “Manufacturing Technology-I”,Pearson

Education, 2008 2. P.C.SHARMA, A Text book of Production Technology, S.Chand and Co., Ltd., 1999. REFERENCES 1. R.K.Rajput, “Manufacturing Technology (Manufacturing Processes), Latmi

Publications Ltd., New Delhi,2007 2. D.K.Singh, “Fundamentals of Manufacturing Engineering”, Ane Books India, New

Delhi,2008 3. R.B.Gupta, “Foundry Engineering”, Sataya Prakasham, New Delhi,2002 4. R.S.Parmar, “Welding Processes and Technology”, Khanna Publishers, New

Delhi,2003 PTMF3301 CASTING AND WELDING TECHNOLOGY LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To impart knowledge on fundamentals of welding technology , cast design and advanced welding and casting processes. OBJECTIVE: At the end of this course the student should be able to understand Melting procedure of various materials Design principles of welding and casting Principles of advanced welding and casting processes

18

Automation of welding and casting plant UNIT I MELTING AND POURING 8 Principles of melting practice-fluxing- Degasification and inoculation- types of furnaces-Crucibles, Cupola, Oil fired furnaces – Electric arc and induction furnaces –Melting practice of cast iron, SG iron, steel, aluminum and copper alloys. UNIT II CASTING DESIGN 10 Solidification of pure metals and alloys-shrinkage in cast metals-design of sprue, runner ,gate and risers-problems in design and manufacture of thin and unequal sections designing for directional solidification, minimum distortion and for overall economy - design problems of L,T,V,X and Y junctions. UNIT III WELD DESIGN AND WELDING METALLURGY 10 Design of welded components-symbolic representation of welds on drawings- welding classes-residual stresses in welds-weld distortions-design consideration-strength consideration of welded joints-analysis of statistically loaded welded joints-welded structures subjected to fatigue loads. UNIT IV SPECIAL CASTING AND WELDING PROCESSES 8 Evaporative pattern casting-ceramic mould casting –electro magnetic moulding-squeeze casting –investment casting-shell moulding- PAW-electron beam welding-laser beam welding- friction welding-ultrasonic welding – diffusion welding-high velocity oxy fuel processes UNIT V QUALITY CONTROL AND AUTOMATION 9 Cleaning and inspection of castings – Casting defect and remedies – foundry automations-moulding machines-Automation of sand plant, moulding and fettling sections of foundry-Dust and fume control-Welding defects –causes and remedies – Non destructive tests – arc welding using robots-weld positioner and manipulators –weld seam tracking-vision system-arc sensing Welding

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. PARMAR,R.S., Welding Processes and Technology, Khanna Publishers, 1997. 2. JAIN,P.L., Principles of Foundry Technology, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003. REFERENCES 1. A.S.M Hand book, vol 15,casting,ASM international,1988 2. KLAS WEMAN, welding processes hand book, CRC press,2003 3. CARY and HOWARD,B., Modern Welding Technology, Prentice-Hall, 1989. 4. HEINE, R.W., LOPER.L.R., and ROSENTHAL,C, Principles of Metal Casting, Tata McGraw Hill, 1986. 5. MINKOFF,J., solidification and cast structure,wiley.1986 6. DAVIES, A.C., Welding (10th Edition), Cambridge University Press, 1996. PTMF3304 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN LT PC

3 0 0 3 AIM: To impart knowledge in the theoretical principles of Computer Aided Design OBJECTIVE: To familiarize the student with computer hardware and peripheral Devices, mathematics of computer graphics, geometric modeling, CAD standards And to impart fundamental knowledge in Finite Element Analysis

19

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5 Product Cycle – Design Process – CAD Hardware – Mainframe, Mini, Workstation and Micro computer Based Systems, Input and Output Devices – Software – Operating System, Geometric Modeling capabilities – hardware Integration and Networking. UNIT II COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9 Two dimensional transformations – Transformation of Straight Lines – Rotation –Reflection – Scaling – Combined Transformations – Translations and homogeneous co ordinates – Three dimensional transformations – Scaling – Rotation – Reflection –Translation – Projections – Orthographic and Isometric Projections – Clipping – Hidden Line and Surface Removal. UNIT III GEOMETRIC MODELLING 9 Geometrical Modeling – wire frame, models – entities – surface models – entities – solid models – Entities – Boundary Representation (B-Rep) – Constructive Solid Geometric (CSG) – Sweep and Analytical Solid Modeling. UNIT IV CAD STANDARDS 11 Graphical Kernel System (GKS) Programmers Hierarchical Interface for Graphics (PHIGS), Initial Graphics Exchange Specification (IGES), Standard for Exchange of product Model Data (STEP), Drawing Exchange Format (DXF), Dimensional Measurement Interface Specification (DMIS) – Introduction to Drafting and Modeling Systems. UNIT V FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS 11 Introduction – Procedures – Element types – Nodal approximation – Element matrices, vectors and equations – Global connectivity – Assembly – Boundary conditions – Solutions techniques – Interfaces to CAD – Introduction to packages, Case Studies –Applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Ibrahim Zeid, “CAD-CAM Theory and Practice”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.Ltd.,

1991 2. D.F.Rogers and J.A.Adams, “Mathematical Elements in Computer Graphics”,

McGraw–Hill Book Company, New York, 1976. REFERENCES 1. P.Radhakrishnan and C.P.Kothandaraman, “Computer Graphics and Design”,

Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 1991. 2. E.Dieter George, “Engineering Design”, McGraw-Hill International Edition, 1991. 3. P.Radhakrishnan and S.Subramanyam, “CAD/CAM/CIM”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New

Age International Ltd., 1994. PTME3214 MACHINE DESIGN L T P C

3 1 0 4 OBJECTIVE To familiarise the various steps involved in the Design Process To understand the principles involved in evaluating the shape and dimensions of a

component to satisfy functional and strength requirements. To learn to use standard practices and standard data. To learn to use catalogues and standard machine components

20

UNIT I STEADY STRESSES AND VARIABLE STRESSES IN MACHINE MEMBERS 9

Introduction to the design process – factor influencing machine design, selection of materials based on mechanical properties – Preferred numbers, fits and tolerances – Direct, Bending and torsional stress equations – impact and shock loading – calculation of principle stresses for various load combinations, eccentric loading – Design of curved beams – crane hook and ‘C’ frame – Factor of safety – theories of failure – stress concentration – design for variable loading – Soderberg, Goodman and Gerber relations. UNIT II DESIGN OF SHAFTS AND COUPLINGS 10 Design of solid and hollow shafts based on strength, rigidity and critical speed – Design of keys, key ways and splines – Design of crankshafts – Design of rigid and flexible couplings. UNIT III DESIGN OF TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT JOINTS 9 Threaded fastners – Design of bolted joints including eccentric loading, Knuckle joints, Cotter joints – Design of Welded joints, riveted joints for structures – theory of bonded joints. UNIT IV DESIGN OF ENERGY STORING ELEMENTS 8 Design of various types of springs, optimization of helical spings – rubber springs – Design of flywheels considering stresses in rims and arms, for engines and punching machines. UNIT V DESIGN OF BEARINGS AND MISCELLANEOUS ELEMENTS 9 Sliding contact and rolling contact bearings – Design of hydrodynamic journal bearings, McKee’s Eqn., Sommerfield Number, Raimondi & Boyd – Selection of Rolling Contact bearings – Design of Seals and Gaskets – Design of Connecting Rod.

L : 45, T : 15, TOTAL : 60 PERIODS Note : (Use of P S G Design Data Book is permitted in the University examination) TEXT BOOKS 1. Shigley J.E. and Mischke C.R., “Mechanical Engineering Design”, Sixth Edition, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2003. 2. Bhandrari V.B, “Design of Machine Elements”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill

Book Co., 2007. REFERENCES 1. Sundararajamoorthy T.V, Shanmugam N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publications,

Chennai. 2. Orthwein W, “Machine Component Design”, Jaico Publishing Co, 2003. 3. Ugural A.C, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Approacho, McGRaw-Hill Book Co,

2004. 4. Spotts A.F., Shoup T.E, “Design and Machine Elements” Pearson Education, 2004. STANDARDS 1. IS 10260 : Part I : 1982 Terms, definitions and classification of Plain bearings Part 1 :

Construction. 2. IS10260 : Part I : 1982 Terms, definitions and classification of Plain bearings Part 2 :

Friction and Wear. 3. IS 10260 : Part I : 1982 Terms, definitions and classification of Plain bearings Part 3 :

Lubrication

21

PTME3305 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM: To understand the basic of fluid power and its application in industrial automation. OBJECTIVE: This course will give an appreciation of the fundamental principles, design and operation of hydraulic and pneumatic machines, components and systems and their application in recent automation revolution. UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINCIPLES AND FUNDEMENTALS (REVIEW) 3 Introduction to Fluid power- Advantages and Applications- Fluid power systems – Types of fluids- Properties of fluids Basics of Hydraulics – Pascal’s Law- Principles of flow – Work, Power and Torque. Properties of air– Perfect Gas Laws. UNIT II HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS 13 Sources of Hydraulic power: Pumping Theory – Pump Classification- Construction, Working, Design, Advantages, Disadvantages, Performance, Selection criterion of Linear, Rotary- Fixed and Variable displacement pumps, Hydraulic Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Hydraulic motors Control Components: Direction control, Flow control and Pressure control valves- Types, Construction and Operation- Applications – Types of actuation. Accessories: Reservoirs, Accumulators, Intensifiers, Pressure Switches- Applications- Fluid Power ANSI Symbol. UNIT III HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS 9 Industrial hydraulic circuits- Regenerative, Pump Unloading, Double-pump, Pressure Intensifier, Air-over oil, Sequence, Reciprocation, Synchronization, Fail-safe, Speed control, Hydrostatic transmission, Accumulators, Electro hydraulic circuits, Mechanical Hydraulic servo systems. UNIT IV PNEUMATIC SYSTEM 8 Compressors- Filter, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air control Valves, Quick Exhaust valves, Pneumatic actuators, Servo systems. Introduction to Fluidics, Pneumatic logic circuits.

UNIT V DESIGN OF HYDRALIC AND PNEMATIC CIRCUITS 12 Designing the components of hydraulic system for Drilling, Planning, Shaping, Punching, Press. – Selection, fault finding and maintenance of hydraulic components- Sequential circuit design for simple application using cascade method, Electro pneumatic circuits. Selection criteria of pneumatic components – Installation fault finding and maintenance of pneumatic components. Microprocessor and PLC- Applications in Hydraulic and Pneumatics- Low cost Automation – Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs- case studies.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. Anthony Esposito,” Fluid Power with Applications”, PHI / Pearson Education, 2005.

REFRENCES 1. Shanmugasundaram.K, “Hydraulic and Pneumatic controls”, Chand & Co, 2006. 2. Majumdar, S.R., “Oil Hydraulics Systems- Principles and Maintenance”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2001 3. Majumdar, S.R., “Pneumatic Systems – Principles and Maintenance”, Tata McGraw

Hill, 2007. 4. Micheal J, Pinches and Ashby, J.G., “Power Hydraulics”, Prentice Hall, 1989. 5. Dudelyt, A Pease and John J Pippenger, “Basic Fluid Power”, Prentice Hall, 1987.

22

PTMF3309 CAD LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 2 1 AIM: To provide practical knowledge in Computer aided modeling and assembly OBJECTIVE: To impart hands on experience to students in Geometric Modeling, Assembly and Engineering Drafting. 1. SKETCHER Introduction- Basic sketch, Constraints – Geometry & Dimensional. 2. SOLID MODELING Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Loft, Datum plane creation etc. 3. SURFACE MODELING Extrude & Revolve surfacing, Advance surfacing technique – Ruled & Loft surfacing, Mesh of curves, Free form surfaces, Surface operations – trium, merge, intersect, etc. 4. FEATURE MANIPULATION Copy, Edit, Pattern, Suppress, History operations etc. 5. ASSEMBLY Constraints, Patterns, exploded Views, Interference check, creating components from assembly, mass property calculations, BOM generations and assembly cut sections. 6. DRAFTING Standard view, Sectional views and Detailing, BOM and Balloon creation.

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

PTMF3216 ENGINEERING METROLOGY LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To give a thorough knowledge of measurement and instrumentation of increasing importance in industry. The student will be knowledgeable in various standards and proliferation of computerized and automated inspecting techniques along with the classical metrology. OBJECTIVE: To teach the students basic concepts in various methods of engineering measurement techniques and applications, understand the importance of measurement and inspection in manufacturing industries. Expose the students to various modern metrological instruments and the procedure used to operate these instruments. UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS OF MEASUREMENTS 8 Need for measurement – Dimensional and Form tolerances – Precision and Accuracy –Errors in Measurements – Causes – Types – Handling of measuring instruments –Maintenance of Instruments – Standards and Practice – Metrology lab – Environment and conditions.

23

UNIT II LINEAR AND ANGULAR MEASUREMENTS 9 Measurement of Engineering Components – Comparators, Slip gauges, Rollers, Limit gauges – Design and Applications – Angle dekkor – Alignment telescope – Sine bar –Bevel protractors – Types – Principle – Applications. UNIT III FORM MEASUREMENTS 9 Measurement of Screw thread and gears – Radius measurement – Surface finish measurement – Auto collimator – Straightness, Flatness and roundness measurements – Principles – Application. UNIT IV OPTICAL MEASUREMENTS 10 Optical microscope, interference microscope, Tool makers microscope, Vision systems, Precision instrument based on Laser – Use of Lasers – Principle – Laser Interferometer – Application in Linear and Angular measurements – Testing of machine tools using Laser Interferometer. UNIT V ADVANCES IN METROLOGY 9 Co-ordinate measuring machine – Constructional features – Types – Applications of CMM – CNC CMM applications – Computer Aided Inspection – Machine Vision – Applications in Metrology. Nanometrology – Introduction – Principles – Nanometer metrology systems – Methods of measuring length and surfaces to nano scale result with interferometers and other devices

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Gaylor, Shotbolt and Sharp, "Metrology for Engineers”, O.R.Cassel, London, 5th

Edition, 1993. 2. R.K.Jain, "Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, 19th Edition, 2005 REFERENCES 1. Thomas, “Engineering Metrology”, Butthinson & Co., 1984. 2. Industrial Metrology, Graham T. Smith, Springer-Verlag London Ltd 2002 3. White house, D. J, “Handbook of Surface & Nanometrology”, The institute of Physics,

London, 1994. 4. M.Mahajan, “A text-Book of Metrology”, Dhanpat Rai & Co. (P) Ltd. 2006. PTMF3306 CNC MACHINING TECHNOLOGY L T P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To provide knowledge on principle, constructional features, programming, tooling and work holding devices in CNC machine tools OBJECTIVES: Upon completion of this subject, student will be able to: Understand evolution and principle of CNC machine tools Describe constructional features of CNC machine tools Explain drives and positional transducers used in CNC machine tools Write simple programs for CNC turning and machining centres Generate CNC programs for popular CNC controllers Describe tooling and work holding devices for CNC machine tools

24

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CNC MACHINE TOOLS 6 Evolution of CNC Technology, principles, features, advantages, applications, CNC and DNC concept, classification of CNC Machines – turning centre, machining centre, grinding machine, EDM, types of control systems, CNC controllers, characteristics, interpolators– Computer Aided Inspection UNIT II STRUCTURE OF CNC MACHINE TOOL 10 CNC Machine building, structural details, configuration and design, guide ways – Friction, Anti friction and other types of guide ways, elements used to convert the rotary motion to a linear motion – Screw and nut, recirculating ball screw, planetary roller screw, recirculating roller screw, rack and pinion, spindle assembly, torque transmission elements – gears, timing belts, flexible couplings, Bearings. UNIT III DRIVES AND CONTROLS 9 Spindle drives – DC shunt motor, 3 phase AC induction motor, feed drives – stepper motor, servo principle, DC and AC servomotors, Open loop and closed loop control, Axis measuring system – synchro, synchro-resolver, gratings, moiré fringe gratings, encoders, inductosysn, laser interferometer. UNIT IV CNC PROGRAMMING 11 Coordinate system, structure of a part program, G & M Codes, tool length compensation, cutter radius and tool nose radius compensation, do loops, subroutines, canned cycles, mirror image, parametric programming, machining cycles, programming for machining centre and turning centre for well known controllers such as Fanuc, Heidenhain, Sinumerik etc., generation of CNC codes from CAM packages. UNIT V TOOLING AND WORK HOLDING DEVICES 9 Introduction to cutting tool materials – Carbides, Ceramics, CBN, PCD–inserts classification- PMK, NSH, qualified, semi qualified and preset tooling, tooling system for Machining centre and Turning centre, work holding devices for rotating and fixed work parts, economics of CNC, maintenance of CNC machines.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. “Mechatronics”, HMT, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi,

2005. 2. Warren S.Seamers, “Computer Numeric Control”, Fourth Edition – Thomson Delmar,

2002. REFERENCES 1. James Madison, “CNC Machining Hand Book”, Industrial Press Inc., 1996. 2. Ken Evans, John Polywka & Stanley Gabrel, “Programming of CNC Machines”,

Second Edition – Industrial Press Inc, New York, 2002 3. Peter Smid, “CNC Programming Hand book”, Industrial Press Inc., 2000 4. Berry Leathan – Jones, “Introduction to Computer Numerical Control”, Pitman,

London, 1987. 5. Radhakrishnan P “Computer Numerical Control Machines”, New Central Book

Agency, 2002. 6. Rao P.N., CAD/CAM, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi,

2002.

25

PTMF3303 PRECISION ENGINEERING LT P C 3 0 0 3

AIM: To enable this students to understand the concept of precision engineering, its principles and importance as applicable to instruments and machines. OBJECTIVE: To provide and enhance the technical knowledge in precision engineering, its components and applications. UNIT I PRECISION ENGINEERING 9 Introduction - Accuracy & precision – Need – application precision machining –Tool based Micro & Ultra precision Machining grinding – Thermal effects – Materials for tools and machine elements – carbides – ceramic, CBN & diamond. UNIT II TOLERANCE AND FITS 8 Tolerance – Zone – fits – Variation – Hole & shaft system – limits – expected Accuracy of machining processes – Selective assembly – gauges acceptance tests for machine tools. UNIT III ULTRA PRECISION MACHINE ELEMENTS 9 Introduction – Guide ways – Drive systems – Spindle drive – preferred numbers - Rolling elements – hydrodynamic & hydrostatic bearings – pneumatic bearings. UNIT IV MEMS 10 Introduction – MEMS – principle – Elements – Characteristics – Design – Application: automobile defence, aerospace etc., UNIT V ERROR CONTROL 9 Error – Sources – Static stiffness – Variation of the cutting force – total compliance – Different machining methods – Thermal effects – heat source – heat dissipation –Stabilization – decreasing thermal effects – forced vibration on accuracy – clamping & setting errors – Control – errors due to locations – principle of constant location surfaces.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Nakazawa, H. Principles of Precision Engineering, Oxford University Press, 1994. 2. Precision Engineering – R.L. Murthy REFERENCE 1. Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, Bristol, BSI 6BE U.K. PTMG3311 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To provide a clear understanding of basic management principles that leads to corporate building. OBJECTIVES: To develop Industrial Management deals with not only functions of management but

also organizational structure and dynamics. To develop modern concepts of Industrial Management

26

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 Technology Management - Definition – Functions – Evolution of Modern Management –Scientific Management -Development of Management Thought. Approaches to the study of Management- Forms of Organization – Individual Ownership – Partnership – Joint Stock Companies – Co-operative Enterprises – Public Sector Undertakings, Corporate Frame Work – Share Holders – Board of Directors – Committees – Chief Executive – Line and Functional Managers, Constraints – Environmental – Financial – Legal – Trade Union– UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF MANAGEMENT 9 Planning – Nature and Purpose – Objectives – Strategies – Policies and Planning Premises – Decision Making – Organizing – Nature and Process – Premises – Departmentalization – Line and staff – Decentralization – Organizational culture, Staffing - selection and training – Placement – Performance appraisal – Career Strategy – Organizational Development. Managing human factor –Controlling - Process of Controlling – Controlling techniques, productivity and operations management – Preventive control, Industrial Safety. UNIT III ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9 Definition – Organization – Managerial Role and functions – Organizational approaches, Individual behaviour – causes – Environmental Effect – Behaviour and Performance, Perception – Organizational Implications. Personality – Contributing factors – Dimension – Need Theories – Process Theories – Job Satisfaction, Learning Behaviour – Learning Curves, Work Design and approaches. UNIT IV GROUP DYNAMICS 9 Groups – Contributing factors -Group Behaviour –– Group Norms, Communication –Process – Barriers to communication – Effective communication, leadership – formal and informal characteristics – Managerial Grid – Leadership styles – Group Decision Making – Leadership Role in Group Decision, Group Conflicts – Types –Causes –Conflict Resolution – Inter group relations and conflict, Organization, centralization and decentralization – Formal and informal – Organizational Structures – Organizational Change and Development – Change Process – Resistance to Change – Culture and Ethics. UNIT V MODERN CONCEPTS 9 Management by Objectives (MBO) –, Management by Exception (MBE), Strategic Management - Planning for Future direction – SWOT Analysis – Evolving development strategies, information technology in management – Decisions support system –Management Games – Business Process Re-engineering(BPR) – Enterprises Resource Planning (ERP) – Supply Chain Management (SCM) – Activity Based Management (ABM) – Global Perspective - Principles and Steps – Advantages and disadvantages

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK 1. Herald Knottz and Heinz Weihrich, ‘Essentials of Management’, McGraw Hill

Publishing Company, Singapore International Edition, 1980. REFERENCES 1. S.Chandran, Organizational Behaviours, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.. Ltd, 1994 2. Ties, AF, Stoner and R.Edward Freeman, ‘Management’ Prentice Hall of India Pvt.

Ltd. New Delhi 110011, 1992 3. Joseph J, Massie, ‘Essentials of Management’ Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 1985

27

PTMF3307 CAM LABORATORY L T P C 0 0 4 2 AIM: To provide practical knowledge in the area of CNC machine tools, PLC and Robots. OBJECTIVE: At the end of the course the student should understand Concepts of CNC programming and Machining on CNC turning center and

Machining center Robot and PLC programming Methods CNC LATHE Programming, Simulation and Machining using the following features: Straight & step turning - taper turning - thread cutting - machining of internal surface. CNC MILLING Programming, Simulation and Machining using the following features: Linear, circular interpolation, pocket milling, slotting, peck drilling and other canned cycles Generation of CNC program using CAM packages Robot programming - Material handling applications PLC ladder logic programming

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS PTMF3302 METAL FORMING TECHNOLOGY LT P C 3 0 0 3 AIM: To impart knowledge in various metal forming process OBJECTIVES: At the end of this course the student should be able to understand The tools, equipment and principle of operation of primary and secondary

manufacturing processes. Defects, causes and their remedies of welding, casting and metal forming

operations. Processing of plastics and fabrication of various types composite material. Methods to solve problems on cutting forces, tool life and analytical methods of

estimating cutting temperature. UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO METAL FORMING 7 Classification of Forming Processes - Temperature in Metal working - Hot and Cold working - Introduction to the theory of Plastic Deformation. UNIT II THEORY AND PRACTICE OF BULK FORMING PROCESSES 15 Analysis of plastic deformation in Forging, Rolling, Extrusion and rod/wire drawing processes - Effect of friction, calculation of forces, work done - Process parameters, equipment used - Defects - applications - Recent advances in Forging, Rolling, Extrusion and drawing processes - Experimental techniques of evaluation of friction in

28

metal forming. UNIT III SHEET METAL FORMING 9 Conventional processes - H.E.R.F. techniques - Superplastic forming techniques -Principles and process parameters - Advantages, limitations and applications. UNIT IV SPECIAL FORMING PROCESSES 7 Orbital forging - Isothermal forging - Hot and cold Isostatic pressing - High speed extrusion - Rubber pad forming - Water hammer forming - Fine blanking. UNIT V POWDER METALLURGY FORMING 7 Overview of P/M technique - Advantages - applications - Powder preform forging -powder rolling - Tooling and process parameters.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK 1. George E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw Hill International Book Company,

1988. REFERENCES 1. Schuler - Metal forming hand book - Springer verlag publication, 1998. 2. Hosford, WF and CAD Dell, R.M. - Metal forming : Mechanics and Metallurgy,

Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1993. 3. Narayanasamy,R - Theory of Metal Forming Plasticity, Narosa Publishers, New

Delhi Nagpal,G.R - Metal Forming Processes, Khanna Publishers, 1988. 4. Chakrabarthy,J - Theory of Plasticity, McGraw Hill Co, 1987. 5. Altan T - Metal Forming - Fundamentals and applications - American Society of

Metals.

PTMF3401 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM: To develop the student efficient in optimizing using limited resources by knowledge in building different mathematical modeling and finding optimal solutions. OBJECTIVE: To provide knowledge and training in using optimization techniques under limited resources for the engineering and business problems. UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 15 The phase of an operation research study – Linear programming – Graphical method–Simplex algorithm – Duality formulation – Sensitivity analysis. UNIT II TRANSPORTATION MODELS AND NETWORK MODELS 8 Transportation Assignment Models –Traveling Salesman problem-Networks models –Shortest route – Minimal spanning tree – Maximum flow models –Project network – CPM and PERT networks – Critical path scheduling – Sequencing models. UNIT III INVENTORY MODELS 6 Inventory models – Economic order quantity models – Quantity discount models – Stochastic inventory models – Multi product models – Inventory control models in practice.

29

UNIT IV QUEUEING MODELS 6 Queueing models - Queueing systems and structures – Notation parameter – Single server and multi server models – Poisson input – Exponential service – Constant rate service – Infinite population – Simulation. UNIT V DECISION MODELS 10 Decision models – Game theory – Two person zero sum games – Graphical solution-Algebraic solution – Linear Programming solution – Replacement models – Models based on service life – Economic life – Single / Multi variable search technique –Dynamic Programming – Simple Problem.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. H.A. Taha, Operations Research, Prentice Hall of India, 2003, Sixth Edition. REFERENCES 1. Shennoy, Srivastava, Operation Research for Management, Wiley Eastern, 1994. 2. M.J.Bazara, Jarvis, H. Sherali, “Linear Programming and Network Flows”, John

Wiley, 1990. 3. Philip and Ravindran, “Operations Research”, John Wiley, 1992. 4. Hillier and Libeberman, “Operations Research”, Holden Day, 1986. 5. Frank,S. Budnick, Dennis, Mc Leavy, “Principles of Operations Research for

Management”, Richard D Irwin, 1990. 6. Tulsian and Vishal Pasdey – “Quantitative Techniques”, Pearson – Asia 2002. PTGE3403 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT LT P C 3 0 0 3

AIM: To provide comprehensive knowledge about the principles, practices, tools and techniques of Total quality management. OBJECTIVES: To under the various principles, practices of TQM to achieve quality To learn the various statistical approaches for quality control. To understand the TQM tools for continuous process improvement. To learn the importance of ISO and Quality systems. UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of manufacturing and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - Definition of TQM – TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby – Barriers to TQM. UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9 Leadership – Strategic quality planning, Quality statements - Customer focus – Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention - Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement – PDSA cycle, 5s, Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating. UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9 The seven traditional tools of quality – New management tools – Six-sigma: Concepts, methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT – Bench marking – Reason to bench mark, Bench marking process – FMEA – Stages, Types.

30

UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9 Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – Taguchi quality loss function – TPM – Concepts, improvement needs – Cost of Quality – Performance measures. UNIT V QUALITY SYSTEMS 9 Need for ISO 9000- ISO 9000-2000 Quality System – Elements, Documentation, Quality auditing- QS 9000 – ISO 14000 – Concepts, Requirements and Benefits – Case studies of TQM implementation in manufacturing and service sectors including IT.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK 1. Dale H.Besterfiled, et at., “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia,Third

Edition, Indian Reprint (2006). REFERENCES 1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, “The Management and Control of Quality”,

6th Edition, South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2005. 2. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, 3rd

Edition, 2003. 3. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India)

Pvt. Ltd.,2006. 4. Janakiraman,B and Gopal, R.K, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,

Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., (2006). PTMF3404 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To impart knowledge on group technology, simulation, computer control, automatic manufacturing systems and factory of the future. OBJECTIVES: At the end of this course the student should be able to understand Modern manufacturing systems To understand the concepts and applications of flexible manufacturing systems UNIT I PLANNING, SCHEDULING AND CONTROL OF FLEXIBLE

MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 9 Introduction to FMS– development of manufacturing systems – benefits – major elements – types of flexibility – FMS application and flexibility –single product, single batch, n – batch scheduling problem – knowledge based scheduling system. UNIT II COMPUTER CONTROL AND SOFTWARE FOR FLEXIBLE

MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 9 Introduction – composition of FMS– hierarchy of computer control –computer control of work center and assembly lines – FMS supervisory computer control – types of software specification and selection – trends. UNIT III FMS SIMULATION AND DATA BASE 9 Application of simulation–model of FMS–simulation software – limitation – manufacturing data systems–data flow–FMS database systems–planning for FMS database.

31

UNIT IV GROUP TECHNOLOGY AND JUSTIFICATION OF FMS 9 Introduction – matrix formulation – mathematical programming formulation –graph formulation – knowledge based system for group technology – economic justification of FMS- application of possibility distributions in FMS systems justification. UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF FMS AND FACTORY OF THE FUTURE 9 FMS application in machining, sheet metal fabrication, prismatic component production –aerospace application – FMS development towards factories of the future – artificial intelligence and expert systems in FMS – design philosophy and characteristics for future.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. Jha, N.K. “Handbook of flexible manufacturing systems”, Academic Press Inc.,1991.

REFERENCES 1. Radhakrishnan P. and Subramanyan S., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, Wiley Eastern Ltd.,New

Age International Ltd., 1994. 2. Raouf, A. and Ben-Daya, M., Editors, “Flexible manufacturing systems: recent

development”, Elsevier Science, 1995. 3. Groover M.P., “Automation, production systems and computer integrated

manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt., New Delhi, 1996. 4. Kalpakjian, “Manufacturing engineering and technology”, Addison-Wesley Publishing

Co., 1995. 5. Taiichi Ohno, “Toyota production system: beyond large-scale production”,

Productivity Press (India) Pvt. Ltd. 1992. PTME3402 MECHATRONICS LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM To understand the principles, techniques & components of Mechatronics system And its design OBJECTIVE This syllabus is formed to create knowledge in Mechatronic systems and impart the source of concepts and techniques, which have recently been applied in practical situation. It gives a framework of knowledge that allows engineers and technicians to develop an interdisciplinary understanding and integrated approach to engineering. UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5 Introduction to Mechatronics- Systems- Concepts of Mechatronics approach-Need for Mechatronics- Emerging area of Mechatronics- Classification of Mechatronics. UNIT II SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 12 Introduction – Performance Terminology- Potentiometers-LVDT-Capacitance sensors-Strain gauges- Eddy current sensor-Hall effect sensor- Temperature sensors- Light sensors- Selection of sensors- Signal processing UNIT III MOTION CONTROL AND MEASUREMENT SYSTEM 12 Control system- Open Loop and Feedback Control-Measurement system-Drives and actuators-Control devices- Servo systems- Motion converters.

32

UNIT IV PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 8 Introduction- Basic structure- Input and output processing- Programming- Mnemonics- Timers, counters and internal relays- Data handling-Selection of PLC. UNIT V DESIGN AND MECHATRONICS 8 Design process-stages of design process-Traditional and Mechatronics design concepts- Case studies of Mechatronics systems- Pick and place Robot- Autonomous mobile robot-Wireless suriviellance balloon- Engine Management system- Automatic car park barrier.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS 1. Bolton,W, “Mechatronics” , Pearson education, second edition, fifth Indian Reprint,

2003 2. Smaili.A and Mrad.F , "Mechatronics integrated technologies for intelligent

machines", Oxford university press, 2008 REFERENCES 1. Godfrey C. Onwubolu, "Mechatronics Principles and Applications", Elsevier, 2006 2. Devadas Shetty and Richard A.Kolk, “Mechatronics systems design”, PWS

Publishing company 2007. 3. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik, “Mechatronics Principles, Concepts and

Applicatlions” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing company Limited, 2003. 4. Michael B.Histand and Davis G.Alciatore,” Introduction to Mechatronics and

Measurement systems”. McGraw Hill International edition,1999. 5. Bradley D.A, Dawson.D, Buru N.C and Loader A.J, “Mechatronics” Chapman an

Hall, 1993. 6. Lawrence J.Kamm, “Understanding Electro-Mechanical Engineering – An

Introduction to Mechatronics”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2000. 7. Dan Necsulescu, “Mechatronics”, Pearson education,2002. 8. Newton C.Braga, “Mechatronics Sourcebook”, Thomson Delmar Learning, Eswar

Press, 2003. PTMF3313 COMPUTER INTEGRATED PRODUCTION L T P C

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 3 0 0 3 AIM: To enable the students to understand the importance of Computer Integrated Production Management System and related topics. OBJECTIVE: The course provides basic concepts of production planning and control, its bottlenecks, material requirement planning, shop floor control and different approaches to computer aided process planning in manufacturing sector. UNIT I PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL 10 Basic concepts – Types of production System - Functions of production planning and control – problems with Production Planning and Control – Computer Integrated Production Management System– Forecasting – Purpose and methods of forecasting –Single and Double Moving average methods – Single and Double exponential smoothing methods – Simple regression method of forecasting – errors in forecasting.

33

UNIT II MATERIAL REQUIREMENT PLANNING 10 Basic MRP Concepts – Inputs to the MRP System – Master production Schedule – Bill of Materials, Inventory Record File – MRP Logic – Gross requirements, net requirements, lot sizing - MRP reports – Capacity Planning – Benefits of MRP Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II). UNIT III SHOP FLOOR CONTROL 7 Functions of shop floor control – order scheduling – order progress – Data logging and acquisition – Automated data collection – Control types – Sensor Technology. UNIT IV COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS PLANNING 8 Need for process planning – Functions of process planning – Future trend of CAPP –Expert process planning system – case studies. UNIT V APPROACHES TO CAPP 10 Variant process planning – part family search – Generative method of CAPP – Forward and Backward planning – input format – part description methods – CAD Models –Decision Logic – Artificial Intelligence – Knowledge Representation – Databases and Algorithms – Automatic Process Planning – Programming Practice using C, C++ for Computer Integrated Production Management System Applications

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS 1. Mikell P.Groover, “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated

Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2004. 2. S.Kant Vajpayee, Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Prentice Hall of

India, 2006 REFERENCES 1. Mikell P.Groover M.P., Emory W. Zimmers, “CAD/CAM, Computer Aided Design and

Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, 2006. 2. Gideonha and Roland D.Well, “Principles of process planning”, Chapman and Hall,

1995. 3. T.C.Chand, “Expert process planning for manufacturing”, Addison Wesley publishing

company, 1990. PTMF3001 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: The course aims at providing the basic concepts of product design, product features and its architecture so that student can have a basic knowledge in the common features a product has and how to incorporate them suitably in product. OBJECTIVE: The student will be able to design some products for the given set of applications; also the knowledge gained through prototyping technology will help the student to make a prototype of a problem and hence product design and development can be achieved. UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5 Need for IPPD – Strategic importance of Product development – integration of customer, designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and customer – Behaviour analysis. Understanding customer – prompting customer understanding – involve customer in development and managing requirements – Organization – process management and improvement – Plan and establish product specifications.

34

UNIT II CONCEPT GNERATION AND SELECTION 5 Task – Structured approaches – clarification – search – externally and internally – explore systematically – reflect on the solutions and processes – concept selection –methodology – benefits. UNIT III PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE 10 Implications – Product change – variety – component standardization – product performance – manufacturability – product development management – establishing the architecture – creation – clustering – geometric layout development – fundamental and incidental interactions – related system level design issues – secondary systems – architecture of the chunks – creating detailed interface specifications. UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL DESIGN 10 Integrate process design – Managing costs – Robust design – Integrating CAE, CAD, CAM tools – Simulating product performance and manufacturing processes electronically – Need for industrial design – impact – design process – investigation of for industrial design – impact – design process – investigation of customer needs – conceptualization – refinement – management of the industrial design process –technology driven products – user – driven products – assessing the quality of industrial design. UNIT V DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 15 Definition – Estimation of Manufacturing cost – reducing the component costs and assembly costs – Minimize system complexity – Prototype basics – principles of prototyping – planning for prototypes – Economic Analysis – Understanding and representing tasks – baseline project planning – accelerating the project – project execution.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. Kari T.Ulrich and Steven D.Eppinger,”Product Design and Development”, McGrtaw-

Hill International Edns. 1999. REFERENCES 1. Kemnneth Crow,”Concurrent Engg./Integrated Product Development”, DRM

Associates, 26/3, Via Olivera, Palos Verdes, CA 90274(310) 377-569, Workshop Book.

2. Stephen Rosenthal, ”Effective Product Design and Development”, Business OneOrwin, Homewood, 1992, ISBN 1-55623-603-4.

1. Staurt Pugh, ”Tool Design –Integrated Methods for Successful Product Engineering”, Addison Wesley Publishing, New york, NY.

WEB REFERENCE BOOK 1.http://www.me.mit/.2.7444. PTMF3002 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To impart knowledge in various methods of Non Destructive Testing OBJECTIVES: On completion of this course, the students are expected to be conversant with Principles of various NDT techniques The equipment required for the NDT The mechanism involved in there NDT techniques

35

Applications of NDT and recent trends in NDT UNIT I LIQUID PENETRANT AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION 9 Liquid penetrant systems – processing cycles – inspection of surface defects –Generation of Magnetic fields – Magnetic particle inspection equipments –Demagnetization – Applications and limitations. UNIT II RADIOGRAPHY 11 Production of x-rays – Characteristic rays and white ray – Tube current and Voltage –Sources of 8 rays – Half life period – Penetrating power – Absorption of x and y rays –Radiation contrast and film contrast – exposure charts – pentameters and sensitivity –Safety. UNIT III EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION 7 Eddy current production – Impedance concepts – Inspection of magnetic materials –Inspection of non magnetic materials – influences of various parameters – Advantages and limitations. UNIT IV ULTRASONIC TESTING 10 Production of ultrasonic waves – Different types of waves – normal beam inspection –Angle beam inspection – thickness measurements – Applications. UNIT V RECENT TECHNIQUES 8 Non destructive inspection– Instrumentation for non destructive testing – Principles of holography- Principle of acoustic emission – Applications of holographic techniques–advantages and limitations – Other techniques.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. Barry Hull and Vernon John, “Non Destructive Testing”, MacMillan, 1988. REFERENCES 1. Americal Society of Metals, Metals Hand Book, 9th Edition, Volume 11 (1980) 2. Birchan, D, “Non Destructive Testing”, Oxford University Press, 1977. 3. Proceedings of the 10th International Acoustic Emission Symposium, Japanese

Society for Non Destructive Inspection, Sendai, 1990. 4. Holler, P., “New Procedures in Non Destructive Testing” Springer Verlag, 1983. PTMF3003 RAPID PROTOTYPING LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To provide knowledge on different types of Rapid Prototyping systems and its applications in various fields, OBJECTIVE: Generating a good understanding of RP history, its development and applications. To expose the students to different types of Rapid prototyping processes, materials used in RP systems and reverse engineering. UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8 History – Development of RP systems – Applications in Product Development, Reverse Engineering, Rapid Tooling, Rapid Manufacturing- Principle – Fundamental – File format – Other translators – medical applications of RP - On demand manufacturing – Direct material deposition - Shape Deposition Manufacturing.

36

UNIT II LIQUID BASED AND SOLID BASED RAPID PROTOTYPING SYSTEMS 10 Classification – Liquid based system - Stereolitho graphy Apparatus (SLA), details of SL process, products, Advantages, Limitations, Applications and Uses. Solid based system - Fused Deposition Modeling, principle, process, products, advantages, applications and uses - Laminated Object Manufacturing UNIT III POWDER BASED RAPID PROTOTYPING SYSTEMS 10 Selective Laser Sintering – principles of SLS process, principle of sinter bonding process, Laser sintering materials, products, advantages, limitations, applications and uses. Three Dimensional Printing – process, major applications, research and development. Direct shell production casting – key strengths, process, applications and uses, case studies, research and development. Laser Sintering System, e-manufacturing using Laser sintering, customized plastic parts, customized metal parts, e-manufacturing - Laser Engineered Net Shaping (LENS). UNIT IV MATERIALS FOR RAPID PROTOTYPING SYSTEMS 10 Nature of material – type of material – polymers, metals, ceramics and composites liquid based materials, photo polymer development – solid based materials, powder based materials - case study. UNIT V REVERSE ENGINEERING AND NEW TECHNOLOGIES 7 Introduction, measuring device- contact type and non-contact type, CAD model creation from point clouds-preprocessing, point clouds to surface model creation, medical data processing - types of medical imaging, software for making medical models, medical materials, other applications - Case study.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Rafiq I. Noorani, Rapid Prototyping – Principles and Applications, Wiley & Sons,

2006. 2. Chua C.K, Leong K.F and Lim C.S, Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications,

second edition, World Scientific, 2003. REFERENCES 1. N.HOPKINSON, R.J.M, HAUGE, P M, DICKENS, “Rapid Manufacturing – An

Industrial revolution for the digital age”, Wiley, 2006 2. IAN GIBSON, “Advanced Manufacturing Technology for Medical applications:

Reverse Engineering, Software conversion and Rapid Prototying”, Wiley, 2006 3. Paul F.Jacobs, Rapid Prototyping and Manufacturing, “Fundamentals of

Stereolithography”, McGraw Hill 1993. 4. D.t.Pham and S.S.Dimov, “Rapid Manufacturing”, Springer Verlog 2001. PTMF3004 COMPUTER SIMULATION LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To teach the various aspects of simulation and its applications OBJECTIVES: To understand the importance and advantages of applying simulation techniques for

solving various problems on discrete event systems. To teach various random number generation techniques, its use in simulation, tests

and validity of random numbers etc. Development of simulation models, verification, validation and analysis. Introduction to various simulation languages and comparison

37

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 5 Concept of simulation – simulation as a decision making tool-Monte Carlo simulation. UNIT II RANDOM NUMBERS/VARIATES 9 Pseudo random numbers – methods of generating random variates – random variates for uniform, normal, binominal, passion, exponential distributions. UNIT III DESIGN OF SIMULATION EXPERIMENTS 15 Problem formulation – data collection and reduction – logic developments – initial conditions – run length, tabular method of simulation – development of models using higher level languages for systems like queuing, production, inventory and maintenance – output analysis and interpretation, validation. UNIT IV DISCRETE SYSTEM SIMULATION LANGUAGES 8 Need for simulation language – Comparison of simulation languages: SIMCRIPT, GASP, SIMULA, GPSS, PROMODEL, etc… UNIT V CASE STUDIES USING SIMULATION LANGUAGES 8 Development of simulation models using the simulation language studies for systems for systems like, queuing systems, production systems, inventory systems, maintenance and replacement systems, investment analysis and network.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. Jerry Banks and John S.Carson, Barry L Nelson, David M.Nicol, P.Shahabudeen

“Discrete event system simulation”’ Pearson, 2007. REFERENCES 1. Thomas J.Schriber, “Simulation using GPSS”, John Wiley, 2002. 2. Law A.M. and Kelton W.D “Simulation Modeling and Analysis, McGraw Hill, 2003 WEB REFERENCE BOOK 1. http:www.bcnn.net

PTMF3005 QUALITY CONTROL AND RELIABILITY ENGINEERING LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To impart knowledge about Quality, controlling methods and reliability OBJECTIVES: Teach the essentiality of SQC, sampling and reliability engineering. Study on various

types of control charts, six sigma and process capability to help the students understand various quality control techniques.

Reliability engineering focuses on the dependability, failure mode analysis, reliability prediction and management of a system.

UNIT I STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 9 Methods and Philosophy of Statistical Process Control - Control Charts for Variables and Attributes -Cumulative sum and Exponentially weighted moving average control charts -Other SPC Techniques – Process - Capability Analysis - Six sigma concept. UNIT II ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING 9 Acceptance Sampling Problem - Single sampling plans for attributes – double sampling - multiple sampling - sequential sampling - Military standards - The Dodge Roming sampling plans – Random sampling.

38

UNIT III RELIABILITY ENGINEERING 9 Definition of reliability – Performance and reliability - Reliability requirements – System life cycle – Mean time between failures – Mean time to failure - Mortality Curve - Availability – Maintainability. UNIT IV FAILURE DATA ANALYSIS 9 Statistical failures of components – failute distributions – Bath tub curve – Negative exponential distribution – Normal distribution - log normal distribution – Gamma distribution - Weibull distribution Life distribution measurements – Accelerated life tests -Data requirements for reliability. UNIT V RELIABILITY PREDICTION AND MANAGEMENT 9 Failure rate estimates - Effect of environment and stress - Series and Parallel systems -RDB analysis – Standby Systems - Complex Systems - Reliability demonstration testing - Reliability growth testing - Duane curve - Risk assessment – FMEA and Fault tree analysis.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Khanna, O.P., Statistical Quality Control, Dhanpat Rai Publications (P) Ltd., 2001. 2. Lewis, E.E., Introduction to Reliability Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, 1987. REFERENCES 1. Mohamed Zairi, “Total Quality Management for Engineers ", Woodhead Publishing

Limited 1991. 2. Harvid Noori and Russel, " Production and Operations Management - Total Quality

and Responsiveness ", McGraw-Hill Inc, 1995. 3. Douglus C. Montgomery, " Introduction to Statistical Quality Control ", 2nd Edition,

John Wiley and Sons, 1991. 4. Klaasssen , H.B. and Van Peppen, J.C.L., System reliability concepts and

applications, Edward Arnold, 1989. PTMF3006 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To impart knowledge in process planning, cost estimation and budgeting OBJECTIVES: At the end of this course the student should be able to understand Traditional process planning and need methods of computer aided process planning Importance and procedure of costing Elements of costing Budgeting and decision making Cost estimation of various manufacturing methods UNIT I PROCESS PLANNING 10 Introduction – Types of production importance of process planning – steps involved in manual experienced Process Planning –need for CAPP – Variant and Generative approaches of CAPP- Future trend of CAPP. UNIT II ESTIMATION AND COSTING 7 Estimating – Importance, aims, function of estimating – Constituents of estimation –Estimating procedure – sources of errors – costing – Aims of costing – costing

39

procedure – methods of costing – classification of costs – Advantages of efficient costing – Difference between estimating and costing. UNIT III ELEMENTS OF COSTS 8 Price determination – Elements of costs – Ladder of cost – Material cost Determination of direct material cost – Labour cost – Determination of direct labour cost- over heads – classification of overhead expenses – Depreciation- Methods of depreciation – Allocation of overhead expenses . UNIT IV COST ECONOMICS 8 Budget – Essentials of budgeting – Types of Budgets – Budgetary control – Objectives –Benefits – Measures of cost economics – Make or buy decision and Analysis UNIT V PRODUCT COST ESTIMATION 12 Estimation of Material cost – Estimation of machine shop – Lathe operations – Milling operations – Grinding operations – Planning & shaping operations. Estimation in welding shop – Arc welding – Gas Welding –Flame cutting- Estimation of metal forming – Forging –Forging losses - Estimation in Foundry shop – Moulding – pattern making.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. G.B.S.Narang and V.Kumar, “Production and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, New

Delhi 1995. 2. T.R.Banga and S.C.Sharma, “Estimating and Costing”, Khanna Publishers, New

Delhi 1986. REFERENCES 1. M.Adithan and B.S.Pabla, “Estimating and Costing”, Konark Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,

1989. 2. A.K.Chitale and R.C.Gupta, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall Pvt.

Ltd., 2005. 3. Nanua Singh, “System approach to Computer Integrated Design and Manufacturing”,

John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1996. 4. Joseph G.Monks, “Operations Management, Theory & Problems”, McGraw Hill Book

Company, 1982. PTMF3007 PROCESSING OF PLASTICS AND COMPOSITE MATERIALS LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To provide sound knowledge in plastics, composites and their processing OBJECTIVES: To impart sound knowledge in Types of plastics, their structure, properties and applications Processing, machinery and joining of plastics Processing of Polymer Matrix and Metal Matrix Composites and their applications. UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 7 Chemistry and Classification of Polymers – Properties of Thermo Plastics – Properties of Thermosetting Plastics – Applications – Merits and Disadvantages. Fibres – Glass, Boron, Carbon, Organic, Ceramic and Metallic Fibers – Matrix Materials – Polymers, Metals and Ceramics

40

UNIT II PROCESSING OF PLASTICS 9 Extrusion – Injection Moulding – Blow Moulding – Compression and Transfer Moulding –Casting – Thermo Forming. UNIT III MACHINING AND JOINING OF PLASTICS 7 General Machining properties of plastics – Machining Parameters and their effect –Joining of Plastics – Mechanical Fasteners – Thermal bonding – Press Fitting. UNIT IV PROCESSING OF POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES 13 Open Mould Processes, Bag Moulding, Compression Moulding with BMC and SMC –Filament winding – Pultrusion – Centrifugal Casting – Injection Moulding – Application of PMC’s. UNIT V PROCESSING OF METAL MATRIX COMPOSITES 9 Solid State Fabrication Techniques – Diffusion Bonding – Powder Metallurgy Techniques – Plasma Spray, Chemical and Physical Vapour Deposition of Matrix on Fibres – Liquid State Fabrication Methods – Infiltration – Squeeze Casting – Rheo Casting – Compo casting – Application of MMCS.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Akira Kobyashi, “Machining of Plastics”, McGraw Hill 2. Harold Belofsky, Plastics : “Product Design and Process Engineering, Hanser

Publishers, 1995. REFERENCES 1. Bera, E and Moet, A, “High Performance Polymers”, Hanser Publishers, 1991. 2. Hensen, F, “Plastics Extrusion Technology”, Hanser Publishers, 1988. 3. Johannaber F, “Injection Moulding Machines”, Hanser Publishers, 1983. 4. Rauwendaal, C, “Polymer Extrusion”, Hanser Publishers, 1990. 5. Rosatao, D.V., “Blow Moulding Handbook, Hanser publisher, 1989 6. Seamour, E.B., “Modern Plastics Moulding”, John Wiley. 7. John Dalmonte, “Plastics Moulding”, John Wiley 8. Kishan K.Chawla, “Composite Materials Science and Engineering”, Springer Verlag,

1987. 9. Agarwal, D. and Broutman L.J., “Analysis and Performance of Fiber Composites”,

Wiley, 1990. 10. Mallick, P.K. and Newman, S. “Composite Materials Techno logy”, Hanser

Publishers, 1990. WEB REFERENCE BOOK 1. www.innotech.ch/unsere-leistungen/gruppen/mec/Fvwo2 e.htm.

41

PTMF3008 NUCLEAR ENGINEERING LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To impart knowledge in nuclear physics and nuclear reactions OBJECTIVE: To impart knowledge in the nuclear physics, materials and manufacturing methods of nuclear reactors and its safety aspects. UNIT I NUCLEAR PHYSICS 7 Nuclear model of the atom – Equivalence of mass and energy – Binding – Radio activity – Half Life – Neutron interactions – Cross sections. UNIT II NUCLEAR REACTIONS AND REACTOR MATERIALS 7 Mechanism of fission and fusion – radio activity – Chain Reactions – Critical mass and composition – Nuclear fuel cycles and its characteristics – Uranium production and purification Zirconium, thorium, beryllium. UNIT III REPROCESSING 12 Nuclear fuel cycles – spent fuel characteristics – Role of solvent Extraction in reprocessing – Solvent extraction equipment. UNIT IV NUCLEAR REACTIONS 9 Reactors – types of fast breeding reactors – Design and Construction of fast breeding reactors – heat transfer techniques in nuclear reactors – reactor shielding, Fusion reactors. UNIT V SAFETY, DISPOSAL AND PROFILERATION 10 Nuclear plant safety – Safety systems – Changes and consequences of an accident –Criteria for safety – Nuclear waste - Type of waste and its disposal – Radiation hazards and their prevention – Weapons proliferation.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Thomas, J.Cannol Y, “Fundamentals of Nuclear Engineering”, John Wiley, 1978. 2. S.Glassstone and A.Sesonske, “Nuclear Reactor Engineering”, Princeton, Van

Nostrand, 1963. REFERENCES 1. A.G.Bellamy and N.A.Hill, “Extraction and Metallurgy of Uranium”, Thorium and

beryllium, International series of monographs on nuclear energy, London, Pergamon Press, 1963.

2. C.B.Amphlett,”Treatment and Disposal of Radioactive waster”, International series of monographs on nuclear energy, London, Pergamon Press, 1961.

3. A.S.Coffinberry and W.N.Miner,”The Metal Plutonium”, University of Chicago Press, 1961.

4. B.Prakash, S.R.Kantan and N.K.Rao, “Metallurgy of Thorium Production”, Vienna International Atomic Energy Agency, Monograph No.22, 1962.

42

PTMF3009 TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To teach various methods of maintenance and planning methods OBJECTIVES: At the end of this course the student should be able to understand To understand maintenance concepts To understand the modern practices in maintenance UNIT I MAINTENANCE CONCEPTS 9 Objectives and functions – Tero technology – Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM) –maintainability prediction – availability and system effectiveness- maintenance costs –maintenance organization UNIT II MAINTENANCE MODELS 9 Minimal repair – maintenance types – balancing PM and breakdown maintenance- PM schedules: deviations on both sides of target values – PM schedules: functional characteristics – replacement models UNIT III TOTAL PRODUCTIVE MAINTENANCE 9 Zero breakdowns – Zero Defects and TPM – maximizing equipment effectiveness –autonomous maintenance program – five pillars of TPM – TPM small group activities –TPM organization – management decision – educational campaign – creation of organizations – establishment of basic policies and goals – formation of master plan. -TPM implementation UNIT IV MAINTENANCE LOGISTICS 9 Human factors in maintenance – maintenance manuals – maintenance staffing methods – queuing applications – simulation – spare parts management – maintenance planning and scheduling UNIT V ONLINE MONITORING 9 Condition Monitoring Techniques– Vibration Monitoring, Signature Analysis – Wear Debris Monitoring – Maintenance Management Information System - Expert systems –Corrosion Monitoring and Control

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Seiichi Nakajima, Introduction to TPM, Productivity Press, Chennai, 1992. 2. Gopalakrishnan, P. and Banerji, A.K., Maintenance and Spare Parts Management, 3. Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1991. REFERENCES 1. Goto, F., “Equipment planning for TPM Maintenance Prevention Design”,Productivity

Press, 1992. 2. Shirose, K., “Total Productive Maintenance for Workshop Leaders”, Productivity

Press, 1992. 3. Shirose, K., “TPM for Operators”, Productivity Press, 1996. 4. Suzuki, T., “New Directions for TPM”, Productivity Press, 1993. 5. Kelly, A.., “Maintenance Planning and Control”, Butterworth, London, 1991.

43

PTMF3010 MICRO MACHINING PROCESSES LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: The purpose of this subject is understand the principles of various micro fabrication processes. OBJECTIVES: Upon completion of this subject, student will be able to: Understand principle of microsystems and feed back systems Know the different methods of microfabrication. Understand the properties and microstructure of materials Appreciate Integration processes in detail Enhance his knowledge in semiconductor manufacturing processes. UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8 Introduction to Micro System design, Material properties, micro fabrication technologies. Structural behavior, sensing methods, micro scale transport - feed back systems. UNIT II MICROMECHANICS 9 Microstructure of materials, its connection to molecular structure and its consequences on macroscopic properties – Phase transformations in crystalline solids including martensite, ferroelectric, and diffusional phase transformations, twinning and domain patterns, smart materials UNIT III BASIC MICRO-FABRICATION 10 Bulk Processes – Surface Processes – Sacrificial Processes and Bonding Processes– Special machining: Laser beam micro machining – Electrical Discharge Machining – Ultrasonic Machining – Electro chemical Machining. Electron beam machining. UNIT IV MECHANICAL MICROMACHINING 10 Theory of micromachining – Chip formation – Size effect in micromachining –microturning, micromilling, microdrilling - Micromachining tool design – Precision Grinding – Partial ductile mode grinding – Ultraprecision grinding – Binderless wheel –Free form optics. UNIT V SEMI CONDUCTORS MANUFACTURING 8 Basic requirements - clean room – yield model – Wafer IC manufacturing – feature micro fabrication technologies – PSM – IC industry – New Materials – Bonding and layer transfer – devices – micro fabrication industries.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. Sami Franssila, “Introduction to Micro Fabrication”, John Wiley and sons Ltd., UK,

2004, ISBN: 978-0-470-85106-7 REFERENCES 1. Madore J, “Fundamental of Micro Fabrication”, CRC Press, 2002 2. Mark J. Jackson, “Microfabrication and Nanomanufacturing”, CRC Press, 2006 3. Peter Van Zant, “Microchip fabrication”, McGraw Hill, 2004 4. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, “The MEMS Handbook”, CRC Press, 2006

44

PTMF3011 ROBOTICS LT P C 3 0 0 3

AIM: To provide in-depth knowledge in various elements of Industrial Robotics OBJECTIVE: The objective of this course in to impart knowledge in the fundamentals of Industrial Robotics, viz. Robot Anatomy, Drives, Sensors, end effectors, Robot kinematics and programming UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF ROBOT 8 Robot – Definition – Robot Anatomy – Co ordinate Systems, Work Envelope Types and classification – Specifications – pitch, Yaw, Roll, Joint Notations, Speed of Motion, Pay Load – Robot Parts and their Functions – Need for Robots – Different Applications. UNIT II ROBOT DRIVE SYSTEMS AND END EFFECTORS 9 Pneumatic Drives – Hydraulic Drives – Mechanical Drives – Electrical Drives – D.C. Servo Motors, Stepper Motor, A.C. Servo Motors – Salient Features, Applications and Comparison of all these Drives. End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical Grippers, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Grippers, Magnetic Grippers, Vacuum Grippers; Two Fingered and Three Fingered Grippers; Internal Grippers and External Grippers; Selection and Design Considerations. UNIT III SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 10 Requirements of a sensor, Principles and Applications of the following types of Sensors – Types of sensors – contact and non contact sensors. UNIT IV ROBOT KINEMATICS AND ROBOT PROGRAMMING 9 Homogeneous Transformation equation – DH representation - Forward kinematics, Inverse Kinematics and Differences; Forward Kinematics and Reverse Kinematics of manipulators with Three Degrees of Freedom, Six Degrees of freedom – Deviations and problems. Lead Through Programming, Robot Programming Languages – VAL programming – Motion Commands, Sensor Commands, End Effecter commands and simple programs. UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION AND ROBOT ECONOMICS 9 Advanced Robotics – Micro and Bio robotics - Implementation of Robots in Industries – Various Steps; Safety considerations for Robot Operations; Economic Analysis of Robots – Pay back method, Euac Method, Rate of Return Method.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. M.P.Groover, “Industrial Robotics – Technology, Programming and Applications”,

McGraw Hill, 2001. REFERENCES 1. Fu, K.S.Gonzaiz R.C., and Lee C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and

Intelligence”, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1987. 2. Yoram Koren, “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1992. 3. Janakiraman, P.A., “Robotics and Image Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1995. 4. Surendar Kumar, “Industrial Robots and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Oxford

and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1991. 5. S.R.Deb”Robotics Technology oand Flexible Automation” Tata McGraw Hill Book

Co., 1994.

45

PTMF3012 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To give the basic principles, structure and application of different types of logical systems, softwares and knowledge representations. OBJECTIVE: The objective of this course is to familiarize the students in the basic principles of Artificial Intelligence and important topics such as Heuristics, game playing, knowledge representation UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10 Definition – Pattern recognition – Criteria of Success – Production Systems – Control Strategies – Heuristic search – Problem Characteristics – Production System Characteristics – Forward and backward reasoning – Matching indexing – Heuristic Functions – Search – Search Algorithms. UNIT II GAME PLAYING 8 Overview – Minimax search procedure – Adding Alpha – Beta cutoffs – Waiting for Quiescence – Secondary search UNIT III KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION 10 Use of Predicate logic – Introduction to representation – representing – simple facts in logic – augmenting the representation – resolution – Conversion to clause from – The basis of resolution – Unification of algorithm – Question answering – Natural Deduction. UNIT IV KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTAION USING OTHER LOGIC 8 Non-monotonic reasoning – Statistical and Probabilistic reasoning – Techniques for dealing with a random world and deterministic world – rule based system. UNIT V STRUCTURAL REPRESENTATIONS OF KNOWLEDGE 9 Common knowledge structures – Level of representation – Right structure – Declarative representations – Semantic nets – Conceptual dependency – Frames – Scripts –Procedural representation – Natural language understanding – Perception – learning –Implementation A.I. Systems.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. Peter Norvig, Stuart Russell,” Artificial Intelligence, A modern approach”, Prentice

Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,2006 REFERENCES 1. M.W. Richaugh, “Artificial Intelligence, A Knowledge Based Approach”, PWS Rent

Publishing, Boston. 2. Charniac, E. and M.C.Dermott, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence”, Pearsion

Education,2002

46

PTMF3013 MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS AND NOISE LT P C 3 0 0 3

AIM: To impart fundamental knowledge in the area of mechanical vibration and noise. To train the students to analyze and find solution for practical industrial vibration and noise problem and its control. OBJECTIVES: To understand the fundamental knowledge on vibrating systems. To understand how to model the physical vibrating systems mathematically and the

basic behavior of vibration measuring instruments and their industrial applications. To understand the fundamental of noise and its control. UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8 Relevance and need for vibration analysis – Mathematical modeling of Vibrating Systems – Discrete and Continuous systems - Review of Single degree of freedom Systems – Free and Forced Vibrations- Various Damping Models. UNIT II TWO DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 8 Free and forced vibrations of damped and undamped systems – Equations of motion Coordinate Coupling and Principal Coordinates – Dynamic Vibration Absorbers –Orthogonality principle, Technical Applications. UNIT III MULTI DEGREE OF FREEDOM SYSTEMS 10 Equations of motion – Method of influence coefficients – Free vibration of undamped system – Natural frequencies and mode shapes, solutions by matrix method and influence coefficients. Mode shape Orthogonality – Free vibration of damped system –Rayleigh – damping, General viscous damping – Forced Vibrations of Multi degree of freedom system – Harmonic excitations. UNIT IV VIBRATION MEASUREMENT 10 Vibration Monitoring – Data Acquisition – Vibration Parameter Selection – Vibration Sensors – Accelerometers – Performance Characteristics – Sensor Location Signal Preamplifications- Types of Preamplifiers – Instrumentation – Tape Recorders- Real Time Analysis – Digital Fourier Transforms – FFT Analysis – Vibration Meters- Vibration Signatures – Standards – Vibration Testing Equipment. UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF NOISE 9 Sources of noise –noise terminology and concepts.- noise measurements – Systematic approach to diagnosing and correcting noise-Managing - Noise and Vibration at Work-Noise control methods

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. J.S. Rao and K.Gupta, Introductory Course on Theory and Practice of Mechanical

Vibrations, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1991. 2. Industrial Noise Control: Fundamentals and Applications, By Lewis H. Bell, Published

CRC Press, ISBN 0824790286,1994 REFERENCES 1. P.Srinivasan, Mechanical Vibration Analysis, Tata-Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 1982 2. G.K.Grover, Mechanical Vibrations, New Chand and Bros., Roorkee, 1989. 3. Seto, Mechanical Vibrations, Schaum Series, McGraw Hill Book Co., 4. Rao V.Dukkipatti and J.Srinivas, Text book of mechanical Vibrations, Prentice Hall of

India, New Delhi, 2004.

47

PTMF3014 VALUE ENGINEERING AND REENGINEERING LT P C 3 0 0 3

AIM: To teach the concepts of value engineering as applied in industries OBJECTIVE: To understand and analyse the theory and methodology of Value Engineering with

the Guidelines, Performa and Checklist for a systematic, step by step application of the technique to the current industrial problems.

To provide the knowledge about Reengineering Principles, the various models and implementation method, which are adopted in the industries.

UNIT I FUNDMENTALS OF VALUE ENGINEERING 8 Value Types – How to add value job plan – Technique employed – who will do value engineering – Organizing the value engineering study – Benefits. UNIT II STEP BY STEP APPLICATION OF JOB PLAN 10 Selection of project and team members – general phase – information phase – function phase – creative phase – evaluation phase – Investigation phase – implementation phase – Audit. UNIT III WORK SHEETS AND GUIDE LINES 9 Preparation of worksheets – general and information phase – Function Classification, relationship and summary – Meaningful costs – Cost analysis – idea listing and comparison – Feasibility ranking – Investigator phase, study summary – guidelines for writing value engineering proposal – Financial aspects – List cycle cost analysis – Oral presentation – Audit – Case studies and Discussion. UNIT IV REENGINEERING PRINCIPLES 10 The 6R’s of organizational transformation and reengineering – process reengineering –preparing the workforce – Methodology – PMI leadership expectation – Production and service improvement model – Process improvement. UNIT V IMPLEMENTATION OF REENGINEERING 8 Process analysis techniques – Work flow analysis – Value analysis approach – Nominal group technique – Fish bone diagram – Pareto analysis – team building – Force field analysis – Implementation.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. S.S.Iyer, “Value Engineering”, New Age Information, 1996. 2. Del L.Younker, “Value Engineering” Marcel Dekker, Inc. 2003 3. M.S.Jayaraman and Ganesh Natarajan,”Business Process Reengineering”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 1994. REFERENCE 1. Dr.Johnson, A.Edosomwan, “Organization Transformation and Process

reengineering”, British Library Cataloguing in Publication data, 1996.

48

PTMF3015 ELECTRONICS MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To import knowledge on electronics manufacturing and packaging technology. OBJECTIVES: Upon the completion of the subject, student will be able to: Understand wafer preparation and PCB fabrication Know the types of Mounting Technologies and components for electronics

assembly Appreciate SMT process in detail. Know various Defects, Inspection Equipments SMT assembly process. Learn repair, rework and quality aspects of Electronics assemblies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONICS MANUFACTURING 8 History, definition, wafer preparation by growing, machining, and polishing, diffusion, microlithography, etching and cleaning, Printed circuit boards, types- single sided, double sided, multi layer and flexible printed circuit board, design, materials, manufacturing, inspection. UNIT II COMPONENTS AND PACKAGING 8 Introduction to packaging, types-Through hole technology(THT) and Surface mount technology(SMT), Through hole components – axial, radial, multi leaded, odd form. Surface-mount components- active, passive. Interconnections - chip to lead interconnection, die bonding, wire bonding, TAB, flip chip, chip on board, multi chip module, direct chip array module, leaded, leadless, area array and embedded packaging, miniaturization and trends. UNIT III SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY PROCESS 12 Introduction to the SMT Process, SMT equipment and material handling systems, handling of components and assemblies - moisture sensitivity and ESD, safety and precautions needed, IPC and other standards, stencil printing process - solder paste material, storage and handling, stencils and squeegees, process parameters, quality control. Component placement- equipment type, flexibility, accuracy of placement, throughput, packaging of components for automated assembly, Cp and Cpk and process control. soldering- reflow process, process parameters, profile generation and control, solder joint metallurgy, adhesive, underfill and encapsulation process - applications, materials, storage and handling, process and parameters. UNIT IV INSPECTION AND TESTING 9 Inspection techniques, equipment and principle - AOI, X-ray. Defects and Corrective action - stencil printing process, component placement process, reflow soldering process, underfill and encapsulation process, electrical testing of PCB assemblies- In circuit test, functional testing, fixtures and jigs. UNIT V REPAIR, REWORK, QUALITY AND RELIABILITY OF ELECTRONICS

ASSEMBLIES 7 Repair tools, methods, rework criteria and process, thermo-mechanical effects and thermal management, Reliability fundamentals, reliability testing, failure analysis, design for manufacturability, assembly, reworkability, testing, reliability, and environment.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Surface Mount Technology –Principles and practice by Ray Prasad – second edition

, Chapman and Hall ,1997 ,New York , ISBN 0-41-12921-3 2. Fundamentals of microsystem packaging by Rao.R .Tummala, Mc -Graw Hill 2001 ,

ISBN 00-71-37169-9

49

REFERENCES 1. Failure Modes and Mechanisms in Electronic Packages, Puligandla Viswanadham

and Pratap Singh, Chapman and Hall, New York , N.Y. ISBN 0-412-105591-8. 2. Area Array Interconnection Handbook, Paul Totta and Karl Puttlitz, and Kathleen

Stalter , Kluwer Academic Publishers, Norwell, MA, USA, 2001.ISBN 0-7923-7919-5. 3. Reflow Soldering Process and Trouble Shooting SMT,BGA,CSP and Flip Chip

Technologies by Ning-Cheng Lee,Elsevier Science, ISBN 0-7506-7218-8. 4. Surface Mount Technology Terms and Concepts by Zarrow , Phil, Elsevier Science

and Technology,1997.ISBN 0750698756 5. Electronic Packaging and Interconnection Handbook, by C.A.Harper, Second

Edition, McGraw Hill Inc., New York, N.Y.,1997,ISBN 0-07-026694-8 6. www.ipc.org 7. www.smta.org PTML3016 POWDER METALLURGY LT P C

3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVES: This course teaches powder preparation, characterization, compaction and sintering. This knowledge is essential to understand powder metallurgy applications in

aerospace, automobile and machining materials. UNIT I CHARACTERISTICS AND TESTING OF METAL POWDERS 10 Sampling, chemical composition purity, surface contamination etc. Particle size. and its measurement, Principle and procedure of sieve analysis, microscopic analysis: sedimentation, elutriation, permeability. adsorption methods and resistivity methods: particle shape, classifications, microstructure. specific surface area. apparent and tap density. green density. green strength, sintered compact density, porosity, shrinkage. UNIT II POWDER MANUFACTURE AND CONDITIONING 10 Mechanical methods Machine milling, ball milling, atomization, shotting. Chemical methods, condensation, thermal decomposition, carbonyl. reduction by gas-hydride, dehydride process, electro deposition, precipitation from aqueous solution and fused salts, hydrometallurgical method. Physical methods: Electrolysis and atomization processes, types of equipment, factors affecting these processes, examples of powders produced by these methods, applications, powder conditioning, heat treatment, blending and mixing, types of equipment, types of mixing and blending UNIT III POWDER COMPACTION 7 Pressureless compaction: slip casting and slurry casting. Pressure compaction lubrication, single ended and double ended compaction, isostatic pressing, powder rolling, forging and extrusion, explosive compaction. UNIT IV SINTERING 8 Stage of sintering, property changes, mechanisms of sintering, liquid phase sintering and infiltration, activated sintering, hot pressing and Hot Isostatic Pressing HIP, vacuum sintering, sintering furnaces and sintering atmosphere, finishing operations – sizing, coining, repressing and heat treatment. UNIT V APPLICATIONS 10 Major applications in aerospace. nuclear and automobile industries. Bearing Materials types, self lubrication and other types, methods of production, properties, applications. Sintered Friction Materials-clutches, brake linings, Tool Materials- cemented carbides, oxide ceramics, Cermets- Dispersion strengthened materials.

50

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Sinha A. K., “Powder Metallurgy”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons. New Delhi, 1982. 2. Ramakrishnan, P.,“ Powder Metallurgy”,New Age International Publishers, 1st edition,

2007 REFERENCES 1. ASM Handbook. Vol. 7, “Powder Metallurgy”, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 1990. 2. Animesh Bose., “Advances in Particulate Materials”, Butterworth - Heinemann. New

Delhi, 1995. 3. Kempton. H Roll., “Powder Metallurgy”, Metallurgical Society of AMlE, 1988. 4. Ramakrishnan. P., “Powder Metallurgy Opportunities for Engineering Industries”,

Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 1987. 5. Erhard Klar., “Powder Metallurgy Applications, Advantages and Limitations”,

American Society for Metals, Ohio, 1983. 6. Sands. R. L. and Shakespeare. C. R. “Powder Metallurgy”, George Newes Ltd.

London, 1966 PTIE3017 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT LT P C

3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVE: To cover the basics of supply chain concepts, associated networks, tools and techniques required for evaluating various supply chain processes . UNIT I STRATEGIC FRAMEWORK 5 Objective, decision phases, process views, examples, strategic fit, supply chain drivers and metrics UNIT II SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORKS 10 Distribution networks, Facility networks and design options, Factors influencing, Models for facility location and capacity allocation, Transportation networks and design options, Evaluating network design decisions UNIT III MANAGING DEMAND AND SUPPLY IN A SUPPLY CHAIN 10 Predictable variability in a supply chain, Economies of scale and uncertainty in a supply chain – Cycle and safety Inventory, Optimum level of product availability, Forward Buying, Multi-echelon cycle inventory UNIT IV SOURCING AND PRICING IN A SUPPLY CHAIN 10 Cross-Functional drivers, Role of sourcing in a supply chain, Logistics providers, Procurement process, Supplier selection, Design collaboration, Role of Pricing and Revenue Management in a supply chain UNIT V INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND COORDINATION IN A

SUPPLY CHAIN 10 The role of IT in supply chain, The supply chain IT frame work, Customer Relationship Management, Supplier relationship management, Future of IT in supply chain, EBusiness in supply chain, Bullwhip effect – Effect of lack of co-ordination in supply chain, Building strategic partnerships, CPFR

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

51

TEXT BOOK 1. Sunil Chopra and Peter meindl, “Supply Chain Management , Strategy, Planning,

and operation”, PHI, Third edition,2007 REFERENCES 1. Jeremy F.Shapiro, “Modeling the supply chain”, Thomson Duxbury ,2002 2. James B.Ayers, “Handbook of Supply chain management”, St.Lucle press, 2000. PTME3018 NEW AND RENEWABLE SOURCES OF ENERGY LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To instruct the importance of renewable energy and its utilization for the thermal and electrical energy needs and also the environmental aspects of theses resources. OBJECTIVE: At the end of the course, the student expected to understand and analyze the pattern of renewable energy resources Suggest methodologies / technologies for its utilization. Economics of the utilization and environmental merits UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY 9 Solar Radiation – Measurements of solar Radiation and sunshine – Solar Thermal Collectors – Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors – Solar Applications – fundamentals of photo Voltaic Conversion – solar Cells – PV Systems – PV Applications. UNIT II WIND ENERGY 9 Wind Data and Energy Estimation – wind Energy Conversion Systems – Wind Energy generators and its performance – Wind Energy Storage – Applications – Hybrid systems. UNIT III BIO - ENERGY 9 Biomass, Biogas, Source, Composition, Technology for utilization – Biomass direct combustion – Biomass gasifier – Biogas plant – Digesters – Ethanol production – Bio diesel production and economics. UNIT IV OTEC, TIDAL, GEOTHERMAL AND HYDEL ENERGY 9 Tidal energy – Wave energy – Data, Technology options – Open and closed OTEC Cycles – Small hydro, turbines – Geothermal energy sources, power plant and environmental issues. UNIT V NEW ENERGY SOURCES 9 Hydrogen, generation, storage, transport and utilisation, Applications: power generation, transport – Fuel cells – technologies, types – economics and the power generation

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. G.D. Rai, Non Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1999. 2. S.P. Sukhatme, Solar Energy, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New

Delhi, 1997. REFERENCES 1. Godfrey Boyle, Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future, Oxford

University Press, U.K., 1996. 2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., Renewable Energy Sources, EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 1986.

52

3. G.N. Tiwari, solar Energy – Fundamentals Design, Modelling and applications, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.

4. L.L. Freris, Wind Energy Conversion systems, Prentice Hall, UK, 1990. PTME3019 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To give exposure to interrelation between design and manufacture. OBJECTIVES: To understand the principles of design such the manufacturing of the product is

possible. Various design aspects to be considered for manufacturing the products using

different processes. UNIT I DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING APPROACH AND PROCESS 9 Methodologies and tools, design axioms, design for assembly and evaluation, minimum part assessment. Taguchi method, robustness assessment, manufacturing process rules, designer's tool kit, Computer Aided group Technology, failure mode effective analysis, Value Analysis. Design for minimum number of parts, development of modular design, minimizing part variations, design of parts to be multi-functional, multi-use, ease of fabrication, Poka Yoke principles. UNIT II GEOMETRIC ANALYSIS 9 Surface finish, review of relationship between attainable tolerance grades and difference machining processes. Analysis of tapers, screw threads, applying probability to tolerances. UNIT III FORM DESIGN OF CASTINGS AND WELDMENTS 9 Redesign of castings based on parting line considerations, minimising core requirements, redesigning cast members using weldments, use of welding symbols. UNIT IV MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY 9 Selective assembly, deciding the number of groups, control of axial play, examples, grouped datum systems - different types, geometric analysis and applications – design features to facilitate automated assembly. UNIT V TRUE POSITION THEORY 9 Virtual size concept, floating and fixed fasteners, projected tolerance zone, assembly with gasket, zero true position tolerance, functional gauges, paper layout gauging, examples. Operation sequence for typical shaft type of components. Preparation of process drawings for different operations, tolerance worksheets and centrality analysis, examples.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Harry Peck, "Designing for Manufacture", Pitman Publications, 1983. 2. Matousek, "Engineering Design, - A Systematic Approach" - Blackie & Son Ltd.,

London, 1974. REFERENCES 1. Spotts M.F., "Dimensioning and Tolerance for Quantity Production, Prentice Hall

Inc., 1983. 2. Oliver R. Wade, "Tolerance Control in Design and Manufacturing", Industrial Press

Inc. New York Publications, 1967.

53

3. James G. Bralla, "Hand Book of Product Design for Manufacturing" McGraw Hill Publications, 1983.

4. Trucks H.E., "Design for Economic Production", Society of Manufacturing Engineers, michigan, 2nd edition, 1987.

PTME3020 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM: To impart the knowledge of numerical techniques to the solution of fluid dynamics and heat transfer problems. OBJECTIVES: To introduce Governing Equations of vicous fluid flows To introduce numerical modeling and its role in the field of fluid flow and heat transfer To enable the students to understand the various discretization methods,

solutionprocedures and turbulence modeling. To create confidence to solve complex problems in the field of fluid flow and heat

transfer by using high speed computers. PREREQUISITE: Fundamental Knowledge of partial differential equations, Heat Transfer and Fluid Mechanics UNIT I GOVERNING EQUATIONS AND BOUNDARY CONDITIONS 8 Basics of computational fluid dynamics – Governing equations of fluid dynamics – Continuity, Momemtum and Energy equations – Chemical species transport – Physical boundary conditions – Time-averaged equations for Turbulent Flow – Turbulent–Kinetic Energy Equations – Mathematical behaviour of PDEs on CFD - Elliptic, Parabolic and Hyperbolic equations. UNIT II FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD 9 Derivation of finite difference equations – Simple Methods – General Methods for first and second order accuracy – solution methods for finite difference equations – Elliptic equations – Iterative solution Methods – Parabolic equations – Explicit and Implicit schemes – Example problems on elliptic and parabolic equations. UNIT III FINITE VOLUME METHOD (FVM) FOR DIFFUSION 9 Finite volume formulation for steady state One, Two and Three -dimensional diffusion problems. One dimensional unsteady heat conduction through Explicit, Crank – Nicolson and fully implicit schemes. UNIT IV FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION DIFFUSION 10 Steady one-dimensional convection and diffusion – Central, upwind differencing schemes-properties of discretization schemes – Conservativeness, Boundedness, Trasnportiveness, Hybrid, Power-law, QUICK Schemes. UNIT V CALCULATION FLOW FIELD BY FVM 9 Representation of the pressure gradient term and continuity equation – Staggered grid –Momentum equations – Pressure and Velocity corrections – Pressure Correction equation, SIMPLE algorithm and its variants. Turbulence models, mixing length model, Two equation (k-Є) models – High and low Reynolds number models

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

54

TEXT BOOKS 1. T.J. Chung, Computational Fluid Dynamics, Cambridge University, Press, 2002. 2. Versteeg, H.K., and Malalasekera, W., An Introduction to Computational Fluid

Dynamics: The finite volume Method, Longman, 1998. 3. Ghoshdastidar , P.S., computer Simulation of flow and heat transfer, Tata McGraw

Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 1998. REFERENCES 1. Patankar, S.V. Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Hemisphere Publishing

Corporation, 2004. 2. Muralidhar, K., and Sundararajan, T., computationsl Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer,

Narosa Publishing House, NewDelhi, 1995. 3. Ghoshdastidar P.S., Heat Transfer, Oxford Unversity Press, 2005. 4. Prodip Niyogi, Chakrabarty .S.K., Laha .M.K. Introduction to Computational Fluid

Dynamics, Pearson Education, 2005. 5. Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics Anil W. Date Cambridge University

Press, 2005. PTMA3021 NUMERICAL METHODS L T P C

3 1 0 4

UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE PROBLEMS (10 +3) Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Fixed point iteration method –Newton-Raphson method- Solution of linear system of equations - Gauss Elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss-Jordan methods – Iterative methods of Gauss-Jacobi and Gauss-Seidel - Matrix Inversion by Gauss-Jordan method - Eigenvalues of a matrix by Power method and by Jacobi’s method. UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION (8 + 3) Interpolation with unequal intervals - Lagrange interpolation – Newton’s divided difference interpolation – Cubic Splines - Interpolation with equal intervals - Newton’s forward and backward difference formulae. UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTATION AND INTEGRATION (9 + 3) Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials - Numerical integration using Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 and Simpson’s 3/8 rules – Romberg’s method – Two point and three point Gaussian quadrature formulae – Evaluation of double integrals by Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules. UNIT IV INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL

EQUATIONS (9 + 3) Single step-methods - Taylor’s series method - Euler’s method - Modified Euler’s method - Fourth order Runge-Kutta method for solving first and second order equations –Multistep methods - Milne’s and Adams-Bashforth predictor-corrector methods for solving first order equations. UNIT V BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN ORDINARY AND PARTIAL

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (9 + 3) Finite difference methods for solving two-point linear boundary value problems. Finite difference techniques for the solution of two dimensional Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations on rectangular domain – One dimensional heat-flow equation by explicit and implicit (Crank Nicholson) methods - One dimensional wave equation by explicit method.

L: 45 T: 15 TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

55

TEXT BOOKS 1. Grewal, B.S. and Grewal,J.S., “ Numerical methods in Engineering and Science”, 6th

Edition, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2004. 2. Sankara Rao, K. “Numerical methods for Scientists and Engineers’, 3rd Edition

Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. REFERENCES 1. Chapra, S. C and Canale, R. P. “Numerical Methods for Engineers”, 5th Edition, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2007. 2. Gerald, C. F. and Wheatley, P. O., “Applied Numerical Analysis”, 6th Edition,

Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi, 2006. 3. Brian Bradie, “A friendly introduction to Numerical analysis”, Pearson Education Asia,

New Delhi, 2007. PTGE3022 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING LT P C

3 0 0 3 AIM To sensitize the engineering students on blending both technical and ethical responsibilities. OBJECTIVES

Identify the core values that shape the ethical behavior of an engineer. Utilize opportunities to explore one’s own values in ethical issues. Become aware of ethical concerns and conflicts. Enhance familiarity with codes of conduct. Increase the ability to recognize and resolve ethical dilemmas.

UNIT I ENGINEERING ETHICS 9 Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Professions and Professionalism – Professional Ideals and Virtues – Uses of Ethical Theories. UNIT II ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9 Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Research Ethics - Codes of Ethics – Industrial Standards - A Balanced Outlook on Law – The Challenger Case Study UNIT III ENGINEER’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY 9 Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis – Reducing Risk – The Government Regulator’s Approach to Risk - Chernobyl Case Studies and Bhopal UNIT IV RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9 Collegiality and Loyalty – Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) - Discrimination UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 9 Multinational Corporations – Business Ethics - Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics - Role in Technological Development – Weapons Development – Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors – Honesty – Moral Leadership – Sample Code of Conduct

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

56

TEXT BOOKS 1. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New York

(2005). 2. Charles E Harris, Michael S Pritchard and Michael J Rabins, “Engineering Ethics

Concepts and Cases”, Thompson Learning, (2000). REFERENCES 1. Charles D Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall, New Mexico, (1999). 2. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, (2003) 3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and

Engineers”, Oxford University Press, (2001) 4. Prof. (Col) P S Bajaj and Dr. Raj Agrawal, “Business Ethics – An Indian Perspective”,

Biztantra, New Delhi, (2004) 5. David Ermann and Michele S Shauf, “Computers, Ethics and Society”, Oxford

University Press, (2003) PTGE3023 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To make the students understand the importance , relevance and potentialities of this emerging field of study. OBJECTIVES

Study the basic nano technology and nano science. Understand interdisciplinary nature of this field. Understand the importance role of physics, chemistry, biology. Recognize that the rules of nano science are fundamentally different than those

we experience. Study the basic fabrication strategies of nano science.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10 Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-ultra-thinfilms-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties and motivation for study (qualitative only). UNIT II PREPARATION METHODS 10 Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Precipitation, Mechanical Milling, Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE. UNIT III PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY FOR NANOSCALE DEVICES 5 Introduction to optical/UV electron beam and X-ray Lithography systems and processes, Wet etching, dry (Plasma /reactive ion) etching, Etch resists-dip pen lithography UNIT IV PREPARATION ENVIRONMENTS 10 Clean rooms: specifications and design, air and water purity, requirements for particular processes, Vibration free environments: Services and facilities required. Working practices, sample cleaning, Chemical purification, chemical and biological contamination, Safety issues, flammable and toxic hazards, biohazards.

57

UNIT V CHARECTERISATION TECHNIQUES 10 X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques, Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques- AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., “Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties

and Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996. 2. N John Dinardo, “Nanoscale charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces”, 2nd Edition,

Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000 REFERENCES 1. G Timp (Editor), “Nanotechnology”, AIP press/Springer, 1999 2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia (Editor), “The Hand Book of Nano Technology,Nanometer

Structure”, Theory, Modeling and Simulations”, Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.

PTPT3024 PACKAGING MATERIALS & TECHNOLOGY LT P C

3 0 0 3 OBJECTIVES: To study the fundamentals of packaging, manufacturing process, packaging materials and package testing. UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PACKAGING 6 Definition, functions of packaging, types and selection of package, Packaging hazards, interaction of package and contents, materials and machine interface, Environmental and recycling considerations - life cycle assessment Package Design - Fundamentals, factors influencing design, stages in package development, graphic design, Structural design – simulation softwares UNIT II PACKAGING MATERIALS 11 Major Plastic packaging materials viz. Polyolefins, Polystyrene, Polyvinylchloride, Polyesters, Polyamides (Nylons), Polycarbonate and newer materials such as High Nitrile Polymers, Polyethylene Napthalate (PEN), Nanomaterials, biodegradable materials – properties and applications, recycling; Wood, Paper, Textile, Glass, Metals -Tin, Steel, aluminum, Labelling materials, Cushioning Materials – properties and areas of application. UNIT III CONVERSION TECHNOLOGY 12 Extrusion – Blown film, cast film, sheet, multilayer film & sheet, Lamination, Injection moulding, Blow moulding, Thermoforming; Cartoning Machinery, Bottling, Can former, Form Fill and Seal machines, Corrugated box manufacturing machineries, Drums – types of drums, moulded pulp containers, Closures, Application of Robotics in packaging. Surface treatment for printing, Printing processes – offset, flexo, gravure and pad printing UNIT IV SPECIALITY PACKAGING 9 Aerosol packaging, Shrink and Stretch wrapping, Blister packaging, Anti-static packaging, Aseptic packaging, Active packaging, Modified Atmospheric Packaging, Ovenable package; Cosmetic packaging, Hardware packaging, Textile packaging, Food packaging; Child resistant and Health care packaging, Export packaging, Lidding, RFID in packaging.

58

UNIT V TESTING 7 Package Testing – Drop test, Impact test, Vibration Test, Stacking and Compression test, Packaging Materials Testing: Mechanical – Tensile, tear burst, impact, compression test, Elongation, barrier properties - WVTR test, Adhesion test, Optical – Gloss, haze and clarity; Chemical Resistance test – solvents and chemicals, solubility test, burning test, solvent retention; Hardness and corrosion test for metals; Clarity and brittleness test for glass.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Aaron L.Brody & Kenneth S.Marsh, “Encyclopedia of Packaging Technology”,John

Wiley Interscience Publication, II Edition, 1997. 2. F.A. Paine, “Fundamentals of Packaging”, Brookside Press Ltd., London, 1990. 3. A.S.Athayle, “Plastics in Flexible Packaging”, Multi-tech Publishing Co., First Edition,

1992. REFERENCES 1. Mark J.Kirwar, “Paper and Paperboard Packaging Technology”, Blackwell

Publishing, 2005 2. “Handbook of Package Design Research”, Water stem Wiley Intrascience, 1981. 3. Paine, “Packaging Development”, PIRA International, 1990. 4. Arthur Hirsch, “Flexible Food Packaging”, Van Nostor and Reinhold, New York,1991. 5. E.P.Danger, “Selecting Colour for Packaging”, Grover Technical Press, 1987. 6. Susan E.M.Salke & et al, Plastics Packaging, Hansar, 2nd edition 2004. 7. Bill Stewart, “Packaging Design Strategies”, Pira International Ltd, 2nd Edition 2004. 8. Gunilla Johnson, “Corrugated Board Packaging”, PIRA International, 1993

2

SEMESTER IV SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY 1. PTEI 2251 Industrial Instrumentation – I 3 0 0 3 2. PTEE 2253 Control Systems 3 1 0 4 3. PTEC2312 Microprocessor and Microcontroller 3 0 0 3 4. PTEE 2204 Data Structures and Algorithms 3 1 0 4

PRACTICAL 1. PTCS2312 Object Oriented Programming Laboratory 0 0 3 2

TOTAL 12 2 3 16

SEMESTER V

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY 1. PTEI2303 Industrial Instrumentation – II 3 0 0 3 2. PTEI2352 Process Control 3 1 0 4 3. PTEC2361 Digital Signal Processing 3 1 0 4 4. E1 Elective – I 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL 1. PTEI2304 Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory 0 0 3 2

TOTAL 12 2 3 16

SEMESTER VI SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY 1. PTEI2402 Logic and Distributed Control System 3 0 0 3 2. PTEI2353 Digital System Design 3 0 0 3 3. PTEI2302 Analytical Instruments 3 0 0 3 4. PTEI2351 Modern Electronic Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 5. E2 Elective – II 3 0 0 3

TOTAL 15 0 0 15

SEMESTER VIII

SL. No.

COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C

THEORY 1. PTEI2403 VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 2. PTEI2404 Fibre Optics and Laser Instruments 3 0 0 3 2. E3 Elective – III 3 0 0 3 3. E4 Elective – IV 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL 1. PTEI2451 Project Work 0 0 12 6 TOTAL 12 0 12 18

3

B.E ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

LIST OF ELECTIVES

ELECTIVE I

SL.NO CODE NO. COURSE TITLE L T P C 1. PTCS2351 Artificial Intelligence 3 0 0 3 2. PTCS2071 Computer Architecture 3 0 0 3 3. PTCS2411 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 4. PTCS2070 Visual Languages and Applications 3 0 0 3

ELECTIVE II

5. PTEI2021 Power Plant Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 6. PTEI2022 Instrumentation in Petrochemical

Industries 3 0 0 3

7. PTEI2023 Micro Electro Mechanical Systems 3 0 0 3 8. PTGE2023 Fundamentals of NanoScience 3 0 0 3

ELECTIVE III

9. PTEC2055 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 10. PTEC2056 Advanced Communication Engineering 3 0 0 3 11. PTEC2057 Advanced Digital Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 12. PTEE2023 Robotics and Automation 3 0 0 3

ELECTIVE IV

13. PTGE2022 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3 14. PTGE2025 Professional Ethics In Engineering 3 0 0 3 15. PTIC2401 Digital Control System 3 0 0 3 16. PTCS2461 Applied Soft Computing 3 0 0 3

4

PTMA2112 APPLIED MATHEMATICS L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I MATRICES 9 Characteristic equation – Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Properties of eigenvalues and eigenvectors – Cayley – Hamilton Theorem – Diagonalization of matrices - Reduction of a quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation – Nature of quadratic forms . UNIT II FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 9 Partial derivatives – Homogeneous functions and Euler’s theorem – Total derivative – Differentiation of implicit functions – Change of variables – Jacobians – Partial differentiation of implicit functions – Taylor’s series for functions of two variables - Maxima and minima of functions of two variables. UNIT III ANALYTIC FUNCTION 9 Analytic functions – Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity – Properties – Harmonic conjugates – Construction of analytic function – Conformal Mapping – Mapping by functions w = a + z , az, 1/z, - Bilinear transformation. UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 9 Line Integral – Cauchy’s theorem and integral formula – Taylor’s and Laurent’s Series – Singularities – Residues – Residue theorem – Application of Residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals – Use of circular contour and semicircular contour with no pole on real axis. UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 9 Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Basic properties – Transforms of derivatives and integrals – Initial and Final value theorems – Inverse transforms – Convolution theorem – Transform of periodic functions – Application to solution of linear ordinary differential equations with constant coefficients.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS 1. Grewal B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics (40th Edition), Khanna Publishers, Delhi

(2007). 2. Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd., New Delhi

(2007). REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Glyn James, Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics, Pearson Education (2007). 2. Veerarajan, T., Engineering Mathematics (For First Year), Tata McGraw-Hill Pub. Pvt

Ltd., New Delhi (2006).

5

PTPH2111 APPLIED PHYSICS L T P C 3 0 0 3

UNIT I ULTRASONICS 9 Introduction – Production – magnetostriction effect - magnetostriction generatorpiezoelectric effect - piezoelectric generator- Detection of ultrasonic waves properties – Cavitations - Velocity measurement – acoustic grating - Industrial applications – drilling, welding, soldering and cleaning – SONAR - Non Destructive Testing – pulse echo system through transmission and reflection modes - A, B and C –scan displays, Medical applications - Sonograms UNIT II LASERS 9 Introduction – Principle of Spontaneous emission and stimulated emission. Population inversion, pumping. Einstein’s A and B coefficients - derivation. Types of lasers – He- Ne, CO2 , Nd-YAG, Semiconductor lasers - homojunction and heterojunction (Qualitative)- Industrial Applications - Lasers in welding, heat treatment and cutting – Medical applications - Holography (construction and reconstruction). UNIT III FIBER OPTICS & APPLICATIONS 9 Principle and propagation of light in optical fibres – Numerical aperture and Acceptance angle - Types of optical fibres (material, refractive index, mode) – Double crucible technique of fibre drawing - Splicing, Loss in optical fibre – attenuation, dispersion, bending - Fibre optical communication system (Block diagram) - Light sources - Detectors - Fibre optic sensors – temperature and displacement - Endoscope. UNIT IV QUANTUM PHYSICS 9 Black body radiation – Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien’s displacement law and Rayleigh – Jeans’ Law from Planck’s theory – Compton effect - Theory and experimental verification – Matter waves – Schrödinger’s wave equation – Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical significance of wave function – Particle in a one-dimensional box - Electron microscope - Scanning electron microscope - Transmission electron microscope. UNIT V CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9 Lattice – Unit cell – Bravais lattice – Lattice planes – Miller indices – ‘d’ spacing in cubic lattice – Calculation of number of atoms per unit cell – Atomic radius – Coordination number – Packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures – NaCl, ZnS, diamond and graphite structures – Polymorphism and allotropy - Crystal defects – point, line and surface defects- Burger vector.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Palanisamy, P.K., ‘Engineering Physics’ Scitech publications, Chennai, (2008). 2. Arumugam M. ‘ Engineering Physics’, Anuradha Publications, Kumbakonam,(2007) 3. Sankar B.N and Pillai S.O. ‘A text book of Engineering Physics’, New AgeInternational

Publishers, New Delhi, 2007. REFERENCES 1. R. K. Gaur and S.C. Gupta, ‘Engineering Physics’ Dhanpat Rai Publications, New

Delhi (2003) 2. M.N. Avadhanulu and PG Kshirsagar, ‘A Text book of Engineering Physics’,S.Chand

and company, Ltd., New Delhi, 2005. 3. Serway and Jewett, ‘Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics’, 6th

Edition, Thomson Brooks/Cole, Indian reprint (2007)

6

PTCY2112 APPLIED CHEMISTRY L T P C 3 0 0 3

UNIT I WATER TREATMENT AND POLLUTION CONTROL 9 Treatment of water –impurities and disadvantages of hard water-Domestic and Industrial treatment - zeolite and ion exchange processes-Portable water-Boiler feed water – conditioning of boiler feed water. Scale and sludge formation –prevention –caustic embrittlement-boiler corrosion–priming and foaming Sewage treatment–Primary, secondary and tertiary treatment–significance of DO, BOD and COD-desalination – reverse osmosis. Control of water,air and land pollution. UNIT II FUELS 9 Classification of fuels-Proximate and ultimate analysis of coal- coke manufacture-Otto Hoffman by product method-cracking-thermal and catalytic (fixed bed and fluidized bed)- petroleum-refining-factions-composition and uses synthetic petrol-fischer drops methods- Bergius process- knocking-octane number and cetane number-Preparation, composition and uses of producer gas , water gas and natural gas. Flue gas analysis- Orsat apparatus- gross and net calorific values- calculation of minimum requirement of air(simple calculations)- Explosive range –spontaneous ignition temperature UNIT III THERMODYNAMICS AND SURFACE CHEMISTRY 9 Second law of thermodynamics-entropy and its significance- criteria for spontaneity- free energy-Gibbs, Helmholts and Gibbs-Helmholts equation-applications and problems – Adsorption –types of adsorption- adsorption of gases on solids- adsorption isotherm- Freundlich and Langmuir isotherms-adsorption of solutes from solutions- applications UNIT IV ELECTROCHEMISTRY - CORROSION AND CATALYSIS 9 Reversible and irreversible cells-electrode potentials-types of electrodes-cell reactions- Nernst equations- electrochemical and galvanic series-fuel cells and solar cellscorrosion- chemical and electrochemical-factors affecting corrosion-sacrifical anodeimpressed current cathodic protection-surface treatment and protective coating- Catalysis –classification-characteristics of catalysis – auto catalysis- enzyme catalysis UNIT V POLYMERS-COMPOSITES AND NANOCHEMISTY 9 Polymers-definition-classification-thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics differences Preparation, properties and uses of polystyrene, bakelite, PET, polyurethane, Teflon, ureafromaldehyde, polycarbonates-Elastomers-Preparation, properties of Buna-S, nitrile, neoperene and butyl rubber, silicon rubber. Composites-FRP. Nanochemistryintroduction to nanochemistry- preparation and properties of nonmaterial-nano rods, nano wires-nanotubes-carbon nanotubes and their applications.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Dhara S S A text book of Engineering Chemistry, S.Chand & Co Ltd, New Delhi,2002 2. Jain. P.C and Monica Jain, Engineering Chemistry,Dhanpet Rai & Sons, New Delhi

2001

REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Puri B R.,Sharma L R and Madhan S. Pathania, Principles of Physical

Chemistry,Shoban Lal Nagin Chand & Co. Jalandar-2000. 2. G.B. Sergeev, Nanochemistry.Elsevier Science, New York,2006 3. V.R.Gowarikar, N.V.Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, Wiley

Eastern Limited, Madras (2006).

7

PTEE2151 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS L T P C 3 0 0 3

AIM To introduce the concepts and investigate the behavior of electric circuits by analytical techniques OBJECTIVE

To introduce the basic concepts of single phase, three phase and DC Electrical circuits

To study the transient and steady state response of the circuits subjected to step and sinusoidal excitations.

To introduce the methods of circuit analysis using Network theorems UNIT I BASIC CIRCUIT CONCEPTS 9 Lumped circuits – circuit elements, ideal sources (independent and dependent), linear passive parameter R, L and C, V-I relationship of circuit elements – Sinusoidal voltage and current : RMS value, form factor – Kirchhoff’s laws – analysis of series and parallel circuits – network reduction : voltage and current division, source transformation, star / delta transformation. UNIT II TRANSIENT ANALYSIS OF FIRST AND SECOND ORDER

CIRCUITS 9 Source free response of RL, RC and RLC circuits – forced (step and sinusoidal) response of RL, RC and RLC circuits – Time constant and natural frequency of oscillation – Laplace Transform application to the solution of RL, RC and RLC circuits - initial and final value theorems and their applications – concept of complex frequency – driving point and transfer impedance – poles and zeros of network function. UNIT III SINUSOIDAL STEADY STATE ANALYSIS 9 Concept of phasor and complex Impedance / Admittance – Analysis of simple series and parallel circuits – active power, reactive power, apparent power (volt ampere), power factor and energy calculations - concept of complex power – phasor diagram, impedance triangle and power triangle –series and parallel resonance circuits – Q factor, half-power frequencies and bandwidth of resonant circuits. UNIT IV MULTIDIMENSIONAL CIRCUIT ANALYSIS & NETWORK

THEOREMS 9 Node-voltage analysis of multi node circuit with current sources – rules for constructing nodal admittance matrix [Y] V = I – Mesh-current analysis of multi node circuits with voltage sources – rules for constructing mesh impedance matrix [Z] for solving matrix equation [Z] I = V – Superposition theorem – Thevenin’s theorem – Norton’s theorem – Reciprocity theorem – Compensation theorem – Tellegen’s Theorem – Millman’s theorem – maximum power transfer theorem for variable resistance load, variable impedance load and variable resistance and fixed reactance load. UNIT V COUPLED CIRCUITS AND THREE PHASE CIRCUITS 9 Coupled circuits : mutual inductance – coefficient of coupling – dot convention – analysis of simple coupled circuits . Three phase circuits : three phase balanced / unbalanced voltage sources – analysis of three phase 3-wire and 4-wire circuits with star and delta connected loads(balanced and unbalanced) – phasor diagram of voltages and currents – power and power factor measurements in three phase circuits.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

8

TEXT BOOKS 1. Van Valkenburg, Network Analysis, Prentice – Hall of India Private limited, New Delhi,

3rd Edition, 1991. 2. Joseph A. Edminister, Mahmood Nahvi, Electric Circuits, Schaum’s Series, Tata

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2001. REFERENCES 1. R.C.Dorf, Introduction to Electric Circuits, John Wiley & Sons Inc, New York, Second

Edition, 1993. 2. Charles K. Alexender, Mathew N.O.Sadiku, Fundamentals of Electric circuit, McGraw

Hill, N.Y, 2003. 3. Wiliam H.Hayt Jr, Jack E.Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, Engineering Circuit

Analysis, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2002. PTGE2114 COMPUTER PRACTICE L T P C

0 0 3 2 AIM To provide hands on experience in Operating system, Application software and ‘C’ programming OBJECTIVE At the end of the course, students will be able to have a clear understanding of basic commands used in Operating system Work in various application softwares like Word, Spreadsheet packages. Develop programmes in ‘C’. UNIT I OPERATING SYSTEM AND OFFICE PACKAGES 15 Operating system Concepts – using windows – File operations – Word Processing –Editing Commands – Preparation of documents – Formatting documents – use of spreadsheet package UNIT II C PROGRAMMING 15 Simple C Programs – Control Structures – Preprocessor – Input – Output – Storage classes – Arrays – structures – union – Functions – Parameter passing – Recursion. UNIT III ADVANCED C PROGRAMMING 15 Command Line Arguments – Pointers – Dynamic memory allocation – Linked Lists.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Taxali, PC Software for Windows made Simple, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002. 2. Stephen G. Kochan, Programming in C, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2007. REFERENCE 1. Brian W.Kernighan & Dennis M. Ritchie, The ‘C’ Programming Language, PHI, 2004.

9

PTMA2211 TRANSFORMS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS L T P C 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES The course objective is to develop the skills of the students in the areas of Transforms and Partial Differtial Equations. This will be necessary for their effective studies in a large number of engineering subjects like heat conduction, communication systems, electro-optics and electromagnetic theory. The course will also serve as a prerequisite for post graduate and specialized studies and research. UNIT I FOURIER SERIES 9 Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series – Half range cosine series – Complex form of Fourier Series – Parseval’s identify – Harmonic Analysis. UNIT II FOURIER TRANSFORM 9 Fourier integral theorem (without proof) – Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity. UNIT III PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 Formation of partial differential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation - Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations – Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients. UNIT IV APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9 Solutions of one dimensional wave equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of two-dimensional equation of heat equation (Insulated edges excluded) – Fourier series solutions in cartesian coordinates. UNIT V Z -TRANSFORM AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9 Z-transform - Elementary properties – Inverse Z – transform – Convolution theorem -Formation of difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z - transform. L : 45, T : 15 TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

TEXTBOOK 1. Grewal B.S, ‘Higher Engineering Mathematics’, 39th Edition, Khanna Publishers, Delhi,

2007.

REFERENCES 1. Bali.N.P. and Manish Goyal ‘A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics’, Seventh

Edition, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd. 2. Ramana.B.V. ‘Higher Engineering Mathematics’ Tata Mc-GrawHill Publishing Company

Limited, New Delhi. 3. Glyn James ‘ Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics’, Third edition – Pearson

education – 2007. 4. Erwin Kreyszig ‘ Advanced Engineering Mathematics’ Eighth Edition – Wiley India –

2007.

10

PTEI2203 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To provide an exposure to various electronic devices and electronic circuits. OBJECTIVES At the end of the course, students’ will have the knowledge about functioning of

various types of devices and design of various electronic circuits. UNIT I SEMICONDUCTOR DIODE AND BJT 9 PN Junction – Current components in a PN diode – Junction capacitance – Junction diode switching time – Zener diode – Varactor diode – Tunnel diode – Schottky diode – Transistor Structure – Basic Transistor operation – Transistor characteristics and parameters – The transistor as a switch, as an amplifier – Transistor bias circuits:- Voltage divider bias circuits, base bias circuits, emitter bias circuits, collector feedback bias circuits – DC load line – AC load line- bias stabilization, thermal runaway and thermal stability. UNIT II FET, UJT AND SCR 9 JFET characteristics and parameters – JFET biasing, self bias, voltage divider bias – Q point, stability over temperature – MOSFET D-MOSFET, E-MOSFET – MOSFET characteristics and parameters – MOSFET biasing, zero bias, voltage divider bias method, drain feedback bias – Characteristics and applications of UJT, SCR, DIAC, TRIAC. UNIT III AMPLIFIERS 9 CE, CC and CB amplifiers - Small signal low frequency transistor amplifier circuits - h parameter representation of a transistor - Analysis of single stage transistor amplifier using parameters voltage gain, current gain, input impedance and output impedance-frequency response - RC coupled amplifier. Classification of Power amplifiers:- Class A, B, AB and C Power amplifiers-Push-Pull and Complementary Symmetry Push-Pull amplifiers - Design of power output, efficiency and cross-over distortion. UNIT IV FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9 Advantages of negative feedback - Voltage/current, series/shunt feedback-Positive feedback - Condition for oscillators - Phase shift - Wein Bridge – Hartley - Colpitts and crystal oscillators. UNIT V PULSE CIRCUITS AND POWER SUPPLIES 9 RC wave shaping circuits - Diode clampers and clippers – Multivibrators -Schmitt triggers - UJT - Saw tooth oscillators - Single and polyphase rectifiers and analysis of filter circuits - Design of zener and transistor series voltage regulators - Switched mode power supplies.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS 1. Millman and Halkias, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Tata McGraw– Hill, 2007. 2. Floyd, T.L, “Electronic Devices” 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2003. 3. Millman and Halkias, “Integrated Electronics”, McGraw-Hill, 2004.

11

REFERENCES 1. Mottershead, A., “Electronic Devices and Circuits an Introduction”,Prentice Hall of

India, 2003. 2. Boylsted and Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Prentice Hall of

India, 6th Edition, 1999. 3. Streetman, B. and Sanjay, B., “Solid State Electronic Devices”, Prentice- Hall of

India, 5th Edition, 2005. 4. Bell, D.A., “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Prentice Hall of India, 4th Edition, 1999. 5. Millman, J., Prakash Rao., M.S. and Taub, H., “Pulse Digital and Switching Wave

Forms”, McGraw-Hill, 2007. PTEI2253 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS LT P C 3 1 0 4 AIM To introduce the fundamentals of digital circuits, combinational and sequential circuit.

OBJECTIVES To study various number systems and to simplify the mathematical expressions using

Boolean functions – simple problems. To study implementation of combinational circuits To study the design of various synchronous and asynchronous circuits. To expose the students to various memory devices. UNIT I NUMBER SYSTEMS AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA 9 Review of number systems; types and conversion, codes. Boolean algebra: De-Morgan’s theorem, switching functions and simplification using K-maps and Quine McCluskey method. UNIT II COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS 9 Design of Logic gates. Design of adder, subtractor, comparators, code converters, encoders, decoders, multiplexers and demultiplexers. Function realization using gates and multiplexers. UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9 Flip flops - SR, D, JK and T. Analysis of synchronous sequential circuits; design of synchronous sequential circuits – Completely and incompletely specified sequential circuits - state diagram; state reduction; state assignment, Counters – synchronous, a synchronous, updown and Johnson counters; shiftregisters. UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENCTIAL CIRCUITS 9 Analysis of asynchronous sequential machines, state assignment, asynchronous Design problem. UNIT V MEMORY DEVICES, PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES AND LOGIC FAMILIES 9 Memories: ROM, PROM, EPROM, PLA, PLD, FPGA, digital logic families: TTL, ECL, CMOS.

L : 45 T : 15 TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

12

TEXT BOOKS 1. M. Morris Mano, ‘Digital Logic and Computer Design’, Prentice Hall of India, 2002. 2. John M.Yarbrough, ‘Digital Logic, Application & Design’, Thomson, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Charles H.Roth, ‘Fundamentals Logic Design’, Jaico Publishing, IV edition, 2002. 2. Floyd, ‘Digital Fundamentals’, 8th edition, Pearson Education, 2003. 3. John F.Wakerly, ‘Digital Design Principles and Practice’, 3rd edition, Pearson

Education, 2002. PTEI2201 ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P C

3 1 0 4 AIM To impart basic knowledge on Electrical machines, principles and its behavior.

OBJECTIVES At the end of this course, student would have been exposed to:

Theory of structures, operating principle, characteristics, and applications of D.C and A.C rotating machines and transformers in detail.

Introductory knowledge on Special Machines. UNIT I D.C. MACHINES 12 Construction of D.C. Machines - Principle and theory of operation of D.C. generator - EMF equation - Characteristics of D.C. generators - Armature reaction – Commutation - Principle of operation of D.C. motor - Voltage equation - Torque equation - Types of D.C. motors and their characteristics –Starters - Speed control of D.C. motors - Applications. UNIT II TRANSFORMERS 9 Principle - Theory of ideal transformer - EMF equation - Construction details of shell and core type transformers - Tests on transformers - Equivalent circuit - Phasor diagram - Regulation and efficiency of a transformer - Introduction to three - phase transformer connections. UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 8 Principle of alternators:- Construction details, Equation of induced EMF and Vector diagram - Synchronous motor:- Starting methods, Torque, V curves, Speed control and Hunting. UNIT IV INDUCTION MACHINES 9 Induction motor:- Construction and principle of operation, Classification of induction motor, Torque equation, Condition for maximum torque, Equivalent Circuit, Starting methods and Speed control of induction motors. UNIT V SPECIAL MACHINES 7 Types of single phase motor –Double revolving field theory – Cross field theory – Capacitor start capacitor run motors – Shaded pole motor – Repulsion type motor – Universal motor – Hysteresis motor - Permanent magnet synchronous motor – Switched reluctance motor – Brushless D.C motor.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

13

TEXT BOOKS 1. Nagrath, I.J., and Kothari, D.P., “ Electrical Machines”, Tata McGraw - Hill, 1997. 2. Fitzgerald A.E, Kingsley C., Umans, S. and Umans S.D., “Electric Machinery”,

McGraw- Hill, Singapore, 2000.

REFERENCES 1. Theraja, B.L., “A Text book of Electrical Technology”, Vol.II, S.C Chand and Co., New

Delhi, 2007. 2. Del Toro, V., “Electrical Engineering Fundamentals”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,

1995. 3. Cotton, H., “Advanced Electrical Technology”, Sir Isaac Pitman and Sons Ltd., London,

1999. PTGE2021 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3 AIM The aim of this course is to create awareness in every engineering graduate about the importance of environment, the effect of technology on the environment and ecological balance and make him/her sensitive to the environment problems in every professional endeavour that he/she participates. OBJECTIVES At the end of this course the student is expected to understand what constitutes the environment, what are precious resources in the environment, how to conserve these resources, what is the role of a human being in maintaining a clean environment and useful environment for the future generations and how to maintain ecological balance and preserve bio-diversity.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL RESOURCES 9 Definition, Scope and Importance – Need For Public Awareness – Forest Resources:- Use and Over - Exploitation, Deforestation, Case Studies, Timber Extraction, Mining, Dams and their Ground Water, Floods, Drought, Conflicts Over Water, Dams - Benefits and Problems – Mineral Resources:- Use Effects on Forests and Tribal People – Water Resources:- Use and Over-Utilization of Surface and Exploitation, Environmental Effects of Extracting and Using Mineral Resources, Case Studies – Food Resources: World Food Problems, Changes caused by Agriculture and Overgrazing, Effects of Modern Agriculture, Fertilizer- Pesticide Problems, Water Logging, salinity, Case Studies – Energy Resources:- Growing Energy Needs, Renewable and Non Renewable Energy Sources, Use of Alternate Energy Sources, Case Studies – Land Resources:- Land as a Resource, Land Degradation, Man Induced Landslides, Soil Erosion and Desertification – Role of an Individual in Conservation of Natural Resources – Equitable use of Resources for Sustainable Lifestyles. Field Study of Local Area to Document Environmental assets – River/Forest/Grassland/Hill/ Mountain.

14

UNIT II ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 9 Concepts of an Ecosystem – Structure and Function of an Ecosystem – Producers, Consumers and Decomposers – Energy Flow in the Ecosystem – Ecological Succession – Food Chains, Food Webs and Ecological Pyramids – Introduction, Types, Characteristic Features, Structure and Function of the (A) Forest Ecosystem (B) Grassland Ecosystem (C) Desert Ecosystem (D) Aquatic Ecosystems (Ponds, Streams, Lakes, Rivers, Oceans, Estuaries) – Introduction to Biodiversity – Definition: Genetic, Species and Ecosystem Diversity – Biogeographical Classification of India – Value of Biodiversity: Consumptive Use, Productive Use, Social, Ethical, Aesthetic and Option Values – Biodiversity at Global, National and Local Levels – India as a Mega-Diversity Nation – Hot-Spots of Biodiversity – Threats to Biodiversity: Habitat Loss, Poaching of Wildlife, Man-Wildlife Conflicts – endangered and Endemic Species of India – Conservation of Biodiversity: In-Situ and Ex-Situ conservation of Biodiversity. Field Study of Common Plants, Insects and Birds - Field Study of Simple Ecosystems – Pond, River, Hill Slopes, etc. UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 9 Definition – Causes, Effects and Control Measures of:- (A) Air Pollution (B) Water Pollution (C) Soil Pollution (D) Marine Pollution (E) Noise Pollution (F) Thermal Pollution (G) Nuclear Hazards – Soil Waste Management:- Causes, Effects and Control Measures of Urban and Industrial Wastes – Role of an Individual in Prevention of Pollution – Pollution Case Studies – disaster Management:- Floods, Earthquake, Cyclone and Landslides. Field Study of Local Polluted Site – Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 9 From Unsustainable To Sustainable Development – Urban Problems Related To energy – Water conservation, Rain Water Harvesting, Watershed Management – Resettlement and Rehabilitation of People, Its Problems and Concerns, Case Studies – Environmental Ethics:- Issues and Possible Solutions – Climate Change, Global Warming, Acid Rain, Ozone Layer Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust, Case Studies – Wasteland Reclamation – Consumerism and Waste Products – Environment Production Act – Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act – Wildlife Protection Act – Forest Conservation Act – Issues Involved in enforcement of Environmental Legislation – Public Awareness. UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 9 Population Growth, Variation Among Nations – Population Explosion – Family Welfare Programme – environment and Human Health – Human Rights – Value Education – HIV /AIDS – Women and Child Welfare – Role of Information Technology in Environment and Human Health – Case Studies.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Masters, G.M., “Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science”, Pearson

Education Pvt., Ltd., 2nd Edition, 2004. 2. Miller, T.G. Jr., “Environmental Science”, Wadsworth Pub. Co. 3. Townsend C., Harper, J. and Begon, M., “Essentials of Ecology”, Blackwell Science,

2003. 4. Trivedi, R.K., and Goel, P.K., “Introduction to Air Pollution”, Techno- Science

Publications.

15

REFERENCES 1. Erach, B., “The Biodiversity of India”, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmedabad, India. 2. Trivedi, R.K., “Handbook of Environmental Law’s, Rules, Guidelines,Compliances and

Standards”, Vol - I and II, Envio Media. 3. Cunningham., Cooper, W.P. and Gorhani, T.H., “Environmental Encyclopedia”, Jaico

Publishing House, Mumbai, 2001. 4. Wages, K.D., “Environmental Management”, W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA,

1998. PTEI2252 TRANSDUCER ENGINEERING L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To provide adequate knowledge in sensors and transducers. OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge about the principles and analysis of sensors. Discussion of errors and error analysis. Emphasis on characteristics and response of transducers. To have an adequate knowledge in resistance transducers. Basic knowledge in inductance and capacitance transducers and exposure to other

transducers.

UNIT I SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION OF TRANSDUCERS 9 Units and standards – Calibration methods – Static calibration – Classification of errors – Error analysis – Statistical methods – Odds and uncertainty – Classification of transducers – Selection of transducers. UNIT II CHARACTERISTICS OF TRANSDUCERS 9 Static characteristics – Accuracy, precision, resolution, sensitivity, linearity -Dynamic characteristics – Mathematical model of transducer – Zero, I and II order transducers. Response to impulse, step, ramp and sinusoidal inputs. UNIT III VARIABLE RESISTANCE TRANSDUCERS 9 Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics and application of potentiometer, strain gauge, resistance thermometer, Thermistor, hot-wire anemometer, piezoresistive sensor and humidity sensor. UNIT IV VARIABLE INDUCTANCE AND VARIABLE CAPACITANCE RANSDUCERS 9 Induction potentiometer – Variable reluctance transducers – EI pick up – Principle of operation, construction details, characteristics and application of LVDT –Capacitive transducer and types – Capacitor microphone – Frequency response.

16

UNIT V OTHER TRANSDUCERS 9 Piezoelectric transducer, Hall Effect transducer – Different types of Photo detectors- Digital transducers – Smart sensors - Fibre optic sensors, SQUID sensors, Film sensors, MEMS – Nano sensors.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. E.A. Doebelin, ‘Measurement Systems – Applications and Design’, Tata McGraw Hill,

New York, 2000. 2. A.K. Sawhney, ‘A course in Electrical & Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation’,

Dhanpat Rai and Co (P) Ltd., 2004. REFERENCES 1. D. Patranabis, ‘Sensors and Transducers’, Prentice Hall of India, 1999. 2. John P. Bentley, ‘Principles of Measurement Systems’, III Edition, Pearson Education,

2000. PTEE2254 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS AND APPLICATIONS L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To introduce the concepts for realizing functional building blocks in ICs, fabrications & application of ICs. OBJECTIVES

To study the IC fabrication procedure. To study characteristics; realize circuits; design for signal analysis using Op-amp

ICs. To study the applications of Op-amp. To study internal functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like Timers,

PLL circuits, regulator Circuits, ADCs. UNIT I IC FABRICATION 9 IC classification, fundamental of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, masking and etching, diffusion of impurities. Realisation of monolithic ICs and packaging. Fabrication of diodes, capacitance, resistance and FETs. UNIT II CHARACTERISTICS OF OPAMP 9 Ideal OP-AMP characteristics, DC characteristics, AC characteristics, offset voltage and current: voltage series feedback and shunt feedback amplifiers, differential amplifier; frequency response of OP-AMP; Basic applications of op-amp – summer, differentiator and integrator. UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF OPAMP 9 Instrumentation amplifier, first and second order active filters, V/I & I/V converters, comparators, multivibrators, waveform generators, clippers, clampers, peak detector, S/H circuit, D/A converter (R-2R ladder and weighted resistor types), A/D converter - Dual slope, successive approximation and flash types.

17

UNIT IV SPECIAL ICs 9 555 Timer circuit – Functional block, characteristics & applications; 566-voltage controlled oscillator circuit; 565-phase lock loop circuit functioning and applications, Analog multiplier ICs. UNIT V APPLICATION ICs 9 IC voltage regulators - LM317, 723 regulators, switching regulator, MA 7840, LM 380 power amplifier, ICL 8038 function generator IC, isolation amplifiers, opto coupler, opto electronic ICs.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Ramakant A.Gayakward, ‘Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits’, IV edition,

Pearson Education, 2003 / PHI. (2000) 2. D.Roy Choudhary, Sheil B.Jani, ‘Linear Integrated Circuits’, II edition, New Age, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Jacob Millman, Christos C.Halkias, ‘Integrated Electronics - Analog and Digital circuits

system’, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003. 2. Robert F.Coughlin, Fredrick F.Driscoll, ‘Op-amp and Linear ICs’, Pearson Education,

4th edition, 2002 / PHI. 3. David A.Bell, ‘Op-amp & Linear ICs’, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd edition, 1997 PTEC2315 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To introduce the fundamental techniques of analog, digital and data communication. To explain satellite and fiber optic communication and Networking systems.

OBJECTIVES

To understand basic signals, analog modulation, demodulation and radio receivers. To explain the characteristics and model of transmission medium. To understand source digitization, digital multiplexing and modulation. To understand data communication system and techniques. To learn the basics of satellite and optical fiber communication systems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 Transmission lines – Types, equivalent circuit, losses, standing waves, impedance matching, bandwidth; radio propagation – Ground wave and space wave propagation, critical frequency, maximum usable frequency, Path Loss, Gaussian white noise. Time and frequency domain representation of signals need for modulation UNIT II ANALOG MODULATION SYSTEMS 9 Amplitude modulation and demodulation, frequency modulation and demodulation, super heterodyne radio receiver. Frequency division multiplexing. Time Division mulltiplexing.

18

UNIT III DIGITAL COMMUNICATION 9 Pulse code modulation, digital T-carrier system. Digital radio system. Digital modulation: Amplitude Shift Key, Frequency and phase shift keying, Quadrature Phase Shift Key – Modulator and demodulator, bit error rate calculation.

UNIT IV DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORK PROTOCOL 9 Data Communication codes, error control, data modem, ISDN, LAN, ISO-OSI seven layer architecture for WAN.

UNIT V SATELLITE AND OPTICAL FIBRE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 9 Introduction to satellite communication, Optical Fiber communication, Television Engineering, Microwave communication and Cellular communication

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS 1. Wayne Tomasi, ‘Electronic Communication Systems’, Pearson Education, 3rd Edition,

2001. 2. Roy Blake, ‘Electronic Communication Systems’, Thomson Delmar, 2nd Edition, 2002.

REFERENCES 1. William Schweber, ‘Electronic Communication Systems’, Prentice Hall of India, 2002. 2. G. Kennedy, ‘Electronic Communication Systems’, McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2002. 3. Miller, ‘Modern Electronic Communication’, Prentice Hall of India, 2003 4. Simon Haykins, Communication systems, John Wiley,4th Edition,2001 PTCS2311 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LT P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To understand the concepts of object-oriented programming and master OOP using C++ and Java. UNIT I 7 Object oriented programming concepts – objects-classes- methods and messages-abstraction and encapsulation-inheritance- abstract classes- polymorphism. Introduction to C++- objects-classes-constructors and destructors UNIT II 12 Operator overloading - friend functions- type conversions- templates - Inheritance – virtual functions- runtime polymorphism. UNIT III 8 Exception handling - Streams and formatted I/O – file handling – namespaces – String Objects - standard template library.

19

UNIT IV 8 Introduction to JAVA , bytecode, virtual machines – objects – classes – Javadoc – packages – Arrays - Strings UNIT V 10 Inheritance – interfaces and inner classes - exception handling – threads - Streams and I/O TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. B. Trivedi, “Programming with ANSI C++”, Oxford University Press, 2007. 2. Cay S. Horstmann, Gary Cornell, “Core JAVA volume 1”, Eighth Edition, Pearson

Education, 2008. REFERENCES 1. ISRD Group, “Introduction to Object-oriented Programming and C++”, Tata McGraw-

Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2007. 2. ISRD Group, “Introduction to Object-oriented programming through Java”, Tata

McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2007. 3. S. B. Lippman, Josee Lajoie, Barbara E. Moo, “C++ Premier”, Fourth Edition, Pearson

Education, 2005. 4. D. S. Malik, “C++ Programming: From Problem Analysis to Program Design”, Third

Edition, Thomson Course Technology, 2007. 5. K. Arnold and J. Gosling, “The JAVA programming language”, Third edition, Pearson

Education, 2000. 6. C. Thomas Wu, “An introduction to Object-oriented programming with Java”, Fourth

Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2006. PTEI2257 TRANSDUCERS AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 2 OBJECTIVES The aim of this lab is to train the students in handling the different kinds of transducers like LVDT, Hall effect, Thermocouple etc., which he often meets in his study and also to impart the students an adequate knowledge and work experience of the different types of AC and DC bridges, electronic measurement methods for different electronic instruments.

1. Displacement versus output voltage characteristics of a potentiometric transducer. 2. Characteristics of Strain gauge and Load cell. 3. Characteristics of LVDT, Hall effect transducer and Photoelectric tachometer. 4. Characteristic of LDR, thermistor and thermocouple. 5. Step response characteristic of RTD and thermocouple and Study of smart

transducers. 6. Wheatstone and Kelvin’s bridge for measurement of resistance. 7. Schering Bridge for capacitance measurement and Anderson Bridge 8. for inductance measurement. 9. Calibration of Single-phase Energy meter and wattmeter. 10. Calibration of Ammeter and Voltmeter using Student type potentiometer. 11. Design, Construction and calibration of series and shunt type 12. ohmmeters.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

20

DETAILED SYLLABUS 1. LOADING EFFECT ON POTENTIOMETER

AIM To study the loading effect on potentiometer circuit. OBJECTIVES

i. To observe the output, input calibration curve using FET voltmeter has the output device.

ii. To observe the output, input characteristic with an voltmeter whose input impedance is finite.

iii. To observe the linearity which decreases with a decrease in the input impedance of the output meter.

EXERCISE 1. In the potentiometer circuit, displacement is given to the wiper arm and the

corresponding output is observed with 2 meters (one is a FET voltmeter and the other is meter with a finite input impedance)

2. For various input displacements, output voltage from the two different meters are recorded and tabulated.

3. Plot the graph output Vs input displacement for both cases. EQUIPMENT

1. Potentiometer – Linear displacement transducer kit – 1 No 2. Regulated power supply – 1 No 3. FET voltmeter, ordinary voltmeter – 1 No

2.CHARACTERISTICS OF STRAIN GAUGE AND LOAD CELL AIM To study the characteristics of strain guage and load cell. OBJECTIVES 1. To identify and study the characteristics of strain guage and load cell. 2. To determine the sensitivity of strain guage and load cell. 3. To determine the Young’s modulus and hence the guage factor of the given strain

guage.

EXERCISE 1. Load and Unload the load cell and strain guage. 2. Measure the corresponding voltages during both loading and unloading and plot the

calibration curve. 3. Find the Young’s Modulus and gauge factor from the graph. EQUIPMENT 1. Strain guage and Load cell kit. – 1 No 2. Variable power supply – 1 No 3. Loads for measurement - A set 3.CHARACTERISTICS OF LVDT, HALL EFFECT TRANSDUCER AND PHOTOELECTRIC TACHOMETER.

21

3.(A) CHARACTERISTICS OF LVDT AIM

To study the operation and characteristics of LVDT

OBJECTIVES 1. To study the displacement of the core from its null position. 2. To study the variation of output voltage with change in displacement.

EXERCISE

1. Adjust the potentiometer knob present in the LVDT kit to bring the core to Null position (set the output voltage to be ‘0’ volts)

2. Rotate the knob in the positive direction such that the LVDT scale moves in steps of 1cm and measure the corresponding output voltage.

3. Tabulate the readings. 4. Repeat the above procedure for negative displacement. 5. Plot the characteristic curve between displacement and output voltage.

EQUIPMENTS 1. LVDT trainer kit – 1 No 2. Power supply – 1 No 3.(b) HALL EFFECT TRANSDUCER AIM To study the characteristics of Hall effect transducer. OBJECTIVE

1. To determine the positive hall voltage at the bottom of the transducer. 2. To determine the negative hall voltage. 3. To identify and study the characteristics of hall effect transducer. 4. To measure the displacement of a structural element .

EXERCISE 1. Study the internal configuration of Hall effect IC. 2. Patch the circuit diagram as per patching diagram. 3. Place the north pole of the magnet above the scale and take the reading air

gap between hall IC and magnet to output voltage. 4. Place the south pole of the magnet above the scale and take the reading for

different distances and plot the graph between air gap voltmeter readings. EQUIPMENTS

1. Hall effect characteristics trainer – 1 No 2. Power supply – 1 No 3. Voltmeter – 1 No

3.(c) PHOTOELECTRIC TACHOMETER AIM

To study the characteristics of photoelectric tachometer using the servo motor speed control trainer kit.

22

OBJECTIVES

1. To calculate the number of pulses generated in the photoelectric pick up. 2. To study the variation of speed with the variation of the input voltage.

EXERCISE

1. Connect the circuit as per instructions given in the manual. 2. Adjust the power supply. 3. Vary the speed of the motor by using rotary potentiometer and note down the

readings. 4. Calculate number of pulses generated in the photoelectric pick up. 5. Draw the graph between voltage and speed.

EQUIPMENTS

1. Speed control trainer kit – 1 No 2. Power supply – 1 No 3. Wires - Some 4. Multimeter – 1 No

4.CHARACTERISTIC OF LDR, THERMISTOR AND THERMOCOUPLE. (a) CHARACTERISTICS OF LDR AIM To determine the characteristics of LDR OBJECTIVES

1. To determine the change in resistance for corresponding change in light intensity.

2. To determine the output voltage for corresponding change in voltage. EXERCISE

1. The lamp for LDR is selected by using a select switch. 2. Initially the lamp is kept away from LDR. 3. Now the distance is decreased gradually and the corresponding values of

voltages and resistances are taken. 4. Repeat the above steps for various positions of lamp.

EQUIPMENTS Photo conductive trainer kit – 1 No Multimeter – 1 No

Connecting wires – 1 No

(b) CHARACTERISTICS OF THERMISTOR AIM To determine the characteristics of thermistor OBJECTIVES To measure the resistance value for the corresponding changes in temperature. EXERCISE

1. Measure the initial temperature of water. 2. Take another vessel full of water and boil it to1000C.

23

3. Note down the readings for every 50C fall of temperature in thermistor, thermometer and output voltage readings.

4. Plot the Thermistor characteristics.

EQUIPMENTS 1. Thermistor Trainer kit – 1 No 2. Heater – 1 No 3. Thermistor – 1 No 4. Thermometer – 1 No 5. Voltmeter – 1 No

4(c) CHARACTERISTICS OF THERMOCOUPLE

AIM To determine the characteristics of thermocouple. OBJECTIVES

1. To determine the voltage for corresponding change in temperature. EXERCISE

1. Measure the initial temperature and temperature of boiling water (1000C) 2. Calibrate the thermocouple in the hot water and measure the 50C temperature

fall in thermocouple. 3. The output voltage is noted for corresponding fall in temperature.

EQUIPMENT 1. Thermocouple trainer kit – 1 No 2. Thermocouple – 1 No 3. Voltmeter – 1 No 4. Heater – 1 No

5. STEP RESPONSE CHARACTERISTIC OF RTD AND THERMOCOUPLE

AND STUDY OF SMART TRANSDUCERS. (a).STEP RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS OF RTD AND THERMOCOUPLE AIM To study the step response characteristic of RTD and thermocouple. OBJECTIVE

a. To analyse the change in temperature due to change in emf in case of thermocouple.

b. To analyse the change in temperature due to change in resistance in case of RTD.

c. To observe the transients when step input [i.e sudden change in the input] is given.

EXERCISE 1. Calibrate the RTD and thermocouple at room temperature and 1000C

alternatively. 2. Bring down the sensor to room temperature and provide a sudden change of

input temperature to boiling point (i.e) 1000C. 3. Start the stop clock and tabulate the time taken for every 50C rise of

temperature. 4. Plot the step response for both the sensors.

24

EQUIPMENT

1. Thermocouple and RTD trainer kit – 1 No 2. Thermometer – 1 No 3. Heater – 1 No 4. Thermocouple and RTD sensors – 1 No 5. Voltmeters – 1 No

I/P trainer kit – 1 No Pressure source – 1 No Control valve etc – 1 No

6. WHEATSTONE AND KELVIN’S BRIDGE FOR MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE.

(A) MEASUREMENT OF MEDIUM RESISTANCE USING WHEATSTONE’S BRIDGE AIM To measure the value of unknown resistance using Wheatstone’s Bridge. EXERCISE Find the value of unknown resistance. PROCEDURE

1. Connections are given as per the circuit diagram. 2. Supply is switched on. 3. When the unknown resistance s connected, the bridge becomes

unbalanced. 4. The bridge is balanced by varying standard resistance. 5. The value of unknown resistance is calculated by the given formula. 6. The above steps are repeated for different value of unknown resistances.

EQUIPMENT

1. Resistors – 1 No 2. Galvanometer – 1 No 3. Regulated Power supply – 1 No 4. Bread board – 1 No 5. Decade resistance box – 1 No 6. Multimeter – 1 No

(b) KELVIN’S DOUBLE BRIDGE AIM

To find the unknown value of low resistance using Kelvin’s Double Bridge. EXERCISE

Find the unknown value of low resistance. PROCEDURE

1. Connections are given as per the circuit diagram. 2. Supply is switched on.

25

3. The bridge becomes unbalanced when unknown resistance R is connected. 4. The bridge is balanced by varying standard resistance. 5. Unknown resistance is calculated using balance equation. 6. The above steps are repeated for various values of unknown resistance.

EQUIPMENT

1. Power supply – 1 No 2. Fixed resistance – 1 No 3. Unknown resistors – 1 No 4. Decade resistance box – 1 No 5. Multimeter – 1 No 6. Galvanometer – 1 No 7. Bred board - 1 No

7. SCHERING BRIDGE FOR CAPACITANCE MEASUREMENT AND ANDERSON BRIDGE FOR INDUCTANCE MEASUREMENT.

(a) SCHERING’S BRIDGE AIM

To measure the unknown value of capacitance using Schering’s bridge EXERCISE

Measure the unknown value of capacitance. PROCEDURE

1. Connections are given as per the circuit. 2. Supply is witched on. 3. When unknown value of capacitance is connected, bridge becomes

unbalanced. 4. The bridge is balanced by varying the standard. 5. The unknown value of capacitance is calculated using the balance

equation. 6. The above steps are repeated for different values of unknown capacitances.

EQUIPMENT 1. Resistors - Some set. 2. Capacitors – Some set. 3. Decade Resistance box – 1 No. 4. Decade Capacitance box – 1 No.

5. CRO – 1 No. 6. Function Generator – 1 No.

(b) ANDERSON’S BRIDGE

AIM To measure the unknown value of inductance using Anderson’s Bridge

EXERCISE Measure the unknown value of inductance. PROCEDURE

26

1. Connections are given as per the circuit diagram. 2. Supply is switched on. 3. When unknown value of inductance is connected the bridge becomes

unbalanced. 4. The unknown value of inductance is calculated by using the balance

equation. 5. The above step are repeated for different values of unknown inductance.

EQUIPMENT

1. Resistors – Some set 2. Decade Inductance box – 1 No. 3. Decade Condenser box – 1 No. 4. Regulated power supply – 1 No. 5. CRO – 1 No. 6. Bread board - 1 No.

8.CALIBRATION OF SINGLE-PHASE ENERGY METER AND WATTMETER. (a) CALIBRATION OF SINGLE PHASE ENERGY METER AIM

To calibrate the given energy meter using two substandard wattmeters and to obtain percentage error.

EXERCISE Calibrate the given energy meter and draw % error Vs load graph. PROCEDURE

1. Connections are given as per the circuit diagram. 2. The value of load current is adjusted to desire value. 3. When the red mark on the disk of the energy meter passes the observation point,

the stopwatch is started and the number of revolution made by the disc is noted. 4. The load current is maintained by adjusting the load. 5. When the disc of the energy meter completes desired number of revolutions the

stopwatch is stopped and the time taken is noted. 6. The procedure is repeated for different values of wattmeter reading and time taken,

number of revolutions of the disc is noted down. 7. The graph is plotted between percentage error and load.

EQUIPMENT

1. Wattmeter – 2 No 2. Voltmeter – 1 No 3. Ammeter – 1 No 4. Resistive load – 1 No

(b) CALIBRATION OF WATTMETER AIM

To calibrate the given wattmeter using direct loading.

EXERCISE Calibrate the given wattmeter and draw the graph between % error and load current.

27

PROCEDURE

1. Connections are given as per the circuit diagram. 2. Supply is given at no load condition. 3. Resistive load is applied in steps and the readings are tabulated. 4. Graph is drawn between % error and load current.

EQUIPMENT 1. Ammeter – 1 No

2. Voltmeter – 1 No 3. Wattmeter – 1 No 4. Load – 1 No

9. CALIBRATION OF AMMETER AND VOLTMETER USING STUDENT TYPE POTENTIOMETER. (a) CALIBRATION OF AMMETER AIM

To calibrate the given ammeter using standard ammeter EXERCISE Calibrate the given ammeter and draw the graph between % error and As. PROCEDURE

1. Connections are given as per the circuit diagram. 2. The standard ammeter should be selected properly. 3. Supply is switched on. 4. At no load condition the readings of all the meters are noted. 5. By gradually increasing the load, the respective readings are taken from the

meters. 6. The readings are tabulated and % error is calculated from the formula. 7. Graph is drawn between As and % error. 8. The procedure is repeated for both ac and dc supply.

EQUIPMENT

1. Standard ammeter – 1 No. 2. Ammeter – 1 No. 3. Variable resistive load – 1 No. 4. RPS – 1 No.

(b) CALIBRATION OF VOLTMETER

AIM To calibrate the given voltmeter using standard voltmeter. EXERCISE Calibrate the given voltmeter and draw the graph between % error and VS.

PROCEDURE 1. Connections are given as per the circuit diagram. 2. The standard voltmeter should be selected properly. 3. Supply is switched on. 4. At no load condition the readings of all the meters are noted.

28

5. By gradually increasing the voltage, the respective readings are taken from the meters.

6. The readings are tabulated and % error is calculated from the formula. 7. Graph is drawn between Vs and % error. 8. The procedure is repeated for both ac and dc supply.

EQUIPMENT

1. Standard voltmeter – 1 No. 2. Voltmeter – 1 No. 3. Auto transformer – 1 No. 4. RPS – 1 No.

10. DESIGN AND CALIBRATION OF SERIES AND SHUNT TYPE OHMMETERS. (a) SERIES TYPE OHMMETERS AIM To conduct a suitable experiment to measure an unknown medium resistance (1Ω - 0.1MΩ) with the series type ohmmeter.

OBJECTIVE The instrument most commonly used to check the continuity (a complete circuit), or to measure the resistance of a circuit or circuit element, is the OHMMETER. The ohmmeter is widely used to measure resistance and check the continuity of electrical circuits and devices.

OHMMETER SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The following safety precautions and operating procedures for ohmmeters are the MINIMUM necessary to prevent injury and damage.

Be certain the circuit is deenergized and discharged before connecting an ohmmeter. Do not apply power to a circuit while measuring resistance. When you are finished using an ohmmeter, switch it to the OFF position if one is provided and remove the leads from the meter.

Always adjust the ohmmeter for 0 (or in shunt ohmmeter) after you change ranges beforemaking the resistance measurement.

EXERCISE 1. Place the resistance to be measured is in series with the internal resistors and the

meter movement of the ohmmeter. 2. Note down the reading of the meter and calculate the practical value. 3. Calculate the theoretical value 4. Find the difference and error between the theoretical and practical values. 5. Measure the Resistor using Ammeter – Voltmeter method and compare the result with

the Ohmmeter method. 6. Calculate the difference and %error. 7. To implement the continuity test, consider any one electronic circuit and check the

continuity

EQUIPMENT 1. Ohmmeter (Analog Multimeter) – 1No 2. Voltmeter - 1 No 3. Ammeter - 1 No 4. Resistor - 1 No 5. RPS - 1 No

29

(b) SHUNT TYPE OHMMETER AIM i. To conduct a suitable experiment to measure an unknown medium resistance (1Ω - 0.1MΩ) with the series type ohmmeter.

ii. To compare the result with the Ammeter – Voltmeter method

EXERCISE 1. Place the resistance to be measured in shunt ( in parallel) with the meter movement of

the ohmmeter. 2. Note down the reading of the meter and calculate the practical value. 3. Calculate the theoretical value 4. Find the difference and error between the theoretical and practical values. 5. Measure the Resistor using Ammeter – Voltmeter method and compare the result with

the Ohmmeter method. 6. Calculate the difference and %error. 7. To implement the continuity test, consider any one electronic circuit and check the

continuity EQUIPMENT 1. Ohmmeter(Analog Multimeter) – 1No 2. Voltmeter - 1 No 3. Ammeter - 1 No 4. Resistor - 1 No 5. RPS - 1 No PTEI2251 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION – I L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To equip the students with relevant knowledge to suit the industrial requirements. OBJECTIVES To provide sound knowledge about various techniques used for the measurement of

industrial parameters. Discussion of load cells, torque meter and various velocity pick-ups. Exposure to various accelerometer pick-ups, vibrometers, density and viscosity pick-

ups. To have an adequate knowledge about pressure transducers. To have an idea about the temperature standards, calibration and signal conditioning

used in RTD’s. To have a sound knowledge about thermocouples and pyrometry techniques.

UNIT I MEASUREMENT OF FORCE, TORQUE AND VELOCITY 9 Electric balance – Different types of load cells – Hydraulic, pneumatic strain gauge- Magneto elastic and Piezo electric load cell – Different methods of torque measurements: strain gauge-Relative angular twist-Speed measurement:-Capacitive tacho-Dragcup type tacho-D.C and A.C tachogenerators – Stroboscope.

30

UNIT II MEASUREMENT OF ACCELERATION, VIBRATION AND DENSITY 9 Accelerometers:- LVDT, Piezo-electric, Strain gauge and Variable reluctance type accelerometer – Mechanical type vibration instruments – Seismic instruments as an accelerometer – Vibrometers : Calibration of vibration pickups – Units of density and specific gravity – Baume scale, and API scale- Pressure head type densitometers- Float type densitometers – Ultrasonic densitometer- Bridge type gas densitometer. UNIT III PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 9 Units of pressure-Manometers-Different types –Elastic type pressure gauges: Bourdon tube, bellows and diaphragms-Electrical methods: Elastic elements with LVDT and strain gauges –Capacitive type pressure gauge –Piezo-resistive pressure sensor-Resonator pressure sensor-Measurement of vacuum:-McLeod gauge-Thermal conductivity gauges-Ionization gauges:– Cold cathode type and hot cathode type-Testing and calibration of pressure gauges-Dead weight tester. UNIT IV TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT 9 Definitions and standards-Primary and secondary fixed points –Calibration of thermometers - Different types of filled in system thermometer-Sources of errors in filled in systems and their compensation-Bimetallic thermometers – Electrical methods of temperature measurement-Signal conditioning of industrial RTDs and their characteristics-3 lead and 4 lead RTDs - Thermistors. UNIT V THERMOCOUPLES AND RADIATION PYROMETERS 9 Thermocouples-Laws of thermocouple –Fabrication of industrial thermocouples –Signal conditioning of thermocouple output-Isothermal block reference junctions – Commercial circuits for cold junction compensation-Response of thermocouple –Special techniques for measuring high temperature using thermocouples – Radiation fundamentals- Radiation methods of temperature measurement –- Total radiation pyrometers-Optical pyrometers-Two colour radiation pyrometers – Fiber optic temperature measurement.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Doebelin, E.O., “Measurement systems Application and Design”, International Student

Edition, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2004. 2. Jone’s Instrument Technology, Vol.2, Butterworth-Heinemann, International Edition,

2003. 3. A.K. Sawhney, ‘A course in Electrical & Electronic Measurements and

Instrumentation’, Dhanpath Rai & Co (P) Ltd, 2004.

REFERENCES 1. Liptak, B.G., “Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press,

2005 2. Patranabis,D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1999. 3. Holman,P., “Experimental methods for Engineers”, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill Book

Company, 2000. 4. Nakra, B.C., and Chaudry, K.K., “Instrumentation measurement and Analysis”,

TataMcGraw Hill publishing Company Limited, 2004.

31

PTEE2253 CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P C 3 1 0 4 AIM To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of linear control theory and design of control system. OBJECTIVES To understand the methods of representation of systems and to desire their transfer

function models. To provide adequate knowledge in the time response of systems and steady state

error analysis. To accord basic knowledge in obtaining the open loop and closed–loop frequency

responses of systems. To understand the concept of stability of control system and methods of stability

analysis. To study the three ways of designing compensation for a control system.

UNIT I SYSTEMS AND THEIR REPRESENTATION 9 Basic elements in control systems – Open and closed loop systems – Electrical analogy of mechanical and thermal systems – Transfer function – Synchros – AC and DC servomotors – Block diagram reduction techniques – Signal flow graphs. UNIT II TIME RESPONSE 9 Time response – Time domain specifications – Types of test input – I and II order system response – Error coefficients – Generalized error series – Steady state error – P, PI, PID modes of feed back control. UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE 9 Frequency response – Bode plot – Polar plot – Determination of closed loop response from open loop response – Correlation between frequency domain and time domain specifications. UNIT III STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEM 9 Characteristics equation – Location of roots in S plane for stability – Routh Hurwitz criterion – Root locus construction – Effect of pole, zero addition – Gain margin and phase margin – Nyquist stability criterion. UNIT IV COMPENSATOR DESIGN 9 Performance criteria – Lag, lead and lag-lead networks – Compensator design using bode plots.

L : 45 T : 15 TOTAL : 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, ‘Control Systems Engineering’, New Age International

Publishers, 2003. 2. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control systems, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003. REFERENCES 1. K. Ogata, ‘Modern Control Engineering’, 4th edition, PHI, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Norman S. Nise, Control Systems Engineering, 4th Edition, John Wiley, New Delhi,

2007. 3. Samarajit Ghosh, Control systems, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2004 4. M. Gopal, ‘Control Systems, Principles and Design’, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,

2002.

32

PTEC2312 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLER L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To introduce Microprocessor Intel 8085 and 8086 and the Micro Controller 8051 OBJECTIVES

To study the Architecture of 8085 & 8086, 8051 To study the addressing modes & instruction set of 8085 & 8051. To introduce the need & use of Interrupt structure 8085 & 8051. To develop skill in simple program writing for 8051 & 8085 and applications To introduce commonly used peripheral / interfacing ICs

UNIT I 8085 and 8086 PROCESSOR 9 Hardware Architecture pintouts - Signals – Memory interfacing – I/O ports and data transfer concepts – Timing Diagram – Interrupt structure. UNIT II PROGRAMMING OF 8085 PROCESSOR 9 Instruction format and addressing modes – Assembly language format – Data transfer, data manipulation & control instructions – Programming: Loop structure with counting & Indexing - Look up table - Subroutine instructions - stack. UNIT III PERIPHERAL INTERFACING FOR 8085 9 Study of Architecture and programming of ICs: 8255 PPI, 8259 PIC, 8251 USART, 8279 Key board display controller and 8253 Timer/ Counter – Interfacing with 8085 - A/D and D/A converter interfacing. UNIT IV 8051 MICRO CONTROLLER 9 Functional block diagram - Instruction format and addressing modes – Timing Diagram Interrupt structure – Timer –I/O ports – Serial communication. UNIT V MICRO CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING & APPLICATIONS 9 Data Transfer, Manipulation, Control & I/O instructions – Simple programming exercises key board and display interface – Closed loop control of servo motor- stepper motor control - Washing Machine Control. TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, Krishna Kant Eastern Company Edition,

Prentice – Hall of India, New Delhi , 2007. 2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice Gilli Mazidi, R.D.Kinely ‘The 8051 Micro Controller

and Embedded Systems’, PHI Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2003. REFERENCES 1. R.S. Gaonkar, ‘Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Application’, Wiley

Eastern Ltd., New Delhi. 2. The 8088 & 8086 Microprocessors , Walter A Tribal & Avtar Singh, Pearson, 2007,

Fourth Edition.

33

PTEE2204 DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS L T P C 3 1 0 4

AIM To master the design and applications of linear, tree, and graph structures. To understand various algorithm design and analysis techniques. UNIT I LINEAR STRUCTURES 9 Abstract Data Types (ADT) – List ADT – array-based implementation – linked list implementation – cursor-based linked lists – doubly-linked lists – applications of lists – Stack ADT – Queue ADT – circular queue implementation – Applications of stacks and queues UNIT II TREE STRUCTURES 9 Need for non-linear structures – Tree ADT – tree traversals – left child right sibling data structures for general trees – Binary Tree ADT – expression trees – applications of trees – binary search tree ADT UNIT III BALANCED SEARCH TREES AND INDEXING 9 AVL trees – Binary Heaps – B-Tree – Hashing – Separate chaining – open addressing – Linear probing UNIT IV GRAPHS 9 Definitions – Topological sort – breadth-first traversal - shortest-path algorithms – minimum spanning tree – Prim's and Kruskal's algorithms – Depth-first traversal – biconnectivity – euler circuits – applications of graphs UNIT V ALGORITHM DESIGN AND ANALYSIS 9 Greedy algorithms – Divide and conquer – Dynamic programming – backtracking – branch and bound – Randomized algorithms – algorithm analysis – asymptotic notations – recurrences – NP-complete problems

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. M. A. Weiss, “Data Structures and Algorithm Analysis in C”, Pearson Education Asia,

2002. 2. ISRD Group, “Data Structures using C”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,

2006. REFERENCES 1. A. V. Aho, J. E. Hopcroft, and J. D. Ullman, “Data Structures and Algorithms”, Pearson

Education, 1983. 2. R. F. Gilberg, B. A. Forouzan, “Data Structures: A Pseudocode approach with C”,

Second Edition, Thomson India Edition, 2005. 3. Sara Baase and A. Van Gelder, “Computer Algorithms”, Third Edition, Pearson

Education, 2000. 4. T. H. Cormen, C. E. Leiserson, R. L. Rivest, and C. Stein, "Introduction to algorithms",

Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, 2001.

34

PTCS2312 OBJECT- ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LAB L T P C 0 0 3 2 AIM To develop object-oriented programming skills using C++ and Java

1. Function overloading, default arguments in C++ 2. Simple class design in C++, namespaces, objects creations 3. Class design in C++ using dynamic memory allocation, destructor, copy

constructor 4. Operator overloading, friend functions 5. Overloading assignment operator, type conversions 6. Inheritance, run-time polymorphism 7. Template design in C++ 8. I/O, Throwing and Catching exceptions 9. Program development using STL 10. Simple class designs in Java with Javadoc 11. Designing Packages with Javadoc comments 12. Interfaces and Inheritance in Java 13. Exceptions handling in Java 14. Java I/O 15. Design of multi-threaded programs in Java TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

REQUIREMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS

S.No. Description of Equipment Quantity required Hardware Required

1. Computers (Pentium-4) 40 Nos with one server

2. Dot matrix printer 3 Nos

3. Laser Printer 2 Nos.

4. UPS (5 KVA) 2

Software Required

5. Turbo C++ 40 Nodes

6. (Java 2 SDK) JDK 5.0 update 6 (1.5.0 - Internal Version No.)

40 Nos.

35

PTEI2303 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION – II L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To equip the students with relevant knowledge to suit the industrial requirement. OBJECTIVES To study about humidity and moisture measurements. To study about mechanical flow meters and their installation. To study about area flow meters, mass flow meters and calibration. To know elaborately about non-content type flow meters. To know about various types of level measurements adopted in industry

environment. UNIT I VARIABLE HEAD TYPE FLOWMETERS 9 Variable head type flow meters: – Orifice plate – Venturi tube – Flow nozzle – Dall tube – Installation of head flow meters – Pitot tube. UNIT II QUANTITY METERS, AREA FLOW METERS AND MASS FLOW

METERS 9 Positive displacement flow meters: – Nutating disc, Reciprocating piston, Oval gear and Helix type flow meters – Inferential meter – Turbine flow meter – Area flow meter: – Rotameter – Theory and installation – Mass flow meter: – Angular momentum – Thermal, Coriolis type mass flow meters – Calibration of flow meters – Dynamic weighing methods. UNIT III ELECTRICAL TYPE FLOW METER 9 Principle and constructional details of electromagnetic flow meter – Ultrasonic flow meters – Laser Doppler anemometer – Vortex shedding flow meter – Target flow meter – Guidelines for selection of flow meter – Open channel flow measurement – Solid flow rate measurement UNIT IV LEVEL MEASUREMENT 9 Level measurement: – Float, Displacer type – Bubbler system – Electrical level gauge: – Resistance – Capacitance – Nuclear radiation and Ultrasonic type – Boiler drum level measurement: – Differential pressure method – Hydra step method. UNIT V MEASUREMENT OF VISCOSITY, HUMIDITY AND MOISTURE 9 Viscosity: – Rotameter type viscometer – Consistency meters – Dry and wet bulb psychrometers – Hot wire electrode type hygrometer – Dew cell – Electrolysis type hygrometer – Commercial type dew point meter – Moisture measurement: – Different methods of Moisture measurement – Application of moisture measurement .

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Doebelin, E.O., “Measurement systems Application and Design”, International Student

Edition, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill Book Company, 2004 2. Liptak, B.G., “ Instrumentation Engineers Handbook (Measurement)”, CRC Press,

2005 3. A.K. Sawhney, ‘A course in Electrical & Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation’, 4. Dhanpat Rai and Co (P) Ltd., 2004. REFERENCES 1. Jain, R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurments”, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1999. 2. Eckman, D.P., “ Industrial Instrumentation”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 1990

36

PTEI2352 PROCESS CONTROL L T P C 3 1 0 4 AIM To provide basic knowledge of controllers, find control elements and the processes. OBJECTIVES To study the basic characteristics of first order and higher order processes. To get adequate knowledge about the characteristics of various controller modes

and methods of tuning of controller. To study about various complex control schemes. To study about the construction, characteristics and application of control valves. To study the five selected unit operations and a case study of distillation column

control UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 Need for process control – mathematical model of first order level, pressure and thermal processes – higher order process – interacting and non-interacting systems – continuous and batch processes – self-regulation – servo and regulator operations. UNIT II CONTROL ACTIONS AND CONTROLLERS 9 Basic control actions – characteristics of on-off, proportional, single-speed floating, integral and derivative control modes – P+I, P+D and P+I+D control modes – pneumatic and electronic controllers to realize various control actions UNIT III OPTIMUM CONTROLLER SETTINGS 9 Evaluation criteria – IAE, ISE, ITAE and ¼ decay ratio – determination of optimum settings for mathematically described processes using time response and frequency response – Tuning – Process reaction curve method – Ziegler Nichols method – Damped oscillation method. UNIT IV MULTILOOP CONTROL 9 Feed-forward control – ratio control- cascade control – inferential control – split-range control – introduction to multivariable control – examples from distillation column and boiler systems. UNIT V FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT 9 I/P converter – pneumatic and electric actuators – valve positioner – control valves – characteristics of control valves – inherent and installed characteristics – valve body – commercial valve bodies – control valve sizing – cavitation and flashing – selection criteria. L : 45, T : 15, TOTAL : 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Stephanopoulis, G, Chemical Process Control, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1990. 2. Eckman. D.P., Automatic Process Control, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 1993. REFERENCES 1. Pollard A.Process Control, Heinemann educational books, London, 1971. 2. Harriott. P., Process Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1991.

37

PTEC2361 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C 3 1 0 4 AIM To introduce the concept of analyzing discrete time signals & systems in the time and frequency domain. OBJECTIVES

To classify signals and systems & their mathematical representation. To analyse the discrete time systems. To study various transformation techniques & their computation. To study about filters and their design for digital implementation. To study about a programmable digital signal processor & quantization effects.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 Classification of systems: Continuous, discrete, linear, causal, stable, dynamic, recursive, time variance; classification of signals: continuous and discrete, energy and power; mathematical representation of signals; spectral density; sampling techniques, quantization, quantization error, Nyquist rate, aliasing effect. Digital signal representation. UNIT II DISCRETE TIME SYSTEM ANALYSIS 9 Z-transform and its properties, inverse z-transforms; difference equation – Solution by z-transform, application to discrete systems - Stability analysis, frequency response – Convolution – Fourier transform of discrete sequence – Discrete Fourier series. UNIT III DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM & COMPUTATION 9 DFT properties, magnitude and phase representation - Computation of DFT using FFT algorithm – DIT & DIF - FFT using radix 2 – Butterfly structure. UNIT IV DESIGN OF DIGITAL FILTERS 9 FIR & IIR filter realization – Parallel & cascade forms. FIR design: Windowing Techniques – Need and choice of windows – Linear phase characteristics. IIR design: Analog filter design - Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations; digital design using impulse invariant and bilinear transformation - Warping, prewarping - Frequency transformation. UNIT V DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 9 Introduction – Architecture – Features – Addressing Formats – Functional modes - Introduction to Commercial Processors L : 45, T : 15 , TOTAL : 60 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. J.G. Proakis and D.G. Manolakis, ‘Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and

Applications’, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003 / PHI. 2. S.K. Mitra, ‘Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach’, Tata McGraw

Hill, New Delhi, 2001.

REFERENCES 1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer and John R. Buck, ‘Discrete – Time Signal

Processing’, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003. 2. Emmanuel C Ifeachor and Barrie W Jervis ,”Digital Signal Processing – A Practical

approach” Pearson Education, Second edition, 2002. 3. Steven W. Smith, “The Scientist and Engineer's Guide to Digital Signal Processing”,

Second Edition, California Technical Publishing San Diego, lifornia.(www.DSPguide.com)

4. B. Venkataramani, M. Bhaskar, ‘Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Programming and Applications’, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2003.

38

PTEI2304 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY L T P C 0 0 3 2 OBJECTIVE The training gained by the student in this area will be of immerse help and ease for him in any industrial establishment.

1. Discharge coefficient of orifice plate 2. Calibration of pressure gauge 3. Torque measurement 4. Viscosity measurement 5. Vacuum pressure measurement 6. Level measurement using d/p transmitter 7. UV – Visible spectrophotometer 8. IR spectrophotometer 9. pH meter standardization and measurement of pH values of solutions 10. Measurements of conductivity of test solutions.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS DETAILED SYLLABUS: 1. DISCHARGE COEFFICIENT OF ORIFICE PLATE AIM To find the discharge co-efficient of orifice plate. EXERCISE Find the discharge co-efficient Cd. PROCEDURE

1. Open the outlet value completely and switch on the motor. 2. Now open the inlet value. 3. With a particular operating a the inlet value note the reading on two time of

manometer and computer the value of x. 4. Compute the actual discharge using the collecting task and stop watch and the

theoretical discharge. 5. Now change the opening of the inlet values and note the reading of monometer

and compare and discharge. 6. Calculate the value of Cd.

EQUIPMENT

1. Orifice meter – 1 No 2 Stopwatch – 1 No

2. CALIBRATION OF PRESSURE GAUGE AIM

To calibrate the given pressure gauge using dead weight tester. EXERCISE

Calibrate the pressure gauge and discuss the graphs (i) Actual pressure Vs true pressure (ii) Actual pressure Vs Error

PROCEDURE 1. A standard weight of 0.5 Kg/cm2 is kept on the piston plate form.

39

2. Pressure is applied to the chamber containing oil by rotating the hand operated wheel in the anti clock wise direction.

3. This is continued until piston carrying weight shows a list. 4. In the movement the pressure acts equally on the piston as well as on the

gauge. 5. The reading shown by the gauge is taken as actual reading. 6. The same procedure is repeated for increasing weights on the platform in steps

of 0.5 Kg/cm2 and actual reading shown by the gauge is noted down. 7. Graphs are drawn between

i. Actual pressure Vs true pressure. ii. Actual pressure Vs Error.

EQUIPMENT 1. Dead weight tester - 1 No 2. Pressure gauge and standard weight - 1 No

3. TORQUE MEASUREMENT

AIM To determine the due to dead weights using strain torsion meter and to determine the unknown weight.

EXERCISE

Find the % error of the torque measurement.

PROCEDURE 1. Connect the strain gauge torsion meter to the power supply. 2. Now change or hanger is fixed to the shift, the torque is to subject. 3. Now keep the dead weights in the hanger gently. 4. Note the indicated torque value from the strain gauge torsion indicator. 5. Repeat the same for different weights (say 1Kg, 2Kg,) and tabulate the

readings. 6. Now repeat the same procedure for the given unknown weight. 7. The unknown weight is interpreted from graph.

EQUIPMENT

1. Strain gauge torsion meter – 1 No 2. Dead weight – 1 No

4. MEASUREMENT OF VISCOSITY USING SAYBOLT VISCOMETER AIM To measure the viscosity using saybolt viscometer.

EXERCISE Measure the viscosity using saybolt viscometer and draw the graph between voltage on x-axis and dynamo viscosity on y-axis.

PROEDURE 1. Viscosity determination shall be done in room free from dust rapid changes in

temperature. 2. The oil in the cup and allow it to drain. 3. Pour oil in the cup and allow it to drain. 4. The cark stopper should be installed at the lower and of thetube.

40

5. The cark should be tight enough to prevent escape of oil. 6. Since the oil should be stirred well until a constant temperature is maintained

both in the water and the oil. 7. After thermal equilibrium has been obtained. 8. Remove the thermometer from the oil bath. 9. 60ml of flask should be kept in position to collect oil from the tube. 10. Open the cork and start the stopwatch. 11. Record the time for the fall of 60mm of oil. 12. Vary the temperature of oil using temperature controller record the actual

temperature. 13. Draw the graph between voltage on x-axis and dynamo viscosity on y-axis.

EQUIPMENT 1. Thermometer – 1 No 2. Stop watch – 1 No 3. 60ml flask – 1 No 4. Water – 1 No

5. VACUUM PRESSURE MEASUREMENT AIM To study the vacuum pressure gauge setup and measure the unknown vacuum pressure. EXERCISE

i. Maintain the vacuum pressure in the cylinderand switch on the vacuum pressure transmitter setup.

ii. Measure the output voltage in Volts for the corresponding vacuum ppressure in mbars.

iii. Vary the vacuum pressure in cylinder and follow the step 2 for different values. iv. Draw the graph between ouput voltage Vs. vacuum pressure in mbars.

EQUIPMENT

Vacuum presuure setup Vacuum pressure transmitter Voltmeter

6. LEVEL MEASUREMENT USING DPT AIM

To measure the level of liquid in the tank with the differential pressure transmitter and to calibrate the zero and span of the level interns of 4-20 mA.

EXERCISE Measure the liquid level and calibrate it interms of 4-20 mA. PROCEDURE

a) Weight the empty container and calibrate the daters level to 4mA. b) Fill the container with the water and calibrate the full level to 20mA. c) Now perform the experiment in the ascending order in steps of 5cms. d) Repeat the same procedure for the descending order. e) Tabulate the readings. f) Draw the hastenis

41

EQUIPMENT 1. DPT - 1 No 2. Container - 1 No

7. UV-VISIBLE SPECTROPHOTOMETER

AIM To find out the absorbance, % of transmittance and concentration for a given test solution, using UV spectrophotometer.

EXERCISE Find out the absorbance, % of transmittance and concentration of the given Test solutions.

PROCEDURE 1. Switch on the UV-spectrophotometer. 2. Switch on the lamp by electing the names of rating disc. 3. Place the reference solution in the first column of rotating disc. 4. Use any other column to place the test solution. 5. Select the operating mode. There are 4 types of operating modes:

i. Single wavelength ii. Multiple wavelength iii. Scanning mode iv. Time scan mode

6. Select the mode. The 3 parameters to be measures are absorbance, % of transmittance and concentration for a given test solution. Note down the result from the 1st parameter.

EQUIPMENT

1. UV spectrophotometer – 1 No. 2. Curettes

8. IR – SPECTROPHOTOMETER AIM To measure and analyze the absorbance, percentage transmission concentration of the given samples using IR spectroscopy EXERCISE *wait for 3o minutes for IR source to be operated, then take the readings. For IR wavelength is ABOVE 300nm : Place reference sample in CELL No 2. Place the sample to be analyzed in cell NO 1 or 3 or 4 or 5 Single wave length: As the name suggests, this mode is used t take readings at one wave length. Depends on the absorbance mode, transmittance mode, concentration mode the data will be displayed on the monitor. Each subsequent data can be transferred just by pressing Key of 117.After completion of the data transfer, Press ESC key to stop the reception.

42

Multi wavelength analysis: This mode is similar to single wave length except that it takes readings at more than one wavelength. With this mode, readings can be taken at minimum 2 discrete readings and maximum 8 discrete wavelength. Any 8 wavelength can be selected in the range 200nm to 1000nm.Note the maximum wavelength of absorption . EQUIPMENT 1. IR spectrophotometer sl-117 2.cuvette 3.Solution 4.Printer 9. Ph – Meter Measurement of ph - value of Test Solutions AIM To measure the PH values of the test solutions using pH-meter. EXERCISE Find the pH values of the test solutions.

PROCEDURE

1. Switch on the PH meter 2. Connect the glass electrode to the PH-meter 3. Take distilled water in a beaker and insert electrode in the beaker 4. The PH meter should show approximately test solutions. If Acidic than the PH is

< 7 and if alkaline than the PH >7 EQUIPMENT

1. pH meter – 1 No. 2. Test solutions – few types 3. Beaker – 2 Nos. 4. Stand – 1 No.

10. MEASUREMENTS OF CONDUCTIVITY OF TEST SOLUTIONS. AIM To measure the conductivity of the given solution. EXERCISE

(i) Solution under test is taken in a beaker. (ii) Electrode is immersed into the solution (iii) The electrode terminal is connected to display unit. (iv) Digital display shows the conductivity of the given solution in mho (v) Repeat the procedure fro different samples. (vi) Switch on the supply.

EQUIPMENT

(i) Solution under test. (ii) Conductivity electrode (iii) Conductivity meter setup with display.

43

PTEI2402 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To illustrate the concept of programmable logic controllers and distributed control system. OBJECTIVES To give an introductory knowledge about PLC and the programming languages. To give adequate knowledge about of application of PLC. To give basic knowledge in the architecture and local control unit of distributed

control system. To give adequate information in the interfaces used in DCS. To give basic knowledge about Computer Controlled Systems.

UNIT I PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9 Evolution of PLC’s – Components of PLC – Advantages over relay logic – Architecture of PLC– Programming devices - Discrete and Analog I/O modules – Programming languages –– Ladder diagram – Programming timers and counters – Design of PLC.

UNIT II APPLICATIONS OF PLC 9 Instructions in PLC – Program control instructions, math instructions, sequencer instructions – Use of PC as PLC – Application of PLC – Case study of bottle filling system. UNIT III COMPUTER CONTROLLED SYSTEMS 9 Basic building blocks of Computer controlled systems – SCADA – data Acquisition System – supervisory Control – Direct digital Control . UNIT IV DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9 DCS - Architectures – Comparison – Local control unit – Process interfacing issues – Communication facilities. UNIT V INTERFACES IN DCS 9 Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces – Operator displays - Engineering interfaces – Low level and high level engineering interfaces – General purpose computers in DCS. TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Petruzella, ‘Industrial Electronics’, McGraw Hill, Second edition, 1997. 2. Michael P. Lukas, ‘Distributed Control System’, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., Canada,

1986. 3. John. W. Webb Ronald A Reis - Programmable Logic Controllers - Principles and

Applications, Fourth edition, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1998. REFERENCES 1. T. Hughes, ‘Programmable Logic Controllers’, ISA press,2007. 2. Krishna Kant – Computer based Industrial Control, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1997.

44

PTEI2353 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM The course is designed to introduce the fundamental concepts and design of digital system. OBJECTIVES

To introduce the most common digital logic families. To provide introduction to programmable logic devices such as PLA, PAL, FPGA,

CPLD etc. To provide introduction to Digital Memories. Such as ROM, RAM, SRAM, etc. To discuss case studies on Digital System design.

UNIT I DIGITAL LOGIC FAMILIES 9 TTL, CMOS, NMOS, Dynamic MOS , ECL, I2L, Operating conditions, Parameters, Interpreting data sheets. Power supply grounding considerations for digital ICs, TTL – to – CMOS Interface, CMOS – to – TTL interface.

UNIT II PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES 9 Programmable logic Arrays, Programmable array logic, Realizing logic function using Multiplexers, Decoders, ROM, PLA, PAL. Design of sequential Networks using PAL, PLA – Programmable Gate arrays – FPGA – CPLD.

UNIT III DIGITAL MEMORIES 9 The role of Memory in a system – memory types and terminology – ROM – types of ROM – RAM – SRAM – DRAM – Expanding word size and capacity – Applications. UNIT IV DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN CASE STUDIES 9

Multiplexing displays – Frequency counters – Time measurement – Digital voltmeter – PRBS generator – Interfacing with flash memory.

UNIT V DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY 9 Teatability – Ad hoc design for testing techniques – controllability and observability by means of scan registers – Generic scan based designa – Board level and system level DFT approaches. TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Charles H.Roth, ‘Fundamentals Logic Design’, Jaico Publishing, IV edition, 2002. 2. Donald. P. Leach, Albert paul Malvino, Goutam Suha,’Digital Principles and

Applications’ Tata McGraw – Hill , Sixth edition . 3. Miron Abramonici, Melvin. A. Rrewer, Arthur.D. Friedman,Digital system testing and

testable design, Jaico publishing house. REFERENCES 1. Theodore. F. Bogart,’ Introduction to Digital Circuits’, McGraw – Hill International edn.1992 2. Ronald J.Tocci, Neal .S. Widmer,’Digital System Principles and Applications’, Pearson

Education, 8th edition, Asia, 2002. 3. On demand public key management for wireless Ad Hoc networks. 4. Efficient hybrid security mechanisms for heterogeneous sensor networks. 5. Performance analysis of Handoff techniques based on Mobile Ip, TCP – migrate and

SIP.

45

PTEI2302 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS LT P C 3 0 0 3 AIM The course is designed to equip the students with an adequate knowledge of a number of analytical tools which are useful for clinical analysis in hospitals, drugs and pharmaceutical laboratories and above all for environmental Pollution Monitoring. OBJECTIVES To provide various techniques and methods of analysis which occur in the various

regions of the spectrum. These are the powerful tools used in Clinical and Research laboratories.

To give unique methods of separation of closely similar materials, the most powerful being gas chromatography.

To study important methods of analysis of industrial gases. Awareness and control of pollution in the environment is of vital importance.

To bring out the latest ideas on ion-selective electrodes as well as biosensors which have potential applications in medical field, food and beverage industries.

To provide the important electromagnetic resonance and microscopic methods of analysis. Further they are both sensitive and specific and often are characterized by good accuracy. NMR & ESR and microscopic techniques are useful in structure determination.

UNIT I COLORIMETRY AND SPECTROPHOTOMETRY 9 Special methods of analysis – Beer-Lambert law – Colorimeters – UV-Visible spectrophotometers – Single and double beam instruments – Sources and detectors – IR Spectrophotometers – Types – Attenuated total reflectance flame photometers – Atomic absorption spectrophotometers – Sources and detectors – FTIR spectrophotometers – Flame emission photometers – Fluorescence spectrophotometer UNIT II CHROMATOGRAPHY 9 Different techniques – Gas chromatography – Detectors – Liquid chromatographs – Applications – High-pressure liquid chromatographs – Applications. UNIT III INDUSTRIAL GAS ANALYZERS AND POLLUTION MONITORING INSTRUMENTS 9 Types of gas analyzers – Oxygen, NO2 and H2S types, IR analyzers, thermal conductivity analyzers, analysis based on ionization of gases. Air pollution due to carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, nitrogen oxides, sulphur dioxide estimation - Dust and smoke measurements. UNIT IV pH METERS AND DISSOLVED COMPONENT ANALYZERS 9 Principle of pH measurement, glass electrodes, hydrogen electrodes, reference electrodes, selective ion electrodes, ammonia electrodes, cyclic voltametry, biosensors, dissolved oxygen analyzer – Sodium analyzer – Silicon analyzer. UNIT V ELECTRO MAGNETIC RESONANCE AND MICROSCOPIC

TECHNIQUES 9 NMR – Basic principles – NMR spectrometer - Applications. Electron spin Resonance spectroscopy – Basic principles, Instrumentation and applications. Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM), - Basic principles, Instrumentation and applications. Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) – Basic principles – Instrumentation and applications. Mass spectrometers – Different types – Applications.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

46

TEXT BOOKS 1. G.W. Ewing, ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’, McGraw Hill, 1992. 2. R.K.Jain, Mechanical and Industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,

1999 3. H.H. Willard, L.L. Merritt, J.A. Dean, F.A. Settle, ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’,

CBS publishing & distribution, 1995.

REFERENCES 1. Robert D. Braun, ‘Introduction to Instrumental Analysis’, McGraw Hill, Singapore,

1987. 2. R.S. Khandpur, ‘Handbook of Analytical Instruments’, Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co.

Ltd., 2003. 3. Liptak, B.G, Process Measurement and Analysis, Chilton Book Company, 1995 .

PTEI2351 MODERN ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To provide adequate knowkedge in digital instruments, display devices and virtual instrumentation. OBJECTIVES

To make the students to gain a clear knowledge of the basics of digital instruments and measurement techniques.

To have an adequate knowledge in various display and recording devices. To have an elaborate study of communication standards To have a detailed study of virtual instrumentation and its applications.

UNIT I DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS 9 Digital voltmeters and multimeters –Microprocessor based DMM with auto ranging and self diagnostic features – Digital IC tester –Frequeny, period, time interval and pulse width measurement. UNIT II DISPLAY AND RECORDING DEVICES 9 Cathode ray oscilloscope – General purpose and advanced types – Sampling and storage scopes – Wave analyzers – Signal and function generators – Distortion factor meter – Q meter – Seven segment and dot matrix display – X-Y recorders – Magnetic tape recorders – Digital recording and data loggers. UNIT III RS 232 AND RS 485 9 Modern instrumentation and control systems – OSI model – EIA 232 Interface standard - EIA 485 Interface standard - EIA 422 Interface standard – 20 mA current loop – Serial Interface converters. UNIT IV VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION 9 Virtual instrumentation – Definition, flexibility – Block diagram and architecture of virtual instruments – Virtual instruments versus traditional instruments – Review of software in virtual instrumentation - VI programming techniques – VI , sub VI,loops and charts ,arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures, formula nodes, string and file input / output.

47

UNIT V DATA ACQUISITION CARDS 9 DAQ cards for VI applications – Requirements – DAQ modules with serial communication – Design of digital voltmeters with transducer input – Design of ON/OFF controller for temperature control applications. TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Chris Nadovich, ‘Synthetic Instruments Concepts and Applications’, Elsevier, 2005. 2. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, ‘Labview Advanced Programming

Techniques’, CRC Press, Second Edition, 2007. 3. S. Gupta and J.P. Gupta, ‘PC interfacing for data acquisition and process Control’,

second Edition, Instrument Society of America, 1994. 4. Kalsi H.S., “Electronic Instrumentation”, Second Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company,

New Delhi, 2004. 5. Sawhney A.K., “A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and

Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai and sons, New Delhi, 2003. REFERENCES 1. Rahman Jamal and Herbert Picklik, LabVIEW – Applications and Solutions, National

Instruments Release ISBN 0130964239.Rah 2. William Buchanan ‘Computer Busses’, CRC Press, 2000. 3. Rangan C.S., Sharma G.R., Mani V.S.V., “Instrumentation devices and Systems”, Tata

Mc Graw Hill Company, New Delhi,.2002. 4. Joseph J Carr, “Elements of Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement”, Third

Edition, Pearson Education, 2003. 5. David A. Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation and measurements”, Second Edition,

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003. 6. Gupta J.B., “A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”,

12th Edition, Katson Publishing House, 2003. PTEI2403 VLSI DESIGN L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To introduce the technology and concepts of VLSI. OBJECTIVES To introduce MOS theory / Manufacturing Technology. To study inverter / counter logic / stick / machine diagram / sequential circuits. To study address / memory / arithmetic circuits. To introduce FPGA architecture / principles / system design. To get familiarised with VHDL programming behavioural/Structural/concurrent/

process. UNIT I BASIC MOS TRANSISTOR 9 Enhancement mode and Depletion mode – Fabrication (NMOS, PMOS, CMOS, BiCMOS) Technology – NMOS transistor current equation – Second order effects – MOS Transistor Model.

48

UNIT II NMOS AND CMOS INVERTER AND GATES 9 NMOS and CMOS inverter – Determination of pull up / pull down ratios – Stick diagram – lambda based rules – Super buffers – BiCMOS & steering logic. UNIT III SUB-SYSTEM DESIGN AND LAYOUT 9 Structured design of combinational circuits – Dynamic CMOS & clocking – Tally circuits – (NAND-NAND, NOR-NOR and AOI logic) – EXOR structure – Multiplexer structures – Barrel shifter, high speed adder and multiplier circuits. UNIT IV DESIGN OF COMBINATIONAL ELEMENTS AND REGULAR ARRAY LOGIC 9 NMOS PLA – Programmable Logic Devices - Finite State Machine PLA – Introduction to FPGA. UNIT V VHDL PROGRAMMING 9 RTL Design – simulation and synthesis - Combinational logic – Types – Operators – Packages – Sequential circuit – Sub-programs – Test benches. (Examples: adders, counters, flipflops, FSM, Multiplexers / Demultiplexers). TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. D.A.Pucknell, K.Eshraghian, ‘Basic VLSI Design’, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi, 2003. 2. Rabey, J.M., Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective, Prentice Hall, 1955 3. Bhasker, J., VHDL Primer, Prentice Hall 1995 REFERENCES 1. Eugene D.Fabricius, ‘Introduction to VLSI Design’, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990. 2. N.H.Weste, ‘Principles of CMOS VLSI Design’, Pearson Eduction, India, 2002. 3. Zainalatsedin Navabi, ‘VHDL Analysis and Modelling of Digital Systems’, 2nd Edition,

Tata McGraw Hill, 1998. 4. Douglas Perry, ‘VHDL Programming by example’, Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2003 PTEI2404 FIBRE OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTS L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To contribute to the knowledge of Fibre optics and Laser Instrumentation and its Industrial and Medical Application. OBJECTIVES To expose the students to the basic concepts of optical fibres and their properties. To provide adequate knowledge about the Industrial applications of optical fibres. To expose the students to the Laser fundamentals. To provide adequate knowledge about Industrial application of lasers. To provide adequate knowledge about holography and Medical applications of Lasers.

49

UNIT I OPTICAL FIBRES AND THEIR PROPERTIES 9 Principles of light propagation through a fibre - Different types of fibres and their properties, fibre characteristics – Absorption losses – Scattering losses – Dispersion – Connectors and splicers – Fibre termination – Optical sources – Optical detectors. UNIT II INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF OPTICAL FIBRES 9 Fibre optic sensors – Fibre optic instrumentation system – Different types of modulators – Interferometric method of measurement of length – Moire fringes – Measurement of pressure, temperature, current, voltage, liquid level and strain. UNIT III LASER FUNDAMENTALS 9 Fundamental characteristics of lasers – Three level and four level lasers – Properties of laser – Laser modes – Resonator configuration – Q-switching and mode locking – Cavity damping – Types of lasers – Gas lasers, solid lasers, liquid lasers, semiconductor lasers. UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF LASERS 9 Laser for measurement of distance, length, velocity, acceleration, current, voltage and Atmospheric effect – Material processing – Laser heating, welding, melting and trimming of material – Removal and vaporization. UNIT V HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATIONS 9 Holography – Basic principle - Methods – Holographic interferometry and application, Holography for non-destructive testing – Holographic components – Medical applications of lasers, laser and tissue interactive – Laser instruments for surgery, removal of tumors of vocal cards, brain surgery, plastic surgery, gynaecology and oncology.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS 1. J.M. Senior, ‘Optical Fibre Communication – Principles and Practice’, Prentice Hall of

India, 1985. 2. J. Wilson and J.F.B. Hawkes, ‘Introduction to Opto Electronics’, Prentice Hall of India,

2001.

REFERENCES 1. G. Keiser, ‘Optical Fibre Communication’, McGraw Hill, 1995. 2. M. Arumugam, ‘Optical Fibre Communication and Sensors’, Anuradha Agencies, 2002. 3. John F. Read, ‘Industrial Applications of Lasers’, Academic Press, 1978. 4. Monte Ross, ‘Laser Applications’, McGraw Hill, 1968 PTCS2351 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I PROBLEM SOLVING 9 Introduction – Agents – Problem formulation – uninformed search strategies – heuristics – informed search strategies – constraint satisfaction UNIT II KNOWLEDGE AND REASON 9 Logical agents – propositional logic – inferences – first-order logic – inference in first-order logic – forward chaining – backward chaining – resolution

50

UNIT III PLANNING 9 Planning with state-space search – partial-order planning – planning graphs – planning and acting in the real world UNIT IV UNCERTAIN KNOWLEDGE AND REASONING 9 Uncertainty – review of probability - probabilistic Reasoning – Bayesian networks – inferences in Bayesian networks – Temporal models – Hidden Markov models UNIT V LEARNING 9 Learning from observation - Inductive learning – Decision trees – Explanation based learning – Statistical Learning methods - Reinforcement Learning

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK 1. S. Russel and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence – A Modern Approach”, Second Edition,

Pearson Education, 2003. REFERENCES 1. David Poole, Alan Mackworth, Randy Goebel, ”Computational Intelligence : a logical

approach”, Oxford University Press, 1998. 2. G. Luger, “Artificial Intelligence: Structures and Strategies for complex problem

solving”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2002. 3. J. Nilsson, “Artificial Intelligence: A new Synthesis”, Elsevier Publishers, 1998. PTCS2071 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I INSTRUCTION SET ARCHITECTURE 9 Introduction to computer architecture - Review of digital design – Instructions and addressing – procedures and data – assembly language programs – instruction set variations UNIT II ARITHMETIC/LOGIC UNIT 9 Number representation – design of adders – design of simple ALUs – design of Multipliers and dividers – design of floating point arithmetic unit UNIT III DATA PATH AND CONTROL 9 Instruction execution steps – control unit synthesis – microprogramming – pipelining – pipeline performance UNIT IV MEMORY SYSTEM 9 Main Memory concepts – types of memory – cache memory organization – secondary storage – virtual memory – paging UNIT V I/O AND INTERFACES 9 I/O devices – I/O programming – polling – interrupts – DMA – buses – links – interfacing – context switching – threads and multithreading

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

51

TEXT BOOKS 1. B. Parhami, “Computer Architecture”, Oxford University Press, 2005. 2. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko Vranesic and Safwat Zaky, “Computer Organization”, Fifth

Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002 REFERENCES 1. David A. Patterson and John L. Hennessy, “Computer Organization and Design: The

Hardware/Software interface”, Third Edition, Elsevier, 2004. 2. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture – Designing for

Performance”, Seventh Edition, Pearson Education, 2006. 3. Miles Murdocca “Computers Architecture and Organization An Integrated approach”,

Wiley India pvt Ltd, 2007 4. John D. Carpinelli, “Computer systems organization and Architecture”, Pearson

Education, 2001. PTCS2411 OPERATING SYSTEMS L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To learn the various aspects of operating systems such as process management, memory management, file systems, and I/O management UNIT I PROCESSES AND THREADS 9 Introduction to operating systems – review of computer organization – operating system structures – system calls – system programs – system structure – virtual machines. Processes: Process concept – Process scheduling – Operations on processes – Cooperating processes – Interprocess communication – Communication in client-server systems. Case study: IPC in Linux. Threads: Multi-threading models – Threading issues. Case Study: Pthreads library UNIT II PROCESS SCHEDULING AND SYNCHRONIZATION 9 CPU Scheduling: Scheduling criteria – Scheduling algorithms – Multiple-processor scheduling – Real time scheduling – Algorithm Evaluation. Case study: Process scheduling in Linux. Process Synchronization: The critical-section problem – Synchronization hardware – Semaphores – Classic problems of synchronization – critical regions – Monitors. Deadlock: System model – Deadlock characterization – Methods for handling deadlocks – Deadlock prevention – Deadlock avoidance – Deadlock detection – Recovery from deadlock. UNIT III STORAGE MANAGEMENT 9 Memory Management: Background – Swapping – Contiguous memory allocation –Paging – Segmentation – Segmentation with paging. Virtual Memory: Background – Demand paging – Process creation – Page replacement – Allocation of frames – Thrashing. Case Study: Memory management in Linux UNIT IV FILE SYSTEMS 9 File-System Interface: File concept – Access methods – Directory structure – File -system mounting – Protection. File-System Implementation : Directory implementation – Allocation methods – Free-space management – efficiency and performance – recovery – log-structured file systems. Case studies: File system in Linux – file system in Windows XP

52

UNIT V I/O SYSTEMS 9 I/O Systems – I/O Hardware – Application I/O interface – kernel I/O subsystem – Streams – performance. Mass-Storage Structure: Disk scheduling – Disk management – Swap-space management – RAID – disk attachment – stable storage – tertiary storage. Case study: I/O in Linux TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Silberschatz, Galvin, and Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, Sixth Edition, Wiley

India Pvt Ltd, 2003. 2. D. M. Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems: A concepts based approach”, Second Edition,

Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2006.

REFERENCES 1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Second Edition, Pearson

Education/PHI, 2001. 2. Harvey M. Deital, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.

PTCS2070 VISUAL LANGUAGES AND APPLICATIONS L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To study the principles and techniques of windows programming using MFC, procedures, resources, controls and database programming through the visual languages, Visual C++ and Visual Basic.

OBJECTIVES

To study about the concepts of windows programming models, MFC applications, drawing with the GDI, getting inputs from Mouse and the Keyboard.

To study the concepts of Menu basics, menu magic and classic controls of the windows programming using VC++.

To study the concept of Document/View Architecture with single & multiple document interface, toolbars, status bars and File I/O Serialization.

To study about the integrated development programming event driven programming, variables, constants, procedures and basic ActiveX controls in visual basic.

To understand the database and the database management system, visual data manager, data bound controls and ADO controls in VB.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF WINDOWS AND MFC 9 Messages - Windows programming - SDK style - Hungarian notation and windows data types - SDK programming in perspective.The benefits of C++ and MFC - MFC design philosophy - Document/View architecture - MFC class hierarchy - AFX functions. Application object - Frame window object - Message map. Drawing the lines – Curves – Ellipse – Polygons and other shapes. GDI pens – Brushes - GDI fonts - Deleting GDI objects and deselecting GDI objects. Getting input from the mouse: Client & Non-client - Area mouse messages - Mouse wheel - Cursor. Getting input from the keyboard: Input focus - Keystroke messages - Virtual key codes - Character & dead key messages.

53

UNIT II RESOURCES AND CONTROLS 9 Creating a menu – Loading and displaying a menu – Responding to menu commands – Command ranges - Updating the items in menu, update ranges – Keyboard accelerators. Creating menus programmatically - Modifying menus programmatically - The system menu - Owner draw menus – Cascading menus - Context menus. The C button class – C list box class – C static class - The font view application – C edit class – C combo box class – C scrollbar class. Model dialog boxes – Modeless dialog boxes. UNIT III DOCUMENT / VIEW ARCHITECTURE 9 The inexistence function revisited – Document object – View object – Frame window object – Dynamic object creation. SDI document template - Command routing. Synchronizing multiple views of a document – Mid squares application – Supporting multiple document types – Alternatives to MDI. Splitter Windows: Dynamic splitter window – Static splitter windows. Creating & initializing a toolbar - Controlling the toolbar’s visibility – Creating & initializing a status bar - Creating custom status bar panes – Status bar support in appwizard. Opening, closing and creating the files - Reading & Writing – C file derivatives – Serialization basics - Writing serializable classes. UNIT IV FUNDAMENTALS OF VISUAL BASIC 10 Menu bar – Tool bar – Project explorer – Toolbox – Properties window – Form designer – Form layout – Intermediate window. Designing the user interface: Aligning the controls – Running the application – Visual development and event driven programming. Variables: Declaration – Types – Converting variable types – User defined data types - Lifetime of a variable. Constants - Arrays – Types of arrays. Procedures: Subroutines – Functions – Calling procedures. Text box controls – List box & Combo box controls – Scroll bar and slider controls – File controls. UNIT V DATABASE PROGRAMMING WITH VB 8 Record sets – Data control – Data control properties, methods. Visual data manager: Specifying indices with the visual data manager – Entering data with the visual data manager. Data bound list control – Data bound combo box – Data bound grid control. Mapping databases: Database object – Table def object, Query def object. Programming the active database objects – ADO object model – Establishing a connection - Executing SQL statements – Cursor types and locking mechanism – Manipulating the record set object – Simple record editing and updating.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Jeff Prosise, ‘Programming Windows With MFC’, Second Edition, WP Publishers &

Distributors [P] Ltd, Reprinted 2002. 2. Evangelos Petroutsos, ‘Mastering Visual Basic 6.0’, BPB Publications, 2002. REFERENCES 1. Herbert Schildt, ‘MFC Programming From the Ground Up’, Second Edition, Tata

McGraw Hill, reprinted 2002. 2. John Paul Muller, ‘Visual C++ 6 From the Ground Up Second Edition’, Tata McGraw

Hill, Reprinted 2002. 3. Curtis Smith & Micheal Amundsen, ‘Teach Yourself Database Programming with

Visual Basic 6 in 21 days’, Techmedia Pub, 1999.

54

PTEI2021 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM The course is designed to familiarize the student with the functions and instrumentation available in a modern power generation plant.

OBJECTIVES

To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with a particular stress on thermal power generation.

To bring out the various measurements involved in power generation plants. To provide knowledge about the different types of devices used for analysis. To inpart knowledge about the different types of controls and control loops. To familiarize the student with the methods of monitoring different parameters like

speed, vibration of turbines and their control UNIT I OVERVIEW OF POWER GENERATION 9 Brief survey of methods of power generation – hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and wind power – importance of instrumentation in power generation – thermal power plants – building blocks – details of boiler processes UP&I diagram of boiler – cogeneration. UNIT II MEASUREMENTS IN POWER PLANTS 9 Electrical measurements – current, voltage, power, frequency, power – factor etc. – non electrical parameters – flow of feed water, fuel, air and steam with correction factor for temperature – steam pressure and steam temperature – drum level measurement – radiation detector – smoke density measurement – dust monitor. UNIT III ANALYZERS IN POWER PLANTS 9 Flue gas oxygen analyser – analysis of impurities in feed water and steam – dissolved oxygen analyser – chromatography – PH meter – fuel analyser – pollution monitoring instruments. UNIT IV CONTROL LOOPS IN BOILER 9 Combustion control – air/fuel ratio control – furnace draft control – drum level control – main stem and reheat steam temperature control – superheater control – attemperator – deaerator control – distributed control system in power plants – interlocks in boiler operation. UNIT V TURBINE – MONITORING AND CONTROL 9 Speed, vibration, shell temperature monitoring and control – steam pressure control – lubricant oil temperature control – cooling system TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS 1. Sam G. Dukelow, The control of Boilers, instrument Society of America, 1991. 2. Modern Power Station Practice, Vol.6, Instrumentation, Controls and Testing,

Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1971.

REFERENCES 1. Elonka,S.M.and Kohal A.L.Standard Boiler Operations, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1994. 2. R.K.Jain, Mechanical and industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi,

1995.

55

PTEI2022 INSTRUMENTATION IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To expose the students to the Instrumentation applied in petrochemical industries. OBJECTIVES To expose the students to the basic processing in petroleum industry. To provide adequate knowledge about the unit operations. To impart knowledge pertaining to the petroleum products and the chemicals

obtained from them. To provide adequate knowledge about the measurement of various parameters in

petrochemical industry. To expose the students to the various control loops in Petrochemical Industry.

UNIT I PETROLEUM PROCESSING 9 Petroleum exploration – Recovery techniques – Oil – Gas separation - Processing wet gases – Refining of crude oil.

UNIT II OPERATIONS IN PETROLEUM INDUSTRY 9 Thermal cracking – Catalytic cracking – Catalytic reforming – Polymerisation – Alkylation – Isomerization – Production of ethylene, acetylene and propylene from petroleum. UNIT III CHEMICALS FROM PETROLEUM PRODUCTS 9 Chemicals from petroleum – Methane derivatives – Acetylene derivatives – Ethylene derivatives – Propylene derivatives – Other products. UNIT III MEASUREMENTS IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRY 9 Parameters to be measured in refinery and petrochemical industry – Selection and maintenance of measuring instruments – Intrinsic safety of Instruments. UNIT IV CONTROL LOOPS IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRY 9 Process control in refinery and petrochemical industry – Control of distillation column – Control of catalytic crackers and pyrolysis unit – Automatic control of polyethylene production – Control of vinyl chloride and PVC production.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. A.L. Waddams, ‘Chemicals from Petroleum’, Butter and Janner Ltd., 1968. 2. J.G. Balchan. and K.I. Mumme, ‘Process Control Structures and Applications’, Van

Nostrand Reinhold Company, New York, 1988. REFERENCES 1. Austin G.T. Shreeves, ‘Chemical Process Industries’, McGraw Hill International

Student edition, Singapore, 1985. 2. B.G Liptak, ‘Instrumentation in Process Industries’, Chilton Book Company, 1994.

56

PTEI2023 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM The course is designed to familiarize the student with the functions and applications of MEMS.

OBJECTIVES To study about MEMS and parts of MEMS To study the design methodalogy of MEMS for various mechanics. To study about actuators in MEMS. To study about MEMS based circuits. To study about optical and RF based MEMS.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MEMS 9 MEMS and Microsystems, Miniaturization, Typical products, Micro Sensors,Micro actuation, MEMS with micro actuators, Microaccelorometers and Micro fluidics, MEMS materials, Micro Fabrication UNIT II MECHANICS FOR MEMS DESIGN 9 Elasticity, Stress, strain and material properties, Bending of thin plates, Spring configurations, torsional deflection, Mechanical vibration, Resonance, Thermo mechanics – actuators, force and response time, Fracture and thin film mechanics, material, physical vapor deposition (PVD), chemical mechanical polishing (CMP) UNIT III ELECTRO STATIC DESIGN 9 Electrostatics: basic theory, electro static instability, Surface tension, gap and finger pull up, Electro static actuators, Comb generators, gap closers, rotary motors, inch worms, Electromagnetic actuators, bistable actuators. UNIT IV CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM ISSUES 9 Electronic interfaces, Feed back systems, Noise, Circuit and system issues, Case studies –Capacitive accelerometer, Peizo electric pressure sensor, Thermal sensors, radiation sensors, mechanical sensors, bio-chemical sensors Modeling of MEMS systems, CAD for MEMS. UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL AND RF MEMS 9 Optical MEMS, system design basics – Gaussian optics, matrix operations, Resolution, Case studies, MEMS scanners and retinal scanning, display, Digital Micro mirror devices, RF Memes – design basics, case study – Capacitive RF MEMS switch, Performance issues.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. Stephen Santeria, “Microsystems Design “, Kluwer publishers, 2000.

REFERENCES 1. Nadim Maluf, “ An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design”, Artech

House, 2000. 2. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, editor, “ The MEMS Handbook”, CRC press Baco Raton, 2000 3. Tai Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture” Tata McGraw Hill,

New Delhi, 2002. 4. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay k. varadan, Osama O.Awadelkarim,micro sensors mems and

smart devices, John Wiley & son LTD,2002 5. James J.Allen, micro electro mechanical system design, CRC Press published in

2005

57

PTGE2023 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOSCIENCE L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I INTRODUCTION 10 Nanoscale Science and Technology- Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Engineering-Classifications of nanostructured materials- nano particles- quantum dots, nanowires-ultra-thinfilms-multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties: Mechanical, Electronic, Optical, Magnetic and Thermal properties. Introduction to properties and motivation for study (qualitative only). UNIT II PREPARATION METHODS 10 Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Precipitation, Mechanical Milling, Colloidal routes, Self-assembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Atomic Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE. UNIT III PATTERNING AND LITHOGRAPHY FOR NANOSCALE DEVICES 5 Introduction to optical/UV electron beam and X-ray Lithography systems and processes, Wet etching, dry (Plasma /reactive ion) etching, Etch resists-dip pen lithography UNIT IV PREPARATION ENVIRONMENTS 10 Clean rooms: specifications and design, air and water purity, requirements for particular processes, Vibration free environments: Services and facilities required. Working practices, sample cleaning, Chemical purification, chemical and biological contamination, Safety issues, flammable and toxic hazards, biohazards. UNIT V CHARECTERISATION TECHNIQUES 10 X-ray diffraction technique, Scanning Electron Microscopy - environmental techniques, Transmission Electron Microscopy including high-resolution imaging, Surface Analysis techniques- AFM, SPM, STM, SNOM, ESCA, SIMS-Nanoindentation.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications, (Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 1996) 2. N John Dinardo, Nanoscale charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces, Second edition, Weinheim Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000 REFERENCES 1. G Timp (Editor), Nanotechnology, AIP press/Springer, 1999 2. Akhlesh Lakhtakia (Editor) The Hand Book of Nano Technology, “Nanometer

Structure”, Theory, Modeling and Simulations. Prentice-Hall of India (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2007.

58

PTEC2055 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To introduce the concept of analyzing the digital image fundamentals and digital image processing. OBJECTIVES

To study the digital image fundamentals and its applications. To study various filters used in digital image processing. To study about the segmentation & representation schemes. To study about recognition & interpretation methods. To study about imagecompression.

UNIT I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9 Elements of visual perception, psycho visual model, brightness, contrast, hue, saturation, mach band effect, Color image fundamentals -RGB,HSI models, Image sampling, Quantization, dither, Two-dimensional mathematical formulation. UNIT II IMAGE TRANSFORMS 9 1D DFT, 2D transforms – DFT, DCT, Discrete Sine, Walsh, Hadamard, Slant, Haar, KLT, SVD, Wavelet Transform.

UNIT III IMAGE ENHANCEMENT AND RESTORATION 9 Histogram modification and specification techniques, Noise distributions, Spatial averaging, Directional Smoothing, Median and filters, Homomorphic filtering, Color image enhancement. Image Restoration – degradation model, Inverse filtering – removal of blur, Wiener filtering, Geometric transformations – spatial transformations, Gray-Level interpolation, UNIT IV IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND RECOGNITION 9 Edge detection. Image segmentation by region growing, region splitting and merging, edge linking.. Image Recognition – Patterns and pattern classes, Matching by minimum distance classifier, Matching by correlation, Image classification using neural network. UNIT V IMAGE COMPRESSION 9 Need for data compression, Huffman,. Run Length Encoding, Shift codes, Arithmetic coding, Vector Quantization, Block Truncation Coding. Transform Coding – DCT and Wavelet. JPEG, MPEG. Standards, principles of Context based Compression.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. William K.Pratt, ‘ Digital Image Processing’, John Wiley, NewYork,2002. 2. Anil K. Jain, ‘Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing’, Prentice Hall of India, 2002. REFERENCES 1. David Salomon : Data Compression – The Complete Reference, Springer Verlag New

York Inc., 2nd Edition, 2001 2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, Steven Eddins, ‘ Digital Image Processing

using MATLAB’, Pearson Education, Inc., 2004. 3. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, ‘Digital Image Processing’, Pearson Education,

Inc., Second Edition, 2004 4. Milman Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, ‘Image Processing, Analysis, and

Machine Vision’, Brooks/Cole, Vikas Publishing House, II ed., 1999. 5. Sid Ahmed, M.A., ‘Image Processing Theory, Algorithms and Architectures’, McGraw-

Hill, 1995.

59

PTEC2056 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To understand the advanved communication engineering concepts. OBJECTIVES

To have a detailed knowledge of various spread spectrum techniques. To understand the basic principles of mobile communication and bluetooth

technology. To have an exposure towards the high performance communication networks –

ATM and ISDN To understand the operation of Radar and Navigationational aids.

UNIT I SPREAD SPECTRUM COMMUNICATION 9 Spread spectrum techniques-spreading techniques-PN sequences-DSSS, RHSS-use of spread spectrum with CDMA UNIT II MOBILE COMMUNICATION 9 Basic cellular system-performance criteria-operation of cellular system-cell splitting-interference GSM, GPRS, Blue tooth-the link controller, the link manager, the host controller interface, LLCAP, WLL, Multiple access techniques UNIT III ATM 9 ATM’s position in OSL model-B-ISDN protocol reference model-ATM functions and layers-ATM signaling principles, TM operation and maintenance-ATM protocol stack: lower layers, fibre based networks and its advantages-ATM physical layer media UNIT IV ISDN 9 ISDN standards, ISDN interface and functions-UNI-ISDN proctol architecture, ISDN physical layer, ISDN dataline layer-Network interface UNIT V RADAR AND NAVIGATIONAL AIDS 9 Radar block diagram and operation-Radar range equation-Prediction of range performance-Minimum detectable signal-Pulse repetition frequency and range ambiguities-CW and FM CW radar-Synthetic aperature and air surveillance radar-ECCM and bistatic radar

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. M.I. SKOLNIK, Introduction to Radar-Mc Graw Hill and Edition 2. William C.Y.Lee, Mobile Cellular Telecommunications system-Mc Graw Hill

International Ed. 1990 3. Simon Haykin, ‘Digital communications’, John Wiley and Sons, 1988 4. William Stallings,’ISDN and BISDN’ Macmillan Publishers, 1995 REFERENCES 1. Jennifer Bray and Charles F. Sturman, ‘Bluetooth’, Pearson Education Asia, 2001.

60

PTEC2057 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C 3 0 0 3 [Review of discrete-time signals and systems- DFT and FFT, Z-Transform, Digital Filters is recommended]

AIM To provide adequate knowledge in Random signal processing. OBJECTIVES Detail study of time averaging , ensamble averaging & study of power spectral density. Detail study of parametric & non – parametric estimation Detail study of adaptive filters & its applications Introduction study of multivariable digital signal processing.

UNIT I DISCRETE RANDOM SIGNAL PROCESSING 9 Discrete Random Processes- Ensemble averages, stationary processes, Autocorrelation and Auto covariance matrices. Parseval's Theorem, Wiener-Khintchine Relation- Power Spectral Density-Periodogram Spectral Factorization, Filtering random processes. Low Pass Filtering of White Noise. Parameter estimation: Bias and consistency. UNIT II SPECTRUM ESTIMATION 9 Estimation of spectra from finite duration signals, Non-Parametric Methods-Correlation Method , Periodogram Estimator, Performance Analysis of Estimators -Unbiased, Consistent Estimators- Modified periodogram, Bartlett and Welch methods, Blackman –Tukey method. Parametric Methods - AR, MA, ARMA model based spectral estimation. Parameter Estimation -Yule-Walker equations, solutions using Durbin’s algorithm UNIT III LINEAR ESTIMATION AND PREDICTION 9 Linear prediction- Forward and backward predictions, Solutions of the Normal equations- Levinson-Durbin algorithms. Least mean squared error criterion -Wiener filter for filtering and prediction , FIR Wiener filter and Wiener IIR filters. UNIT IV ADAPTIVE FILTERS 9 FIR adaptive filters -adaptive filter based on steepest descent method-Widrow-Hoff LMS adaptive algorithm, Normalized LMS. Adaptive channel equalization-Adaptive echo cancellation-Adaptive noise cancellation- Adaptive recursive filters (IIR). UNIT V MULTIRATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING 9 Mathematical description of change of sampling rate - Interpolation and Decimation , Decimation by an integer factor - Interpolation by an integer factor, Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor, Filter implementation for sampling rate conversion- direct form FIR structures, Polyphase filter structures, time-variant structures. Multistage implementation of multirate system.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Monson H.Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling, John Wiley and

Sons, Inc., Singapore, 2002. 2. John G. Proakis, Dimitris G.Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing Pearson Education,

2002.

61

REFERENCES 1. John G. Proakis et.al.’Algorithms for Statistical Signal Processing’, Pearson

Education, 2002. 2. Dimitris G.Manolakis et.al.’ Statistical and adaptive signal Processing’, McGraw Hill,

New York, 2000. 3. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, ‘Digital Image Processing’, Pearson

Education, Inc., Second Edition, 2004.( For Wavelet Transform Topic)

PTEE 2023 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To provide comprehensive knowledge of robotics in the design, analysis and control point of view. OBJECTIVES To study the various parts of robots and fields of robotics. To study the various kinematics and inverse kinematics of robots. To study the Euler, Lagrangian formulation of Robot dynamics. To study the trajectory planning for robot. To study the control of robots for some specific applications.

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS 9 Definition and origin of robotics – different types of robotics – various generations of robots – degrees of freedom – Asimov’s laws of robotics – dynamic stabilization of robots.

UNIT II POWER SOURCES AND SENSORS 9 Hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives – determination of HP of motor and gearing ratio – variable speed arrangements – path determination – micro machines in robotics – machine vision – ranging – laser – acoustic – magnetic, fiber optic and tactile sensors. UNIT III MANIPULATORS, ACTUATORS AND GRIPPERS 9 Construction of manipulators – manipulator dynamics and force control – electronic and pneumatic manipulator control circuits – end effectors – U various types of grippers – design considerations.

UNIT IV KINEMATICS AND PATH PLANNING 9 Solution of inverse kinematics problem – multiple solution jacobian work envelop – hill climbing techniques – robot programming languages

UNIT V CASE STUDIES 9 Mutiple robots – machine interface – robots in manufacturing and non- manufacturing applications – robot cell design – selection of robot.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

62

TEXT BOOKS 1. Mikell P. Weiss G.M., Nagel R.N., Odraj N.G., Industrial Robotics, McGraw-Hill

Singapore, 1996. 2. Ghosh, Control in Robotics and Automation: Sensor Based Integration, Allied

Publishers, Chennai, 1998. REFERENCES 1. Deb.S.R., Robotics technology and flexible Automation, John Wiley, USA 1992. 2. Asfahl C.R., Robots and manufacturing Automation, John Wiley, USA 1992. 3. Klafter R.D., Chimielewski T.A., Negin M., Robotic Engineering – An integrated

approach, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1994. 4. Mc Kerrow P.J. Introduction to Robotics, Addison Wesley, USA, 1991. 5. Issac Asimov I Robot, Ballantine Books, New York, 1986. PTGE2022 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9 Introduction - Need for quality - Evolution of quality - Definition of quality - Dimensions of manufacturing and service quality - Basic concepts of TQM - Definition of TQM – TQM Framework - Contributions of Deming, Juran and Crosby – Barriers to TQM. UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9 Leadership – Strategic quality planning, Quality statements - Customer focus – Customer orientation, Customer satisfaction, Customer complaints, Customer retention - Employee involvement – Motivation, Empowerment, Team and Teamwork, Recognition and Reward, Performance appraisal - Continuous process improvement – PDSA cycle, 5s, Kaizen - Supplier partnership – Partnering, Supplier selection, Supplier Rating. UNIT III TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES I 9 The seven traditional tools of quality – New management tools – Six-sigma: Concepts, methodology, applications to manufacturing, service sector including IT – Bench marking – Reason to bench mark, Bench marking process – FMEA – Stages, Types. UNIT IV TQM TOOLS & TECHNIQUES II 9 Quality circles – Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – Taguchi quality loss function – TPM – Concepts, improvement needs – Cost of Quality – Performance measures. UNIT V QUALITY SYSTEMS 9 Need for ISO 9000- ISO 9000-2000 Quality System – Elements, Documentation, Quality auditing- QS 9000 – ISO 14000 – Concepts, Requirements and Benefits – Case studies of TQM implementation in manufacturing and service sectors including IT.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOK 1. Dale H.Besterfiled, et at., “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education Asia, Third Edition, Indian Reprint (2006).

63

REFERENCES 1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, “The Management and Control of Quality”,

(6th Edition), South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2005. 2. Oakland, J.S. “TQM – Text with Cases”, Butterworth – Heinemann Ltd., Oxford, Third

Edition (2003). 3. Suganthi,L and Anand Samuel, “Total Quality Management”, Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.

Ltd. (2006) 4. Janakiraman,B and Gopal, R.K, “Total Quality Management – Text and Cases”,

Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd. (2006) PTGE2025 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN ENGINEERING L T P C 3 0 0 3 UNIT I ENGINEERING ETHICS 9 Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Professions and Professionalism – Professional Ideals and Virtues – Uses of Ethical Theories UNIT II ENGINEERING AS SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION 9 Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Research Ethics - Codes of Ethics – Industrial Standards - A Balanced Outlook on Law – The Challenger Case Study UNIT III ENGINEER’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY 9 Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis – Reducing Risk – The Government Regulator’s Approach to Risk - Chernobyl Case Studies and Bhopal UNIT IV RESPONSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 9 Collegiality and Loyalty – Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime – Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) - Discrimination UNIT V GLOBAL ISSUES 9 Multinational Corporations – Business Ethics - Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics - Role in Technological Development – Weapons Development – Engineers as Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors – Honesty – Moral Leadership – Sample Code of Conduct

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Mike Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, McGraw Hill, New York (2005). 2. Charles E Harris, Michael S Pritchard and Michael J Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts and Cases”, Thompson Learning, (2000).

64

REFERENCES 1. Charles D Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall, New Mexico, (1999). 2. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, (2003) 3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and

Engineers”, Oxford University Press, (2001) 4. Prof. (Col) P S Bajaj and Dr. Raj Agrawal, “Business Ethics – An Indian Perspective”,

Biztantra, New Delhi, (2004) 5. David Ermann and Michele S Shauf, “Computers, Ethics and Society”, Oxford 6. University Press, (2003)

PTIC2401 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To provide sound knowledge on the principles of discrete data control system

OBJECTIVES

To study the importance of sample data control system. To give adequate knowledge about signal processing in digital control. To study the importance of modeling of discrete systems and stability analysis of

discrete data system. To study the importance of state space representation for discrete data system. To introduce the design concept for digital controllers.

UNIT I COMPUTER CONTROLLED SYSTEM 9 Configuration of the basic digital control scheme – general sampled data system variables – signal classifications – why use digital control system – Advantages – disadvantages – examples of discrete data and digital control systems. UNIT II SIGNAL PROCESSING IN DIGITAL CONTROL 9 Sampling process – Frequency domain analysis – ideal samples – Shanon’s sampling theorem – generation and solution of process – linear difference equations – data reconstruction process – frequency domain characteristics. UNIT III DISCRETE SYSTEM MODELLING 9 Determination of the transform – mapping between s and domains - transform of system equations – open loop Hybrid sampled Data Control Systems – open loop discrete Input Data Control System – closed loop sampled data control system – modified transform method – response between sampling instants – stability on the -plane and jury’s stability test – steady state error analysis for stable systems. UNIT IV STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS OF DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 9 State descriptions of digital processors – conversion of state variable models to transfer functions – conversion of transfer functions to canonical state variable models – first comparison form – second companion form – Jordon Canonical form – state description of sampled continuous time plants – solution of state difference equations – closed form solution – state transition matrix – Caley Hamilton Technique – concept of controllability and absorbability – loss of controllability and absorbability due to sampling.

65

UNIT V DESIGN OF DIGITAL CONTROL 9 Digital PI, PD and PID Controller – Position and velocity forms – state regulator design – design of state observers – dead beat control by state feed back and dead beat observers.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS 1. C.M. Houpis, G.B. Lamount, ‘Digital Control Systems-Theory, Hardware, Software’,

International Student Edition, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1985. 2. M.Gopal, ‘Digital Control and State Variables Methods’, Tata McGraw HILL, 2nd

Edition, 2003. REFERENCES 1. B.C. Kuo, “Digital control systems”, Second Edition, Oxford University press, 1992. 2. P.B. Deshpande and R.H. Ash, ‘Computer Process Control’, ISA Publication, USA,

1995. PTCS2461 APPLIED SOFT COMPUTING L T P C 3 0 0 3 AIM To cater the knowledge of Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic Control, Genetic Algorithm and Evolutionary Programming and their applications for controlling real time systems. OBJECTIVES To expose the concepts of feed forward neural networks. To provide adequate knowledge about feed back neural networks. To teach about the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems. To provide adequate knowledge about fuzzy set theory. To expose the ideas of GA and EP in optimization and control. UNIT I ANN - INTRODUCTION 9 Introduction – Biological neuron – Artificial neuron – Neuron modeling – Learning rules – Single layer – Multi layer feed forward network – Back propagation – Learning factors. UNIT II ANN - ARCHITECTURE AND APPLICATIONS 9 Feedback networks – Discrete time Hopfield networks – Transient response of continuous time networks – Process modeling using ANN- Neuro controller for inverted pendulum.

UNIT III FUZZY SYSTEMS 9 Classical sets – Fuzzy sets – Fuzzy relations – Fuzzification - Membership functions – Defuzzification – Methods of defuzzification – Fuzzy rules.

66

UNIT IV FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL 9 Membership function – Knowledge base – Decision-making logic – Optimisation of membership function using neural networks – Adaptive fuzzy system.- FLC for inverted pendulum- Home heating system- Introduction to Neuro-fuzzy systems. UNIT V OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 9 Gradient Search – Non-gradient search – Genetic Algorithms: Operators, search algorithm, penalty – Evolutionary Programming: Operators, Search Algorithms

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS TEXT BOOKS 1. Laurance Fausett, ‘Fundamentals of Neural Networks’, Pearson Education, 2004. 2. Timothy J. Ross, ‘Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications’, McGraw Hill, 1997. 3. David Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning’,

Pearson Education, 2007. REFERENCES 1. J.S.R.Jang, C.T.Sun and E.Mizutani, ‘ Neuro- Fuzzy and Soft Computing’ Pearson

Education, New Delhi, 2004 2. Jacek M. Zurada, ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’, Jaico Publishing home,

2002. 3. John Yen and Reza Langari, ‘Fuzzy Logic – Intelligence, Control and Information’,

Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003. 4. Robert J.Schalkoff, ‘ A rtifical Neural Networks’, McGraw Hill, 1997.